Dcrvx2100e Operation Manual

3-087-415-16 (1)
Digital
Video Camera
Recorder
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,
and retain it for future reference.
cpy cyaa
epe cyaae aapaa ae pe ae
pyc cxpae e aex cpa.
DCR-VX2100E
2003 Sony Corporation
English
Pycc
Welcome!
p aa!
Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony

Digital Handycam camcorder. With your
Digital Handycam, you can capture lifes
precious moments with superior picture and
sound quality. Your Digital Handycam is
loaded with advanced features, but at the same
time it is very easy to use. You will soon be
producing home video that you can enjoy for
years to come.
pae Bac c ppeee

eaep Digital Handycam p
Sony. C eaep Digital
Handycam aeae pe Ba
e c pecx
aec pae ya.
Beaepa Digital Handycam caea
ycepeca y,
e pe ee e e ca.
Bcpe B yee caa ceee
eppa, p cee
acaac ceye .
WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not
expose the unit to rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the
cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.
Notice
If static electricity or electromagnetism causes
data transfer to discontinue midway (fail),
restart the application or disconnect and
connect the i.LINK cable again.
NOTICE ON THE SUPPLIED AC

POWER ADAPTOR FOR CUSTOMERS
IN THE UNITED KINGDOM
A moulded plug complying with BS1363 is
fitted to this equipment for your safety and
convenience.
Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be
replaced, a fuse of the same rating as the
supplied one and approved by ASTA or BSI to
BS1362 (i.e., marked with
or mark) must
be used.
If the plug supplied with this equipment has
a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the
fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never
use the plug without the fuse cover. If you
should lose the fuse cover, please contact
your nearest Sony service station.
For the customers in Europe

ATTENTION
The electromagnetic fields at the specific
frequencies may influence the picture and
sound of this camcorder.
This product has been tested and found
compliant with the limits sets out in the EMC
Directive for using connection cable shorter
than 3 meters.
Memory Stick
N50

.

.

.
yaee Epe
BHMAHE
epae a peeex
acax y a paee
y, cpe a p
eaep.

, 3 .
Ec caece epec
epae e p
c epeae ax, epeapye
pee e ca
e ae i.LINK.
English
Table of contents
Checking supplied accessories ......................... 5
Quick Start Guide ............................................... 6
Getting Started
Using this manual ............................................. 10
Step 1 Preparing the power supply .............. 13
Step 2 Setting the date and time .................... 20
Step 3 Inserting a cassette ............................... 22
Recording Basics
Recording a picture .......................................... 24
Shooting backlit subjects
(BACK LIGHT) ................................... 34
Using the spot light function ................... 35
Self-timer recording .................................. 36
Checking the recording END SEARCH /
EDITSEARCH /Rec Review ........................ 38
Playback Basics
Playing back a tape ........................................... 40
Viewing the recording on TV ......................... 46
Advanced Recording Operations
Recording a still image on a tape
Tape Photo recording ................................. 48
Shooting with all the pixels
PROG. SCAN ............................................... 51
Using the guide frame ..................................... 53
Using the wide mode ....................................... 54
Using the fader function .................................. 56
Using special effects Picture effect .............. 58
Using special effects Digital effect .............. 60
Shooting with manual adjustment ................. 63
Adjusting the white balance ........................... 72
Adjusting recording level manually
Sound recording level ................................ 75
Presetting the adjustment for picture quality
Custom preset ............................................. 77
Using the PROGRAM AE function ................ 79
Focusing manually ........................................... 83
Interval recording ............................................. 85
Frame by frame recording
Cut recording .............................................. 89
Marking an Index ............................................. 91
Advanced Playback Operations
Quickly locating a scene using the zero set
memory function ........................................... 93
Searching for a recording by index
Index search ................................................. 95
Searching the boundaries of recorded tape
by title Title search ...................................... 97
Searching a recording by date
Date search ................................................... 99
Searching for a photo Photo search/Photo
scan ................................................................ 101
Playing back a tape with picture effects ...... 104
Playing back a tape with digital effects ....... 105
Editing
Dubbing a tape ................................................ 107
Dubbing only desired scenes
Digital program editing ........................... 110
Using with an analog video unit and a PC
Signal convert function ............................ 128
Recording video or TV programs ................ 130
Inserting a scene from a VCR
Insert editing ............................................. 134
Audio dubbing ................................................ 137
Superimposing a title ..................................... 143
Making your own titles .................................. 149
Labeling a cassette .......................................... 151
Erasing the cassette memory data ................ 153
Customizing Your Camcorder
Changing the menu settings ......................... 156
Memory Stick Operations
Using a Memory Stick introduction ...... 170
Recording still images on a Memory Stick
Memory Photo recording ........................ 177
Superimposing a still image in a Memory
Stick on a moving picture
MEMORY MIX .......................................... 182
Recording an image from a tape as a still
image ............................................................. 187
Copying still images from a tape
Photo save .................................................. 191
Viewing a still picture Memory Photo
playback ........................................................ 193
Copying an image recorded on a Memory
Stick to tapes ............................................... 198
Playing back images continuously
SLIDE SHOW ............................................ 200
Preventing accidental erasure
Image protection ....................................... 202
Deleting images .............................................. 204
Writing a print mark Print mark ............... 208
Additional Information
Usable cassettes ............................................... 210
About i.LINK ................................................... 214
Troubleshooting .............................................. 216
Self-diagnosis display .................................... 222
Warning indicators and messages ............... 230
Using your camcorder abroad ...................... 233
Maintenance information and precautions . 234
Specifications ................................................... 241
Quick Reference
Identifying the parts and controls ................ 243
Quick Function Guide .................................... 256
Index ................................................................. 258
Pycc
Oaee
pepa paaex
paece ...................................... 5
Pyc cpy aycy ............ 8
a cyaa
cae a pyca ...... 10
y 1 a ca a . 13
y 2 caa a pee ......... 20
y 3 caa acce ...................... 22
ac - Oce e
ac pae .................................. 24
Cea e c ae ce
(BACK LIGHT) ................................ 34
cae pea pep
cee ...................................... 35
ac aepy caayca ........ 36
pepa ac END SEARCH /
EDITSEARCH/ pcp ac ............ 38
Bcpeee Oce
e
Bcpeee e ........................... 40
pcp ac a pae eepa . 46
cepecae epa ce
ac e pae a
ey ac pa a ey ... 48
Cea c cae cex ce
PROG. SCAN ......................................... 51
cae p pa ......... 53
cae ppa
pea ..................................................... 54
cae y eepa ........... 56
cae ceax e
e pae .......................... 58
cae ceax e
p e ................................ 60
Cea c cae py
peyp ............................................. 63
Peypa aaca e ea ......... 72
Peypa yp ac pyy
pe ac ya .......................... 75
peapea acpa aeca
pae yaa
acpa ................................................. 77
cae y PROGRAM AE .. 79
Pya ycpa ................................. 83
ac c epaa ............................... 85
apa ac ac c a
apa .................................................... 89
ac ec e ........................... 91
cepecae epa
cpee
cp c a c
y a ye e ......... 93
c ac ecy c
ecy ..................................................... 95
c pa ac a ee py
c pa ........................................... 97
c ac ae c a ........ 99
c c/
capae ................................ 101
Bcpeee e c ea
pae .......................................... 104
Bcpeee e c p
ea ............................................. 105
Ma
epeac e .................................... 107
epeac yx
p ea
ppae .............................................. 110
cae c aa
epyae y
pepaa caa ...................... 128
ac e eeppa ............ 130
Bcaa a c eaa
Ma ca .................................. 134
Ayepeac ..................................... 137
Haee pa ..................................... 143
Cae Bax ccex p ... 149
Mappa acce ............................... 151
Cpae ax a acce ......... 153
Bee yax yca
a eaepe
eee yca e .................... 156
Oepa c Memory Stick
cae Memory Stick
eee ............................................. 170
ac ex pae a
Memory Stick ac pa
a .................................................... 177
Haee e pae
Memory Stick a e
paee MEMORY MIX ............... 182
ac pae c acce a
e pae ................ 187
pae ex pae c
acce Cxpaee a
c .......................................... 191
pcp e pae
Bcpeee c
a .................................................... 193
pae pae, acax a
Memory Stick, a acce ................... 198
Hepepe cpeee
pae SLIDE SHOW ............... 200
pepaee cya cpa
aa pae ............................ 202
aee pae ........................... 204
ac eax a Print Mark ..... 208
ea pa
cyee acce ........................... 210
O aee i.LINK ........................................ 214
cpaee ecpace ................... 223
a caac .................. 229
peypeae ap
ce .............................................. 230
cae Bae eaep a
pae ................................................. 233
pa yxy a aapa ep
pecpc ................................ 234
Texece xapaepc ................. 242
Oepa cpa
Oaee ace peyp ....... 243
pae pyc y ....... 257
Aa yaae ........................... 259
Checking supplied
accessories
pepa paaex
paece
Make sure that the following accessories are

supplied with your camcorder.
eec, e ca
eaep x ceye
paec.
1 Wireless Remote Commander (1) (p. 252)

2 AC-L15A/L15B AC Adaptor (1), Mains lead
(1) (p. 14)
3 NP-F570 rechargeable battery pack (1)
(p. 13, 14)
4 R6 (size AA) battery for Remote
Commander (2) (p. 253)
Getting Started / a cyaa
1 ecp y ca
ypae (1) (cp. 252)
2 Aaep epee a AC-L15A/
L15B (1), p epa (1)
(cp. 14)
3 epeapae aape
NP-F570 (1) (cp. 13, 14)
6 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 46, 107)
4 aapea R6 (paepa AA) ya

ca ypae (2) (cp.
253)
7 Shoulder strap (1) (p. 249)
5 Memory Stick (1) (cp. 170)
8 Hood with a lens cap (1) (p. 247)
6 Cee ae ay/e
(1) (cp. 46, 107)
5 Memory Stick (1) (p. 170)
9 21-pin adaptor* (1) (p. 47)

* The models with
surfaces only.
mark printed on their bottom
7 ee pee (1) (cp. 249)

8 ea ea c p (1) (cp.
247)
9 21-p aaep* (1) (cp. 47)
* T e c a
cpe.
a e
English
Quick Start Guide
This guide introduces you to the basic way of recording/

playback. See the pages in parentheses ( ) for more
information.
Connecting the mains lead
(p. 18)
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 13).
Connect the plug with its
v mark facing toward the
LCD panel side.
Quick Start Guide
Open the DC IN jack

cover.
AC Adaptor (supplied)
Inserting a cassette
1
While pressing the

small blue button on
the EJECT switch, slide
it in the direction of the
arrow.
(p. 22)
Push the middle

portion of the back of
the cassette to insert it.
Insert the cassette into
the cassette
compartment with the
window facing out and
the write-protect tab
facing upward.
Close the cassette

compartment by
pressing the PUSH
mark on it.
Close the cassette lid

by pressing the PUSH
button on the cassette
lid.
Window
PUSH
Write-protect tab
Recording a picture
(p. 24)
Viewfinder
When the LCD panel is closed,
use the viewfinder placing your
eye against its eyecup.
Open the shutter of the

hood with a lens cap.
For more information
about attaching the
hood with a lens cap,
see page 247.
Set the POWER switch to

CAMERA while pressing the
small green button.
POWER
MEMORY
VCR
If the ND1 or ND2 indicator

flashes, see page 68.
Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD

screen (p. 40)
POWER
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
Set the POWER

switch to VCR while
pressing the small
green button.
VCR
Quick Start Guide
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
Slide OPEN
back in the B
mark
direction to
open the
LCD panel.
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
POWER
VCR
Press START/
STOP. Your
camcorder
starts recording.
To stop
recording, press
START/STOP
again.
OPEN
NOTE
Do not pick up your camcorder by holding
the viewfinder, the LCD panel, the battery
pack, or the microphone.
2
3
Press m to rewind the

tape.
Press N to start playback.
REW
PLAY
Pycc
Pyc cpy aycy
B pyce cac ce y
ac/cpee. C. cpa pyx
cax ( ) ye px cee.
ceee pa epa (cp. 18)
Pyc cpy aycy
p ca eaep e ee yec aape

(cp. 13).
cee eep a,
e a v
pae cpy ae
Aaep epee
.
a (x
Ope py
e)
ea DC IN.
caa acce (cp. 22)

1
Haa ey
c y a
epeaee
EJECT, epee
e apae
cpe.
Hae a cepey
ae cp
acce,
ca ee.
Bcae accey
acce ce,

pae apyy, a
eec a
ac - epx.
ape acce
ce, aa a e
ey PUSH.
ape py
acce cea,
aa a e y
PUSH.
PUSH
eec a
ac
ac pae (cp. 24)

Bcae
Ec ae apa,
cyec caee,
yp.
1 Ope py e
ea c p.
ee cee
ppee e
ea c p c.
a cp. 247.
4 Hae y
2 Haa aey eey
y, ycae
epeae POWER
ee CAMERA.
POWER
VCR
MEMORY
VCR
Ec ae ap ND1
ND2, c. cp. 68.
pcp cp pae a
pae (cp. 40)
POWER
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
epeae
POWER ee
VCR, aa aey
eey y.
VCR
1 cae
Pyc cpy aycy
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
epeae
OPEN aa
apae
cpe B,
p
ae .
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
3 epee
POWER
OPEN
START/STOP.
Beaepa
ae ac.
ca
ac ae
y START/
STOP ee pa.
PMEAHE
He ae eaepy, epa ee
a cae, ae ,
aape p.
2
3
Hae y m REW
epe e aa.
Hae y N PLAY
aaa cpee.
a cyaa
Getting Started
Using this manual

As you read through this manual, buttons and
settings on your camcorder are shown in
capital letters.
cae
a pyca
p e a pyca
yae, yca a
eaepe aa aa
ya.
e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.

When you carry out an operation, you can hear
a beep or a melody sound to indicate that the
operation is being carried out.
Note on cassette memory

Your camcorder is based on the DV format.
You can only use mini DV cassettes with your
camcorder. We recommend that you use a tape
with cassette memory
.
The functions which require different
operations depending on whether or not the
tape has cassette memory are:
Searching the end point of the recording
end search (p. 38, 45)
Searching a recording by index index
search (p. 95)
Searching a recording by date date search
(p. 99)
Searching for a photo photo search (p. 101).
The functions you can operate only with
cassette memory are:
Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by
title title search (p. 97)
Superimposing a title (p. 143)
Making your own titles (p. 149)
Labeling a cassette (p. 151).
For details, see page 210.
You see this mark in the introduction of
the features that are operated only with
cassette memory.
Tapes with cassette memory are marked with
(Cassette Memory).
Hapep: cae ae
POWER ee CAMERA.
p e epa a eaepe
yca y ca
e, epae ee
epa.
peae acce
a
Baa eaepa paae pae
DV. B ee ca
eaep acce DV.
Peeyec ca ey c
acce a
.
He epece y, pe
pey e pax epa,
acc , eec a ee
accea a e:
c eca a ac c
a (cp. 38, 45)
c ac ecy c
ecy (cp. 95)
c ac ae c a
(cp. 99)
c - c (cp. 101).
y, p B ee ypa
c acce a,
ceye:
c pa ac a ee py c pa (cp. 97)
Haee pa (cp. 143)
Cae Bax ccex p
(cp. 149)
Mappa acce (cp. 151).
pe cee pee a
cp. 210.
a ye p
ca y, pe
ypac c
acce a.
e c acce a appyc c
(accea a).
aa
10
Using this manual

Note on TV colour systems
Copyright precautions
Television programs, films, video tapes, and
other materials may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized recording of such materials may
be contrary to the provision of the copyright
laws.
Precautions on camcorder
care
Lens and LCD screen/finder
The LCD screen and the finder are
manufactured using extremely highprecision technology, so over 99.99% of
the pixels are operational for effective
use. However, there may be some tiny
black points and/or bright points (white,
red, blue or green in colour) that
constantly appear on the LCD screen and
the finder. These points are normal in the
manufacturing process and do not affect
the recording in any way.
Do not directly shoot the sun. Doing so might
cause your camcorder to malfunction. Take
pictures of the sun in low light conditions
such as dusk.
Cce e
eee
B pax cpaax peax
cyc pae cce e
eee. pcpa Bax
ace a pae eepa ex
ca eep a ae cce
PAL.
pecepeee
apc pae
Teee ppa, ,
ee pye aepa y
ae apc pa.
Heepaa ac ax
aepa e ppe
e aa apc pae.
Mep pecpc p
yxe a eaep
TV colour systems differ by country or region.

To view your recordings on a TV, you need a
PAL system-based TV.
cae a
pyca
Oe pa /
cae
pa cae
e c cae
c ex, ee
99,99% e paa e
cyc. Oa a pae
caee y c
c epe pe ee
(ee, pace, ce
eee). ee x e
ca c pce
pecc, pa e
a ac.
He ae eaepy p a
ce. e pec
ecpac eaep. Be
cey ca ycx
ceec, apep, p aae
ca.
11
cae a
pyca
Using this manual

Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep
your camcorder away from rain and sea
water. Letting your camcorder get wet may
cause your camcorder to malfunction.
Sometimes this malfunction cannot be
repaired [a].
Never leave your camcorder exposed to
temperatures above 60 C (140 F), such as in
a car parked in the sun or under direct
sunlight [b].
Be careful when placing the camera near a
window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD
screen, the finder or the lens to direct
sunlight for long periods may cause
malfunctions [c].
[a]
[b]
Contents of the recording cannot be

compensated if recording or playback is not
made due to a malfunction of the
camcorder, video tape, etc.
12
He ycae e a capy
yp eaep. pexpae
eaepy pc .
Baa e pec eaa
pae eaep. a
ecpac ycpa e [a].
Ha e cae eaepy
ecax, e eepaypa aec
ce 60 C, apep, ae,
papa ce ece,
p ce ce [b].
ye ae, a caee
aepy a e ee.
Bece p ce cea a
pa , cae e
eee e pee e
pec x ecpac [c].
[c]
Cepe aca aepaa

e cca, ec ac
cpeee e yc
pe ecpac eaep,
ee ..
Step 1 Preparing the

power supply
Installing the battery pack
Install the battery pack to use your camcorder
outdoors.
caa aape a
cae aape ,
ca eaepy e
ee.
(1) e cae.
(2) Bcae aape
apae cpe V, pace
a e. ae aape
ea.
To remove the battery pack
c aape a
Lift up the viewfinder.

Slide the battery pack out in the direction of
the arrow while pressing BATT RELEASE
down.
e cae.
epee aape
apae cpe, aa y BATT
RELEASE .
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.

(2) Insert the battery pack in the direction of
the V mark on the battery pack. Slide the
battery pack until it clicks.
y 1 a
ca a
BATT
RELEASE
13
Step 1 Preparing the power

supply
y 1 a ca
a
Charging the battery pack
apa aape a
Use the battery pack after charging it.

Your camcorder operates only with the
InfoLITHIUM battery pack (L series).
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the
AC Adaptor supplied with your camcorder
to the DC IN jack with the plugs v mark
facing toward the LCD panel side.
(2) Connect the mains lead to the AC Adaptor.
(3) Connect the mains lead to the wall socket.
(4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
Charging begins.
The remaining battery time is indicated in
minutes on the display window.
When the remaining battery indicator changes
to u, normal charge is completed. To fully
charge the battery (full charge), leave the
battery pack attached for about one hour after
normal charge is completed until FULL
appears on the display window. Fully
charging the battery allows you to use the
battery longer than usual.
cye aape ce e
ap.
Baa eaepa paae c
aape InfoLITHIUM
(cep L).
(1) Ope py ea DC IN
cee aaep epee
a, paae eaepe,
ey DC IN a, ea v a
eepe paea cpy
ae .
(2) cee p a
aaepy epee a.
(3) cee p epa
cee pee.
(4) cae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG). Haec
apa.
B e ce ye paac
pe caec apa yax.
Ec ap caec apa
ec a u, a,
paa apa aepea.
ap aape a
(a apa) cae aape
e pe a
ac ce aepe pa
ap ex p, a e ce
e c a FULL. a
apa aape a e Ba
ca aape e,
e .
MEMORY
14
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
POWER
VCR
y 1 a ca
a
After charging the battery pack

Disconnect the AC Adaptor from the DC IN
jack on your camcorder.
ce ap aape a
Ocee aaep epee a
ea DC IN eaep.
Note on the remaining battery time

indicator
The remaining battery time indicator on the
LCD screen/display window or in the
viewfinder indicates the recording time using
the viewfinder. The indicator may not be
correct, depending on the conditions in which
you are recording. When you close the LCD
panel and open it again, it takes about one
minute for the correct remaining battery time
to be displayed.
ap caec pee pa
aape
ap caec pee pa
aape a pae / e ce
caee aae pe ac c
cae. a e
e cce , acc
yc, px pc ac.
Ec ap ae p ee
ca, pe epe yy
c a, paaa
e caeec pe pa aape.
Notes
Prevent metallic objects from coming into
contact with the metal parts of the DC plug
of the AC adaptor. This may cause a shortcircuit, damaging the AC Adaptor.
Keep the battery pack dry.
When the battery pack is not to be used for a
long time, charge the battery pack once fully,
and then use it until it fully discharges again.
Keep the battery pack in a cool place.
Until your camcorder calculates the actual
remaining battery time
- - - - min appears in the display window.
While charging the battery pack, no
indicator appears or the indicator flashes in
the display window in the following cases:
The battery pack is not installed correctly.
The AC Adaptor is disconnected.
Something is wrong with the battery pack.
When using the AC Adaptor
Be sure to use it near the wall socket. If a
malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug from
the wall socket.
pea
He ycae cpce
eaecx pee c
eaec ac eepa
c a aaepa epee
a. e pec py
aa pee aaepa
epee a.
epe aape cyx
cc.
a aape e cyec
eee e peya
pee, c ape e, a
ae cye, a e papc
ae. pae aape
pxa ece.

supply
ex p, a Baa eaepa e
pee ecee pe
caec apa aape a
B e ce ye paac
a - - - - min.
B pe ap aape a
e ce e ye paac
ap ye a
ceyx cyax:
aape ycae
epa.
Ocee aaep epee a.
Hecpac aape a.
p ca aaepa
epee a
Oae ycae aapa p c
eppe. Ec e
ecpac, e y
pe.
15

supply
y 1 a ca
a
Charging time/Bpe ap
Battery pack/
aape
Full charge (Normal charge)/

a apa (paa apa)
NP-F550
210 (150)
NP-F570 (supplied/
x e)
260 (200)
NP-F730/F750
300 (240)
NP-F770
370 (310)
NP-F960
420 (360)
NP-F970
485 (425)
Approximate minutes to charge an empty

battery pack
pee pe yax
ap c pape
aape a
Recording time/Bpe ac
Battery pack/
aape
Recording with
the viewfinder/
ac c
cae
Continuous/
Hepepa
NP-F550
145 (135)
Typical*/
Continuous/
Ta* Hepepa
Typical*/
Ta*
80 (70)
130 (115)
70 (60)
NP-F570 (supplied/ 225 (200)

x e)
120 (100)
195 (175)
100 (90)
NP-F730
260 (235)
145 (130)
230 (205)
125 (110)
NP-F750
305 (265)
170 (145)
265 (235)
145 (130)
NP-F770
460 (410)
255 (220)
400 (360)
215 (190)
NP-F960
560 (500)
310 (280)
480 (430)
265 (240)
NP-F970
685 (615)
375 (340)
600 (540)
330 (295)
Approximate minutes of recording time when

you use a fully charged battery
Numbers in parentheses ( ) indicate the time
using a normally charged battery.
You cannot use the NP-500/510/710 battery
pack on your camcorder.
16
Recording with
the LCD screen/
ac c
paa
pee pe ac yax
p ca c ape
aape a
p cax ( ) yaa pe
p ca aape a c
pa ap.
B eaepe e ca
aape NP-500/510/710.
y 1 a ca
a
* Approximate minutes when recording while

you repeat recording start/stop, zooming
and turning the power on/off. The actual
battery life may be shorter.
* pee pe yax p
ac c epa yc/
ca, yeee pae
ee/ee a.
aec cp cy aape
a e pe.
Playing time/Bpe cpee

Battery pack/
aape
Playing time
on LCD screen/
Bpe cpee
a pae
Playing time
with LCD closed/
Bpe cpee
c ap
NP-F550
185 (165)
225 (195)
NP-F570 (supplied/)
x e)
275 (245)
335 (300)
NP-F730
305 (275)
385 (345)
NP-F750
375 (335)
460 (415)
NP-F770
560 (500)
685 (615)
NP-F960
680 (610)
830 (745)
NP-F970
840 (755)
1015 (910)
Approximate minutes of playing time when

you use a fully charged battery
Numbers in parentheses ( ) indicate the time
using a normally charged battery.
You cannot use the NP-500/510/710 battery
pack on your camcorder.
Notes
The supplied battery pack is charged a little.
Some types of the battery packs may not be
sold in your region or country.
Approximate recording time and continuous
playing time at 25C (77F). The battery life
will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a
cold environment.

supply
pee pe cpee
yax p ca c
ape aape a
p cax ( ) yaa pe
p ca aape a c
pa ap.
B eaepe e ca
aape NP-500/510/710.
pea
paae aape ac
ape.
B, ae ac cpae
pae e epx
aapex .
pee pe ac
epep cpee p 25C.
p ca eaep
xx ycx cp cy
aape a cpaaec.
17

supply
y 1 a ca
a
What is InfoLITHIUM?
The InfoLITHIUM is a lithium ion battery
pack which can exchange data such as battery
consumption with compatible video
equipment. This unit is compatible with the
InfoLITHIUM battery pack (L series). Your
camcorder operates only with the
InfoLITHIUM battery. InfoLITHIUM
battery packs (L series) have the
mark.
InfoLITHIUM is a trademark of Sony
Corporation.
ae InfoLITHIUM?
InfoLITHIUM pecae c e aape , p e
eac a, a a
peee ep aape a, c
cec eaapayp.
ycpc cec c aape
InfoLITHIUM (cep L). Baa
eaepa paae c
aape InfoLITHIUM. Ha
aapex ax InfoLITHIUM (cep L)
.
eec ea
InfoLITHIUM ec p ap
ppa Sony.
If the camcorder is immediately turned off

Even if the remaining battery time is enough to
operate, charge the battery pack fully again.
The correct remaining time is displayed.
Connecting to the wall socket

When you use your camcorder for a long time,
we recommend that you power it from the
wall socket using the AC Adaptor.
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the
AC Adaptor to the DC IN jack on your
camcorder with the plugs v mark facing
toward the LCD panel side.
(2) Connect the mains lead to the AC Adaptor.
(3) Connect the mains lead to the wall socket.
18
aepa cpay aec

ae ec caec pee apa
aape ca pa
pa, ca c ape
aape . c e
caeec pe pa aape.
ceee cee
pee
Ec eaepa a epep
paa eee pee,
peeyec ca ae
epce epe aaep epee a.
(1) Ope py ea DC IN
cee aaep epee
a ey DC IN a, ea v
a eepe a paea cpy
ae .
(2) cee p a
aaepy epee a.
(3) cee p epa
cee pee.
y 1 a ca
a
Precaution
The set is not disconnected from the AC power
source (wall socket) as long as it is connected
to the wall socket, even if the set itself has been
turned off.
Mep pecpc
Aapa e aec ca
epee a ex p, a
cee epec ce, ae
ec ca aapa e.
Notes
The mains lead must only be changed at an
authorized service shop.
AC Adaptor can supply power even if the
battery pack is attached to your camcorder.
Do not use the AC Adaptor placed in a
narrow space, such as between a wall and
furniture.
The DC IN jack has source priority. This
means that the battery pack cannot supply
any power if the mains lead is connected to
the DC IN jack, even when the mains lead is
not plugged into the wall socket.
pea
p epa ceye
ae acepc, y
p eec papeee.
ae aaepa epee a
e aac ae cyae, ec
aape ppee
eaepe.
He cye aaep epee
a, ec pace y
pcpace, apep ey ce
ee.
e DC IN aae ppe
ca. aae, ae
aape a e aec, a
p epa cee
ey DC IN, ae ec p
epa e e ceey
pey.
Using a car battery

Use the Sony DC Adaptor/Charger (optional).

supply
cae a
ayypa
cye aaep/ape ycpc
c a Sony (ppeac
e).
19
Step 2 Setting the

date and time
y 2 caa
a pee
Set the date and time when you use your

camcorder for the first time. CLOCK SET
will be displayed each time that you set the
POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY
unless you set the date and time settings.
If you do not use your camcorder for about
four months, the date and time may be
cleared from memory (bars may appear)
because the built-in rechargeable battery
installed in your camcorder will have been
discharged (p.236).
First, set the year, then the month, the day, the
hour and then the minute.
(1) Press MENU to display the menu in the
standby mode.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
, then press the dial.
CLOCK SET, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust to
the desired year, then press the dial.
(5) Set the month, day and hour by turning the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the
dial.
(6) Set the minute by turning the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial and pressing the dial by the time
signal. The clock starts to move.
(7) Press MENU to erase the menu display.
p ep ca eaep
e ycay a pee.
a e ye peea ycaa
a pee, a pa p epee
epeae POWER ee
CAMERA MEMORY ye
paac a CLOCK SET.
Ec eaepa e caac
epex ece, yca a
pee y yae a
(c ep), cy cpea
ayypa aapea, ycaea
eaepe, papc (cp. 236).
Caaa ycae , ae ec,
e, ac yy.
(1) Hae y MENU
pae e pee a.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
, a ae ae
pa yca
a c.
pa a CLOCK SET, a ae
ae a c.
pa y a, a ae ae
a c.
(5) paa c SEL/PUSH EXEC
aa a e, ycae ec,
e ac.
(6) cae y, paa c
SEL/PUSH EXEC aa a e
e epea caa
pee. ac ay ypa.
(7) Hae y MENU yae
a e.
1,7
MENU
MANUAL SET
AUTO SHTR
PROG. SCAN
SETUP MENU
: :
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
2003
DEMO MODE
RETURN
12 00
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
6
4
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
2005
DEMO MODE
RETURN
2005
12 00
20
2005
12 00
SETUP MENU
4 7 2005
CLOCK SET
17:30:00
LTR SIZE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
17 30
1
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
Step 2 Setting the date and

time
y 2 caa a
pee
The year changes as follows:
eec cey pa:
1995
1996
2003
2079
Ec B e ycae ay pe
B e ax a ee ape a
Memory Stick ye acaa a
: : (pe) -- -- ---- (aa).
Note on the time indicator

The internal clock of your camcorder operates
on a 24-hour cycle.
peae apy pee

Bcpee ac eaep
paa 24-ac pee.
If you do not set the date and time

: : (time) and -- -- ---- (date) are
recorded on the data code of the tape and the
Memory Stick.
21
Step 3 Inserting a
cassette
y 3 caa
acce
(1) Install the power source.

(2) While pressing the small blue button on the
EJECT switch, slide it in the direction of the
arrow. After the cassette lid is opened, the
cassette compartment automatically opens.
(3) Push the middle portion of the back of the
cassette to insert it.
Insert the cassette in a straight line deeply
into the cassette compartment with the
window facing out and the write-protect
tab facing upward.
(4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing
the PUSH mark on it.
(5) Close the cassette lid until it clicks by
pressing the PUSH button on the lid.
(1) cae c a.
(2) Haa ey c y a
epeaee EJECT, epee e
apae cpe. ce p
p acce cea acce
ce pec aaec.
(3) Hae cpee ae cp
acce ee yca.
Bcae accey p
acce ce ypa, a
pae apyy, a
eec a ac - epx.
(4) ape acce ce, aa a
e ey PUSH.
(5) ape ea py acce
cea, aa a e y PUSH.
3,4
Window/
O
PUSH
PUSH
Write-protect tab/
eec a
ac
22
To eject a cassette
ee acce
Follow the procedure above, and take out the

cassette in step 3.
Be yaay e peypy
e accey ye 3.
Note
The cassette lid will not be closed when you
press any part of the lid other than the PUSH
button.
peae
pa acce cea e apec,
ec aa a ay- pyy ac
a pe, a e a PUSH.
y 3 caa acce
When you use mini DV cassettes with

cassette memory
Read the instruction about cassette memory to
use this function properly (p. 210).
p ca acce DV c
acce a
pe cpy acce a
pa ca
y (cp. 210).
To prevent accidental erasure

Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to
SAVE.
If the grip strap prevents the cassette lid

from opening fully
Adjust the length of the grip strap (p. 249).
If Q flashes even if the cassette has been
inserted
Press the PUSH button again to close the cover
firmly.
pepae cya
cpa
epee eec a ac
a accee ee SAVE.
Ec pee axaa e e
c p py acce
cea
Opeypye y pe axaa
(cp. 249).
Step 3 Inserting a cassette
a ae a Q, ae ec
caea accea
Hae y PUSH ee pa,
ap py.
23
Recording Basics
ac - Oce e
Recording a picture
ac pae
Your camcorder automatically focuses for you.

(1) Open the shutter of the hood with a lens
cap. For more information about attaching
the hood with a lens cap, see page 247.
(2) Install the power source and insert a
cassette. See Step 1 to Step 3 (p. 13 to
23) for more information.
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while
pressing the small green button. Your
camcorder is set to the standby mode.
(4) Slide OPEN in the direction of the B mark
to open the LCD panel.
The picture now being shot is displayed on
the LCD screen, and it disappears from the
viewfinder screen.
(5) Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts
recording. The REC indicator appears.
The camera recording lamps located on the
front and rear of your camcorder light up.
To stop recording, press START/STOP
again.
You can use REC START/STOP located on
the handle or front instead of START/STOP
on the rear.
aa eaepa aaec
e ycpy.
(1) Ope py e ea c
p. ee cee
ppee e ea c
p c. a cp. 247.
(2) cae c a
cae accey. ye
p pa c. y 1 y 3 (cp. 13 - 23).
(3) Haa aey eey y,
ycae epeae POWER
ee CAMERA. Baa eaepa
ye ycaea pe a.
(4) epee y OPEN
apae aa B, p
ae .
Caee paee ec a
pae ceae c paa
cae.
(5) Hae y START/STOP.
Beaepa ae ac. c
ap REC. apc a
ac, pacee a epee
ae ae eaep.
ca ac ae y
START/STOP ee pa.
M ca y REC
START/STOP, pacey a pye
cepe, ec START/
STOP, pace ca.
Microphone/
Mp
OPEN
Camera recording lamps/

a ac aep
REC START/STOP
Handle REC START/STOP /
a REC START/STOP a pye
2
POWER
REC 0:00:01
POWER
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
24
40min
VCR
VCR
LOCK
ac pae
If the ND1 or ND2 indicator flashes on the

LCD screen or in the viewfinder
The ND filter is necessary. Set the ND FILTER
selector to 1 or 2. However, if you change the
position during recording, the brightness of
the picture may change or audio noise may
occur. This is not a malfunction. We
recommend that you check the position of the
ND FILTER selector before shooting. See
Using the ND filter on page 67.
a a pae
caee ae ap ND1
ND2
Tpeyec p ND. cae
epeae ND FILTER ee 1
2. p ee e pe
ac e ec pc
pae c y. Oa
e ec ecpac.
ee epeae ND FILTER
peeyec pep epe ce.
C. cae pa ND a cp.
67.
Notes
Fasten the grip strap firmly.
Do not touch the microphone during
recording.
Note on the recording mode
Your camcorder records and plays back in SP
(standard play) mode and in LP (long play)
mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings. In
LP mode, you can record 1.5 times as long as
in SP mode.
When you record a tape on your camcorder in
LP mode, we recommend playing the tape on
your camcorder.
Note on the LOCK switch
When you slide the LOCK switch to the left,
the POWER switch can no longer be set to
MEMORY accidentally. The LOCK switch is
set to the right as a default setting. We
recommend that you set the LOCK switch to
the left when you record on a cassette.
Note on the progressive recording mode
If you intend to use the images on your PC or
play the images back as still images, we
recommend that you set PROG. SCAN to ON
in the menu settings before shooting (p. 51).
The picture quality may improve in this mode,
but if you shoot a moving subject, the image
may shake when it is played back.
pea
Hae ppee pee axaa.
B pe ac e pacaec
py.
peae pey ac
Baa eaepa e ac
cpeee pee SP
(caape cpeee) pee
LP (paee cpeee).
Bepe pe SP LP ycaax
e. B pee LP B ee
ac 1,5 paa e pee, e
pee SP.
Ec ea a acaa a
eaepe pee LP, ee
peeyec cp a e
eaepe.
Recording Basics / ac Oce e
Recording a picture
epeae LOCK
Ec epey epeae LOCK
e, epeae POWER ye
e cya yca
ee MEMORY. epeae
LOCK a pep-ee
ycaaaec pae ee
(ycaa ya). p ac a
accey peeyec yca
epeae LOCK ee ee.
peae pey ppecc
ce
Ec peyec ca pae
a cp x a
ee pae, peeyec
yca PROG. SCAN ee ON
ycaax e epe aa ce
(cp. 51). B pee e yyc
aec pae, a, ec
cac yc e, p
cpee paee e
pa.
25
Recording a picture
ac pae
To enable smooth transition

Transition between the last scene you recorded
and the next scene is smooth as long as you do
not eject the cassette even if you turn off your
camcorder. When you use a tape with cassette
memory, however, you can make the
transition smooth even after ejecting the
cassette if you use the end search function (p.
38).
However, check the following:
When you change the battery pack, set the
POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and
ones in the LP mode on one tape.
ecee a epexa
epex ey ce aca
cey ye
a, a e ye eea accea,
ae p e eaep.
Oa p ca e c
acce a caa
a epex, ae ce ee
acce, ec cyec y
c a (cp. 38).
Oa ex e ceyee:
p aee aape a
ycae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG).
He ceye a ee ea ac
pee SP LP.
Note on tape transition

The playback picture may be distorted or the
time code may not be written properly
between scenes when:
You change the recording mode (SP/LP).
You record in LP mode.
If you leave your camcorder in standby
mode for five minutes while the cassette is
inserted
Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is
to prevent tape wear and save battery power.
To resume the standby mode, set the POWER
switch to OFF (CHG), and to CAMERA again.
When a cassette is not inserted, your
camcorder does not turn off.
26
peae epexy
Bcpe paee e
cae, e pee e
aca epa ey cea,
ec:
ec pe ac (SP/LP).
e ac pee LP.
Ec eaepa c cae
acce caec pee
a a y
Baa eaepa c
aaec. pepaae c
e pacx apa aape.
paa pe a ycae
epeae POWER ee OFF
(CHG), a ae ca ee
CAMERA. Ec accea e caea,
eaepa e c.
Recording a picture
Adjusting the LCD screen
Peypa paa
ae pacpaec a 90 payc
paaec pe a 90
payc cpy cae
pe a 180 payc cpy
ea.
Ec B epee ae a,
a ye apaea pyy cpy
pee a ac, a pae
caee c ap
(epa pe).
180
180
90
OPEN
To close the LCD panel, set it vertically and
swing it into the camcorder body until it clicks.
Note
When you open the LCD panel, the viewfinder
is automatically turned off, however, it is not
turned off when the LCD panel is turned over
or the camcorder is in mirror mode.
When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel
Make sure that the LCD panel is opened up to
90 degrees.
The LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees and

it rotates about 90 degrees to the viewfinder
side and about 180 degrees to the lens side.
If you turn the LCD panel over so that it faces
the other way in standby or recording mode,
the
indicator appears on the LCD screen
and in the viewfinder (Mirror mode).
ac pae
ap ae , ycae ee
epa, a ae pcee ee
pycy eaep ea.
peae
p p ae cae
aaec aec, a e
aec, ec ae
epeepya eaepa axc
epa pee.
p peype ya ae
eec, ae pa a 90
payc.
27
Recording a picture
ac pae
When using both the LCD screen and the

viewfinder during shooting
The usable time of the battery pack when
using both the LCD screen and the viewfinder
will be shorter a little than when using the
viewfinder only.
p ca paa
cae pe ce
Bpe pa aape a p
ca paa
cae ye e ee, e
p ca cae.
Pictures in the mirror mode

The picture on the LCD screen is a mirrorimage. However, the recording picture will be
normal.
pae epa pee

paee a pae ye
paac epa. Oa
acaee paee ye
pa.
During recording in mirror mode

ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote
Commander does not work.
Indicators in the mirror mode
The STBY indicator appears as zX and REC as
z. Some of the other indicators appear mirrorreversed and others are not displayed.
However, if you close the LCD panel with the
LCD screen turned over, indicators appear
normally.
Adjusting the brightness of

the LCD screen
LCD BRIGHT
To adjust the brightness of the LCD screen,

press LCD BRIGHT + or .
The battery life is longer when the LCD panel
is closed. Use the viewfinder instead of the
LCD screen to save the battery power.
28
To brighten/
pe
To darken/
Teee
B pe ac epa pee
a ZERO SET MEMORY a ye
ca ypae e paae.
ap epa pee
ap STBY c e zX, a
ap REC e z. Hepe
pye ap c epa
pae e, a epe x e
yy paac cce. Oa, ec
ap ae c epeepy
pa , ap yy
paac e.
Peypa pc paa
peyp pc paa
ae LCD BRIGHT + .
p ap ae
pec pa aape
e. ep yec
caee, a e pa .
Recording a picture
ac pae
On the LCD screen backlight

You can change the brightness of the backlight.
Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings (p. 156).
a cea paa
B ee e pc ae
ce. Bepe ay LCD B.L.
ycaax e (cp. 156).
ac e
M ac
e, y epec
paypc. e cae
epe ae epx ac
e. B cyae
y ca y REC START/
STOP, pacey a pye a
epee ac eaep.
REC
TOP
You can record in a low position to get an

interesting recording angle. Lift up the
viewfinder or rotate the LCD panel with the
screen facing up to record from a low position.
In this case, it is useful to use the REC START/
STOP located on the handle or front of the
camcorder.
T/S
Recording in a low position
ae cyae peyp paa

c LCD BRIGHT +/
apaep LCD B.L. LCD COLOUR
ycaax e
e e a acae
paee.
Even if you do the LCD screen adjustment

using the LCD BRIGHT +/ buttons, or using
LCD B.L. and LCD COLOUR items in the
menu settings
The recorded picture will not be affected.
STA
REC
START/
STOP
After recording
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
(2) Close the LCD panel.
(3) Eject the cassette.
(4) Remove the battery pack.
ce ac
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG).
(2) ape ae .
(3) ee accey.
(4) Ocee aape .
29
Recording a picture
Adjusting the viewfinder
If you record pictures with the LCD panel
closed, check the picture with the viewfinder.
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so
that the images in the viewfinder come into
sharp focus.
Lift up the viewfinder and move the
viewfinder adjustment lever.
ac pae
Peypa cae
Ec B yee aca pae
p ap ae , ppye
paee c cae.
Opeypye e cae
cec c c pee,
pae caee e
cycpa.
e cae pa
peyp cae.
Viewfinder adjustment lever/Pa peyp cae
To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder

screen, use the VF B.L. item in the menu
settings (p. 156).
peyp pc caee c
apaepa VF B.L. ycaax
e (cp. 156).
Even if you adjust the viewfinder screen

backlight
The recorded picture will not be affected.
Ec B peypyee a cey
cae
e e a acae
paee.
The eyecup
You can attach the eyecup with the large part
of it located on both left and right.
See page 247 for details.
30
Oyp
Oyp ce a
pa, e pa ac
pacaaac a cea, a cpaa.
pe cee pee a cp.
247.
Using the zoom feature

To zoom using the zoom lever/
handle zoom lever
When using the handle zoom lever, you can

change the zooming speed using the handle
zoom switch.
H: Fast
L: Slow
Handle zoom switch/

epeae
paca a
pye
cae y
paca
paca c
paa paca/paa
paca a pye
Cea ae a pa pa
pacapa ee
paca. Hae a e cee
ycpe paca.
epee cae y
paca eceae aye
peya.
Cpa T: ee (e
paec)
Cpa W: e
py (e
yaec)
p ca paa paca
a pye e cpc
paca p epeae
paca a pye.
H: cpe
L: aee
Press the power zoom lever a little for a slower

zoom. Press it deeper for a faster zoom.
Using the zoom function sparingly results in
better-looking recordings.
T side: for telephoto (subject appears closer)
W side: for wide-angle (subject appears
farther away)
ac pae
Recording a picture
Notes
When the handle zoom switch is set to OFF,
you cannot operate the handle zoom lever.
The handle zoom switch does not interlock
with the zoom lever of the camcorder.
When you shoot close to a subject
If you cannot get a sharp focus, press the W
side of the power zoom lever until the focus is
sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least
about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/8 inch) away from
the lens surface in the telephoto position, or
about 1 cm (about 1/2 inch) away in the wideangle position.
pea
Pa paca a pye e
paae, a epeae
paca a pye ycae
ee OFF.
epeae paca a pye
e pye pa paca
aep.
p cee ea c e
Ec B e ee y ey
ycpy, ae a cpy W
paa pa pacapa
ye e ycp. B
e ee
cey ea, p axc a
pacc e eee 80 c ea
1 c e
py.
31
Recording a picture
ac pae
To zoom using the zoom ring
paca c
a pacapa
Using the zoom ring, you can control the zoom

by your desired speed and you can make fine
adjustments.
During recording, turn the zoom ring to the
desired speed.
C a pacapa
aaa peyey cpc
paca cyec ee y
peypy.
B pe ac epe
pacapa ye y
cpc.
Zoom ring/
pacapa
For wide-angle/
e
py
For telephoto/
ee
Note
If you turn the zoom ring quickly, the zoom
may not respond to the zoom ring.
Rotate the zoom ring with appropriate speed.
Using the disital zoom Zoom

greater than 12
Zoom greater than 12 is performed digitally,
if you set D ZOOM to 24 or 48 in the menu
settings. The digital zoom function is set to
OFF as a default setting (p. 156). If you use the
digital zoom function, the picture quality
deteriorates.
32
The right-ended portion of the bar shows the

digital zooming zone.
The digital zooming zone appears when you set D
ZOOM to 24 or 48./
paa cpa c a pae aae
y p paca.
a p paca ec,
a apaepe D ZOOM ycaaaec
aee 24 48.
peae
p cp pe a
pacapa, cpc paca
e e ec.
Bpaae pacapa c
cecye cpc.
cae y
p paca
paca ee 12
Tpaca ee 12 ec
p e p ycae
apaepa D ZOOM ae 24 48
ycaax e. y p
paca a pepee ycaaaec
ee OFF (), eec
yca ya (cp. 156). p
ca y p
paca yxyaec aec
pae.
W
Recording a picture
ac pae
You cannot use the digital zoom:

When you set PROG. SCAN to ON in the
menu settings (p. 156).
When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY.
pa paca e ye
paa:
Ec apaep PROG. SCAN ycae
ee ON ycaax e (cp. 156).
Ec epeae POWER ycae
ee MEMORY.
ap, paaee
pe ac
The indicators are not recorded on the tapes.
ap e acac a acce.
[a] [b] [c] [d]

40min
REC
0:00:01
45min
[e]
[f]
[g]
7 2003
ND1
[j]
[a] Remaining battery time
This appears after you turn on the power
and wait for a while.
[b]Cassette memory
This appears when using a tape with
cassette memory.
[c] Recording mode
[d]STBY/REC
[e] Time code/Tape counter
[f] Remaining tape
This appears after you insert a cassette.
[g]Guide frame
[h]ND filter
This flashes when the ND FILTER selector
should be set. After you have set the ND
FILTER selector, the ND FILTER position
selected is indicated. (When the ND OFF
position is selected, the indication
disappears.)
[i] Time
The time is displayed about five seconds
after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA
or MEMORY.
[j] Date
The date is displayed about five seconds
after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA
or MEMORY.
12:05:56
[h]
[i]
[a] Ocaeec pe pa
aape a
ap ec ce
e a pec
ep pee.
[b] accea a
ap ec p
ca acce a.
[c] Pe ac
[d] STBY/REC
[e] pee/Ce e
[f] Ocaac ea
ap ec ce
yca acce.
[g] pa paa
[h] p ND
O ae, a ex
yca epeae ND FILTER.
ce yca epeae ND
FILTER ee ND FILTER
paaec cecya
a. (p ycae
epeae ee ND OFF
a cee.)
[i] Bpe
ce yca epeae
POWER ee CAMERA
MEMORY ee cey
paaec a pee.
[j] aa
ce yca epeae
POWER ee CAMERA
MEMORY ee cey
paaec a a.
Indicators displayed during

recording
33
Recording a picture
ac pae
Time code
The time code indicates the recording or
playback time, 0:00:00 (hours : minutes :
seconds) in CAMERA mode and 0:00:00:00
(hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR
mode. You cannot rewrite only the time code.
pee
pee yaae pe ac
cpee, 0:00:00 (ac : y :
cey) pee CAMERA 0:00:00:00
(ac : y : cey : ap) pee
VCR. B e ee epeaca
pee.
Remaining tape indicator

The indicator may not be displayed accurately
depending on the tape.
Note on recording date/time
Recording date/time is not displayed during
shooting, however, it is automatically recorded
on the tape. You can check the recording date/
time during playback by pressing DATA
CODE.

(BACK LIGHT)
When you shoot a subject with the light source
behind the subject or a subject with a light
background, use the backlight function.
Press BACK LIGHT in standby, recording, or
memory mode.
The . indicator appears on the LCD screen or
in the viewfinder.
To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again.
ap caec e
aa apa y
e acc e.
pea ae/pee ac
aa/pe ac e paac
pe ce, a aaec
acac a ey. ay/pe ac
pep pee
cpee, aa y DATA
CODE.
Cea e c ae
ce (BACK LIGHT)
Ec B ee cey ea c
c cea a e e
ea c ce , cye
y ae ce.
B pee a, ac a
ae y BACK LIGHT.
ap . c a pae
caee.
e ae y BACK LIGHT
ee pa.
FADER BACK LIGHT SPOT LIGHT
BACK LIGHT
34
ac pae
If you press one of the following buttons

when using the backlight function
The backlight function will be canceled.
SPOT LIGHT
EXPOSURE
Ec aa y ceyx
p ca y ae
ce
y ae ce ye
ea.
SPOT LIGHT
EXPOSURE
When you manually adjust the exposure

You cannot use the backlight function.
Using the spot light function

This function prevents peoples faces, for
example, from appearing excessively white
when shooting subjects lit by strong light, such
as in the theater.
Press SPOT LIGHT in standby, recording, or
memory mode.
The
indicator appears on the LCD screen or
in the viewfinder.
To cancel, press SPOT LIGHT again.
p py peype c
He ca y ae
ce.
cae pea
pep cee
aa y e
cey a pa, a e
e e c e,
apep, p cee e eape,
e ac peec pe ceee.
B pee a, ac a
ae y SPOT LIGHT.
Ha pae caee
c ap .
e ae y SPOT LIGHT
ee pa.
Recording a picture
FADER BACK LIGHT SPOT LIGHT
SPOT LIGHT
If you press one of the following buttons
when using the spot light function
The spot light function will be canceled.
BACK LIGHT
EXPOSURE
You cannot use the spot light function.
You cannot use the spot light mode while in
the following settings:
Shutter speed value of 1/25 or smaller
Old movie
Low lux mode of the PROGRAM AE
function
Ec aa y ceyx
p ca y
pep cee
y pep cee ye
ea.
BACK LIGHT
EXPOSURE
p py peype c
He ca y
pep cee.
Pe pep cee
e ca p
ceyx ycaax:
Bea cpc apa, paa 1/25
e
Cape
Pe ceec y
PROGRAM AE
35
Recording a picture
ac pae
Self-timer recording
You can make a recording with the self-timer.
This recording is useful when you want to
record yourself. You can also use the Remote
Commander.
(1) Press
(self-timer) in standby mode. The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the
LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
(2) Press START/STOP.
Self-timer starts counting down from 10
seconds with a beep sound. In the last two
seconds of the countdown, the beep sound
gets faster, then recording starts
automatically.
ac aepy
caayca
B ee ac aepy
caayca. a ac e
pc cyae, a
ex aca ce.
ae ca y
ca ypae.
(1) B pee a ae y
(aep caayca). Ha pae
caee c ap
(aep caayca).
(2) Hae y START/STOP.
Taep caayca ae pa
ce c 10 cey c yep
ca. B cee e cey
pa cea yep ca
ye ya ae, a ae
aaec aec ac.
START/STOP
MEMORY
(self-timer)/
(aep
caayca)
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
POWER
VCR
To stop the self-timer before

recording
ca aepa
caayca epe ac
Press START/STOP again.

Use the Remote Commander for convenience.
Hae y START/STOP ee pa.

yca cye y
ca ypae.
To record still pictures on tapes

using the self-timer
Press PHOTO in step 2 (p. 50).
ac ex
pae a ey c
aepa caayca
Hae y PHOTO ye 2
(cp. 50).
36
Recording a picture
ac pae
To record still pictures on a

Memory Stick using the selftimer
ac ex
pae a Memory Stick c
aepa caayca
Press
(self-timer), then press PHOTO in
memory mode (p. 181).
Hae y
(aep caayca),
ae ae PHOTO pee a
(cp. 181).
Press
(self-timer) so that the
indicator
disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen
while your camcorder is in standby mode.
Note
The self-timer recording is automatically
canceled when:
Self-timer recording is finished.
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or
VCR.
e ac aepy
caayca
Hae y
(aep caayca)
ce c paa
a, ap
cae, a
eaepa axc pee
a.
peae
ac aepy caayca ye
aaec eea, ec:
Oea ac aepy
caayca.
Bae POWER ycae
ee OFF (CHG) VCR.
To cancel self-timer recording
37
pepa ac END
Checking the recording
SEARCH / EDITSEARCH/
END SEARCH /
EDITSEARCH / Rec Review pcp ac
You can use these buttons to check recorded
pictures or shoot so that the transition between
the last recorded scene and the next scene you
will record is smooth.
B ee ca
pep acax pae
ce, epex ey ce
aca cey
acae a.
END SEARCH
EDITSEARCH
Searching the end point of

the recording END SEARCH
You can easily go to the end of the last
recorded portion.
Press END SEARCH in standby mode.
The camcorder rewinds or fast-forwards the
tape and the last five-second recorded picture
is played back. After playback the camcorder
turns to standby mode. You can monitor the
sound from the speaker or headphones.
Changing the next recording

start point EDITSEARCH
You can change the next recording start point
in standby mode.
Hold down the +/ side of EDITSEARCH in
standby mode. The recorded picture is played
back.
+ : to go forward
: to go backward
Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you
press START/STOP, re-recording begins from
the point you released EDITSEARCH. You
cannot monitor the sound.
38
c eca a ac
END SEARCH
M e a aca
ac e.
Hae y END SEARCH pee
a.
Beaepa e ycpey
epey e epe aa
cp ce pae
aca pae
pec cey. ce
cpee aepa paaec
pe a. B ee
ppa y epe aycecy
ccey e ee.
eee eca aaa

ceye ac
EDITSEARCH
M e ec aaa ceye
ac pee a.
epe aa cpy +/
EDITSEARCH pee a.
acae paee cpc.
+ : pe epe
: pe aa
Oyce y EDITSEARCH
ca cpee. Ec B
aee y START/STOP, aec
epeac c eca, e a
yea a EDITSEARCH. B e
ee ppa y.
Checking the recording END

SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec
Review
Checking the last recorded
picture Rec Review
You can check the last recorded portion.
End search function

When you use a tape without cassette memory,
the end search function does not work once
you eject the cassette after you have recorded
on the tape. If you use a tape with cassette
memory, the end search function works even
once you eject the cassette.
If there is a blank portion at the beginning or
between the recorded portions, the end search
function may not work correctly (p. 210).
pepa cee
aca pae pcp ac
M pep ce acay
ac.
B pee a ea ae a
cpy 7 EDITSEARCH pee
a.
yy cpee cee
ec cey pae
eaepa epec pe a.
B ee ppa y epe
aycecy ccey e
ee.
y ca a
Ec cyec ea e acce
a, y ca a e ye
paa ce ee acce, a
py a ea ac. Ec
cyec ea c acce a,
y ca a ye paa
ae ce ee acce.
Ec aae aca ac ey
aca ac cyecye
eaca yac, y ca
a e paa epa
(cp. 210).
Press the 7 side of EDITSEARCH

momentarily in standby mode.
The last few-seconds of picture is played back
and the camcorder returns to standby. You can
monitor the sound from the speaker or
headphones.
pepa ac END SEARCH/

EDITSEARCH/pcp ac
39
Playback Basics
Playing back a tape

You can monitor the playback picture on the
LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel, you
can monitor the playback picture in the
viewfinder. You can also control playback
using the Remote Commander supplied with
your camcorder.
(1) Install the power source and insert the
recorded tape.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR while
pressing the small green button. The video
control buttons light up.
(3) Slide OPEN in the direction of the B mark
to open the LCD panel.
(4) Press m to rewind the tape.
(5) Press N to start playback.
(6) To adjust the volume, press either of the
VOLUME +/ buttons .
Bcpeee Oce e
Bcpeee
e
M pcapa cpe
paee a pae . Ec ae
apa, cpe
paee pcapa
caee. M ae
ppa cpeee c
ya ca
ypae, paae eaepe.
(1) cae c a
cae acay ey.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR, aa aey
eey y. c a
ypae epaee.
(3) epee y OPEN
apae aa B, p
ae .
(4) Hae y m epe
e aa.
(5) Hae y N aaa
cpee.
(6) peyp pc aae
y VOLUME +/.
REW
PLAY
2
POWER
VCR
VOLUME
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
6
3 1
40
To stop playback
ca cpee
Press x.
Hae y x.
Bcpeee e
When monitoring on the LCD screen

You can turn the LCD panel over and move it
back to the camcorder body with the LCD
screen facing out.
B pe pcpa a pae
M epeepy ae ypae
c ee c pyc eaep, a
pa ye pae apyy.
When you close the LCD panel

You cannot monitor the sound from the
speaker. However, when the LCD panel is
turned over to view on the LCD screen, you
can monitor the sound from the speaker.
Ec ap ae
He ye pcya y epe
ppe. Oa, ec pa
pae apyy, y ye
pcya epe ppe.
To control the display of the

screen indicators
p pae
pax ap
Press DISPLAY on the camcorder or on the

Remote Commander supplied with your
camcorder.
The indicators appear on the LCD screen.
To make the indicators disappear, press
DISPLAY again.
Hae y DISPLAY a eaepe

a ye ca ypae,
paae eaepe.
Ha pae c ap.
, ap ce,
ae ee pa y DISPLAY.
Playback Basics / Bcpeee Oce e
Playing back a tape
DISPLAY
DATA CODE
DISPLAY
DATA CODE
41
Playing back a tape
Bcpeee e
Using the data code function
cae y a
ax
Your camcorder automatically records not

only images on the tape but also the recording
data (date/time or various settings when
recorded) (Data code).
Press DATA CODE on the camcorder or on the
Remote Commander supplied with your
camcorder in playback mode.
The display changes as follows:
date/time t various settings (SteadyShot,
white balance, gain, shutter speed, aperture
value, exposure mode) t no indicator
Date/time/
aa/pe
4 7 2003
12:05:56
42
Beaepa aaec acae

a ey e pae,
ae ac (ay/pe pae
yca p ac) ( ax).
B pee cpee ae
y DATA CODE a eaepe a
ye ca ypae,
paae eaepe.
a ye ec cey
pa:
aa/pe t pae yca
(yca cea, aac e,
ycee, cpc apa, ea
apa, pe c) t e
a
Various settings/
Pae yca
AUTO
50 AWB
F1.6
0dB
[a]
[b]
[c]
[d]
[e]
[f]
[a] SteadyShot OFF

[b]Exposure mode/PROGRAM AE mode
[c] White balance
[d]Gain
[e] Shutter speed
[f] Aperture value
[a] aee OFF y SteadyShot

[b] Pe c/pe PROGRAM AE
[c] aac e
[d] cee
[e] Cpc apa
[f] Bea apa
To not display the various settings

Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu
settings (p. 156).
The display changes as follows:
date/time y no indicator
e pae pax
yca
cae apaep DATA CODE
ee DATE ycaax e
(cp. 156).
a ye ec cey
pa:
aa/pe y e a
Bcpeee e
Recording data
Recording data is your camcorders
information when you have recorded
something. In CAMERA mode, the recording
data will not be displayed.
acae ae
acae ae cepa pa
ac, e eaep. B
pee CAMERA ae paac e
yy.
When you use the data code function, -- ----- (date) or -- : -- : -- (time) appears if:
A blank portion of the tape is being played
back.
The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or
noise.
The tape was recorded by the camcorder
without the date and time set.
p ca y a
ax c c -- -- ----
(aa) -- : -- : -- (pe), ec:
Bcpc eaca yac
e.
ea e aec ca -a
pee ex.
ac a ey a ea
eaep e yca a
pee.
Data code
When you connect your camcorder to the TV,
the data code also appears on the TV screen
(p. 46).
Note on the date/time indicator
Recording date/time is not displayed during
shooting, however, it is automatically recorded
on the tape. You can check the recording date/
time during playback by pressing DATA
CODE.
If the exposure adjustment is set to
minimum
CLOSE is displayed at the location of the
aperture value.
ax
Ec eaepy ce
eepy, ax ae ye
paac a pae eepa
(cp. 46).
ap a/pee
aa/pe ac e paac
pe ce, a aaec
acac a ey. ay/pe ac
pep pee
cpee, aa y DATA
CODE.
Playing back a tape
Ec ycae ae
aee cppe
Bec ae apa paaec
ac CLOSE.
43
Playing back a tape

Various playback modes
To operate video control buttons, set the
POWER switch to VCR.
To view a still picture (playback

pause)
Press X during playback. To resume normal
playback, press N or X.
To advance the tape

Press M in stop mode. To resume normal
playback, press N.
To rewind the tape
Bcpeee e
Pae pe
cpee
ca ypae
epaee ycae
epeae POWER ee VCR.
pcpa e
pae (aya
cpee)
Hae pe cpee y
X. e
cpee ae y N X.
ycpe epe e
epe
Press m in stop mode. To resume normal

playback, press N.
Hae pee ca y M.
e
cpee ae y N.
To change the playback direction
ycpe epe e
aa
Press
on the Remote Commander during
playback to reverse the playback direction. To
resume normal playback, press N.
Hae pee ca y m.
e
cpee ae y N.
To locate a scene monitoring the

picture (picture search)
Keep pressing m or M during playback. To
resume normal playback, release the button.
To monitor the picture at highspeed while advancing or

rewinding the tape (skip scan)
Keep pressing m while rewinding or M
while advancing the tape. To resume
rewinding or advancing, release the button.
To view the picture at slow speed

(slow playback)
Press y during playback. For slow playback
in the reverse direction, press
on the
Remote Commander, then press y. To
ee apae
cpee
Hae y
a ye
ca ypae pe
cpee ee
apae cpee.
e cpee
ae y N.
ca a pe
pcpa pae (c
pae)
Hae e ycae y m M
pe cpee. epexa
y cpee yce y.
pcpa pae a
c cpc pe
ycpe epe e
epe aa (c e
pa)
Hae e ycae y m
pe ycpe epe e aa
y M pe ycpe
epe e epe.
e epe e
epe aa yce y.
pcpa pae a
aee cpc
(aeee cpeee)
44
Hae pe cpee y
y. aee cpee
pa apae ae y
a
ye ca ypae, a ae
ae y y. e
cpee ae y
N.
Bcpeee e
To view the picture at double

speed
pcpa pae a
ye cpc
Press 2 on the Remote Commander during

playback. For double speed playback in the
reverse direction, press , then press 2 on
the Remote Commander. To resume normal
playback, press N.
Hae pe cpee
y 2 a ye ca
ypae. cpee a
ye cpc pa
, a ae
apae ae y
y 2 a ye ca
ypae. e
cpee ae y N.
To view the picture frame-by-frame

Press C on the Remote Commander in
playback pause mode. For frame-by-frame
playback in the reverse direction, press c. To
To search the last scene recorded

(END SEARCH)
Press END SEARCH in stop mode. The last
five seconds of the recorded portion plays back
and stops.
In various playback modes
Sound is muted.
The previous picture may remain as a mosaic
image during playback.
When the playback pause mode lasts for
five minutes
Your camcorder automatically enters the stop
mode. To resume playback, press N.
Slow playback
Slow playback can be performed smoothly on
your camcorder, however, this function does
not work for a signal output through the DV
Interface.
When you play back a tape in reverse
Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or
the top and bottom of the screen. This is not a
malfunction.
ap pcpa
pae
Hae y C a ye
ca ypae pee
ay cpee. ap
cpee pa apae
ae y c. e
cpee ae
y N.
ca cee aca
a (END SEARCH)
B pee caa ae y END
SEARCH. yy cpee
cee cey aca
yaca a ee, cpeee
cac.
Playing back a tape
B pax peax cpee

y ye pye.
B pe cpee peyee
paee e cac
aec.
Ec pe ay p cpee
c y
Beaepa aaec epec
pe caa. e
cpee ae y N.
aeee cpeee
aeee cpeee
ec a eaepe a, e
ex; a a y e paae
p e caa epe epec DV.
p cpee e pa
apae
B epe epxy y paa y
c pae ex.
Oa e ec ecpac.
45
Viewing the
recording on TV
pcp ac a
pae eepa
Connect your camcorder to your TV or VCR

with the A/V connecting cable supplied with
your camcorder to watch the playback picture
on the TV screen. You can operate the video
control buttons in the same way as when you
monitor playback pictures on the LCD screen.
When monitoring the playback picture on the
TV screen, we recommend that you power
your camcorder from the wall socket using the
AC Adaptor (p. 18). Refer to the operating
instructions of your TV or VCR.
pcpa cp pae
a pae eepa cee
eaepy eepy
eay c cee
ae ay/e, p x
e ca eaep. a
ypae paee eppa
a e pa, a p ypae
cp paee a pae
. p pcpe cp
pae a pae eepa
peeyec a eaepy
eppee c aaepa
epee a (cp. 18). C. ae
cpy cyaa eepa
eaa.
Ope py ea. e
eaepy eepy c
cee ae ay/e, p
x e ca eaep.
ae ycae epeae TV/VCR
eepa ee VCR.
Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder

to the TV using the A/V connecting cable
supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the
TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR.
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO L/R
(optional)/
(ppeac e) IN
S VIDEO
Yellow/e
VIDEO
AUDIO
L/R
: Signal flow/
pxee caa
If your TV is connected to a
VCR
Connect your camcorder to the line input on
the VCR by using the A/V connecting cable
supplied with your camcorder. Set the input
selector on the VCR to LINE.
If your TV or VCR is a
monaural type
Connect the yellow plug of the A/V
connecting cable to the video input jack and
only the white plug to the audio input jack on
the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used.
46
AUDIO
White/
e
Red/
pac
Ec eep e
eay
cee eaepy xy
ey eaa c
cee ae ay/e,
p paaec eaepe.
cae ceep x caa a
eae ee LINE.
Ec eep
ea
ec a
cee e eep
cee ae ay/e
xy ey ecaa
e eep - xy ey
aycaa a eae
eepe. pace eep e
cyc.
Viewing the recording on TV

If your TV/VCR has a 21-pin
connector (EUROCONNECTOR)
The models with mark printed on their
bottom surfaces only
pcp ac a pae
eepa
Ec eepe/eae
eec 21-p pae
(EUROCONNECTOR)
T e c a
cpe
a e
Use the 21-pin adaptor supplied with your

camcorder.
This adaptor is exclusive to an output.
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack
Connect using an S video cable (optional) to
obtain high-quality pictures. With this
connection, you do not need to connect the
yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting
cable. Connect the S video cable (optional) to
the S video jacks on both your camcorder and
the TV or the VCR. This connection produces
higher quality DV format pictures.
When you adjust the TV screen
If you monitor the shooting picture, not the
playback picture, set COLOUR BAR to ON in
the menu settings (p. 156). The colour bar is
displayed on the TV screen.
cye 21-p aaep,

paae eaepe.
a aaep peaae
ce a.
Ec eepe
eae eec ee
S.
Be ceee c
eae S (ppeac
e) ye
caece pae. p
a cee e y a
e (e) eep cee
ae ay/e. cee
eae S (ppeac
e) eea S a
eaepe eepe
eae. ceee
e y caecee
paee paa DV.
TV
Hacpa pae a pae

eepa
p aeca pae p
cee, a e cpee,
ycaax e apaepa COLOUR
BAR ycae aee ON (cp. 156). Ha
pae eepa ye paac
ea ca.
47
Advanced Recording Operations
cepecae epa ce
Recording a still image on a ac e pae a

tape Tape Photo recording ey ac pa a ey
You can record still images on tapes with all
the pixels in the progressive recording mode.
See page 52 for details. This mode is useful
when you print images using a video printer
(optional).
Besides the operation described here, your
camcorder can record still images on a
Memory Stick (p. 177).
(1) In standby mode, keep pressing PHOTO
lightly until a picture freezes. The
CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording
does not start yet.
To change the image, release PHOTO,
select an image again, and then press and
hold PHOTO lightly.
(2) Press PHOTO deeper.
The still image on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder is recorded for about seven
seconds. The sound during those seven
seconds is also recorded.
The still image is displayed on the LCD
screen or in the viewfinder until recording
is completed.
Hee pae
aca a acce pee
ppecc ce c cxpaee cex
ce. pe cee pee
a cp. 52. a pe ee, ec
y paceaa pae c
epepa (ppeac
e).
pe eca epa,
eaepa e ac
ex pae a Memory
Stick (cp. 177).
(1) B pee a epe cea
aa y PHOTO ex p, a
e c ee paee.
c ap CAPTURE. ac
ee e aaec.
ee pae yce
y PHOTO, epe paee
ca, a ae ae epe
cea aa y PHOTO.
(2) Hae y PHOTO cee.
Hee paee a pae
caee ye
acac ce cey. B
eee x ce cey ye
acac y.
Hee paee
paaec a pae
caee ex p, a e
ac ac.
1
2
The number of still images recordable on a

mini DV cassette
You can record about 510 images in SP mode
and about 765 images in LP mode on a 60minute cassette.
48
CAPTURE
PHOTO
PHOTO
Macae ec
ex pae, pe
e aca a accey
DV.
Ha 60-y accee aca
pep 510 pae pee SP
765 pae pee LP.
Recording a still image on a

tape Tape Photo recording
Notes
During tape photo recording, you cannot
change the mode or setting.
The PHOTO button does not work:
While the fader function is set or in use.
While the digital effect function is set or in
use.
Do not shake the camcorder during tape
photo recording. The recorded image may be
blurred.
When you do tape photo recording during

normal CAMERA recording
You cannot check an image on the LCD screen
or in the viewfinder by pressing PHOTO
lightly. Press PHOTO deeper. The still image is
then recorded for about seven seconds and
your camcorder returns to standby mode.
When shooting a moving object in Tape
Photo recording
When playing back the image by another unit,
the image may be blurred. This is not a
malfunction.
pea
B pe ce a ey
e e pe
ycay.
a PHOTO e paae:
ec ycaea cyec
y eepa
ec ycaea cyec
y px e.
He eae pex e
eaep pe ce a
ey. acaee paee e
ee.
e ce a ey c
ya ca
ypae
Hae y PHOTO a ye
ca ypae. Beaepa
cpey e ac pae,
paae a pae
caee.
ca y
ce a ey pe
ac CAMERA
paee a pae
caee e pep c
e aa PHOTO.
Hae y PHOTO cee.
Hee paee ye
acac ce cey, a ae
eaepa epec pe
a.
p cee yec ea c
y ce a ey
p cpee pae a
py aapae e ee.
Oa e ec ecpac.
Advanced Recording Operations / cepecae epa ce
To do tape photo recording using the

Remote Commander
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander.
Your camcorder immediately records an image
on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
ac e
pae a ey ac
pa a ey
49
Recording a still image on a

tape Tape Photo recording
Self-timer tape photo
recording
You can make a tape photo recording with the
self-timer. This mode is useful when you want
to record yourself. You can also use the
Remote Commander.
(1) Press
(2) Press PHOTO deeply.
Self-timer starts counting down from 10
with a beep sound. In the last two seconds
of the countdown, the beep sound gets
faster, then recording starts automatically.
PHOTO
ac e
pae a ey ac
pa a ey
cea a ey
aepy caayca
M cey a ey
aepy caayca. pe ee
cyae, ec B xe c ce.
ae ca y
ca ypae.
(1) B pee a ae y
caee c ap
(aep caayca).
Taep caayca ae pa
ce c 10 c yep ca. B
cee e cey pa
cea yep ca ye
ya ae, a ae aaec
aec ac.
2
PHOTO

indicator
Press
disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen
while your camcorder is in standby mode. You
cannot cancel the self-timer recording using
the Remote Commander.
Note
The self-timer recording mode is automatically
canceled when:
Self-timer tape photo recording is finished.
VCR.
50
e ac aepy
caayca
(aep caayca)
Hae y
a, ap
ce c paa
cae, a
eaepa axc pee
a. ac aepy caayca
e e c ya
ca ypae.
peae
Pe ac aepy caayca
ye aaec ee, ec:
cea a ey aepy
caayca aea.
Bae POWER ycae
ee OFF (CHG) VCR.
Cea c cae
cex ce PROG. SCAN
To import moving images to your PC to view

still images, we recommend you record in
progressive recording mode. To use
progressive recording mode, follow the
procedure below. Still images produced this
way are more stable than those recorded on a
tape in normal mode, and thus are more
suitable for analysing high-speed action such
as sports scenes. (Since this camcorder takes in
an image every 1/15 of a second in progressive
recording mode, moving images recorded in
this mode may be subject to too much jitter. To
view moving images, we recommend
recording in normal mode.)
ppa yec
pae a ep pcpa
ex pae, peeyec
ac pee ppecc
ce. ca pea
ppecc ce e
ceye ec. ca
ppecc pea e
ec, cae e. Hee
pae, yaee a pa,
c ee yc cpae
c e, pe aca a accey
pee, y ee x
aaa cpyxc ce,
apep cpx cpea.
(cy ppecc pee
eaepa cae paee ay
1/15 cey, yec pae,
acae pee, y c
pa. pcpa yxc
pae peeyec aca
pee.)
(1) Press MENU to display the menu in

standby mode.
PROG. SCAN, then press the dial.
ON, then press the dial.
The PROG. SCAN indicator lights up.
(1) Hae y MENU

pae e pee a.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa yca PROG. SCAN, a ae
ae a c.
pa yca ON, a ae ae
a c.
(5) Hae y MENU yae
a e. apc ap
PROG. SCAN.
MENU
2-4
MANUAL SET
AUTO SHTR
PROG. SCAN
MANUAL SET
AUTO SHTR
PROG. SCAN
RETURN
PROG. SCAN
MENU
Shooting with all the

pixels PROG. SCAN
OFF
ON
[MENU] : END
MANUAL SET
AUTO SHTR
PROG. SCAN
RETURN
ON
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
To return to normal mode

Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial.
paa pe
Bepe ycay OFF ye 4, ae
ae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
51
Shooting with all the pixels

PROG. SCAN
Cea c cae cex

ce PROG. SCAN
Note on the progressive recording mode

A normal TV broadcast divides the screen into
two finer fields and displays them in turns
every 1/50 of a second (Interlace format).
Thus, the actual image displayed in an instant
covers only half of the apparent image area.
Displaying the whole image simultaneously on
a full screen is called displaying with all the
pixels. In this mode, the resolution of the still
picture is clearer than in the normal mode.
This camcorder takes in an image every 2/25
of a second, which may cause the image of a
moving object to go out of focus. This
camcorder is originally programed to record in
the normal TV format.
peae pey ppecc

ce
p epeae ee
pae pcx paeee
paa a e ac, pe epe
paac ay 1/50 c
(epeccpa papa). Ta pa,
peae paep paae
pae cca y
paepa pae.
Opeee paee ce
pae a pae aaec
paee c cex ce. B
pee papeee e
pae ye, e
pee. Beaepa p
ee pae ae 2/25 c,
e a ep ycp
yec ea. epaa
eaepa appapaa a ac
ee pae.
When shooting under fluorescent light

When shooting in progressive recording mode
under fluorescent light or light bulbs, a rare
phenomenon may happen in which the screen
lights up brightly (Flicker phenomenon). This
is not a malfunction. If you want to stop this
phenomenon, set PROG. SCAN to OFF in the
menu settings.
In the progressive recording mode
You cannot use the following operations:
Digital zooming
Wide mode
Cea p ece cee

B pe ce ppecc pee
p cee aa e cea
aa aaa, e
y pee ee, p p
pa p cec (epae). Oa
e ec ecpac. Ec
ex ac e,
ycae pea PROG. SCAN
aee OFF ycaax e.
B pee ppecc ce
He ca ceye y:
pa paca
ppa pe
52
cae
p pa
You can easily make the picture be on a

horizontal line using the guide frame. The
guide frame is not recorded.
standby, recording, or memory mode.
GUIDEFRAME, then press the dial.
The guide frame is displayed on the LCD
screen or in the viewfinder.
M e p paee
pa c p
pa. ac p pa a ey
e pc.
(1) Hae y MENU
pae e pee a,
ac a.
, a ae ae
pa yca
a c.
pa yca GUIDEFRAME, ae
ae a c.
pa yca ON, a ae ae
a c.
(5) Hae y MENU yae
a e. pa paa
paaec a pae
caee.
1
5
MENU
MENU
2-4
LCD / VF SET
LCD B. L.
LCD COLOUR
VF B. L.
GU I DEFRAME
LCD / VF SET
LCD B. L.
LCD COLOUR
VF B. L.
GU I DEFRAME OFF
[MENU] : END
ON
RETURN
LCD / VF SET
LCD B. L.
LCD COLOUR
VF B. L.
GU I DEFRAME ON
[MENU] : END
RETURN
[MENU] : END
To clear the guide frame

EXEC dial or simply press DISPLAY.
Note
The guide frame indicates only a rough level.
The size and position of the guide frame do
not affect the setting of the camcorder.
If you set GUIDEFRAME to ON
The other screen indicators are also displayed
on the LCD screen.
e pae
p pa
Using the guide

frame
Bepe ycay OFF ye 4, a

ae ae c SEL/PUSH EXEC
y DISPLAY.
peae
pa paa aae
pep ype. Paep ee
p pa e a yca
eaep.
Ec apaepa GUIDEFRAME
ycae aee ON
pye ap yy ae
paac a pae .
53
Using the wide mode

You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on
a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE).
Black bands appear on the screen during
recording in the 16:9WIDE mode [a]. The
picture during playing back in the 4:3 mode on
a wide-screen TV [b] or a normal TV [c]* is
compressed in the widthwise direction. If you
set the screen mode of the wide-screen TV to
the full mode, you can watch pictures of
normal images [d].
* Played in 4:3 mode. When you play a picture
in the wide mode, it appears as you have
seen on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder
[a].
cae
ppa pea
M aca ppae
paee 16:9 pcpa a
ppa eepe paa 16:9
(16:9WIDE).
B pe ac pee 16:9WIDE a
pae c epe c [a].
paee pe cpee
a ppa eepe pee
4:3 [b] a eepe [c]*
ye ca pe. p ycae
pa pea ppa
eepa pa pe
aa pae pa
paepa [d].
* e 4:3.

,

[a].
[a]
[b]
[d]
16:9WIDE
[c]
In standby mode, set 16:9WIDE to ON in

in the menu settings (p. 156).
B pee a ycae apaep
16:9WIDE ee ON
ycaax e (cp. 156).
MENU
To cancel the wide mode

Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings (p.
156).
54
e ppa
pea
cae apaep 16:9WIDE
ee OFF ycaax e
(cp. 156).
cae
ppa pea
In wide mode, you cannot select the

following modes:
Old movie
Progressive recording mode
B ppa pee e
pa ceye pe:
Cape
Pe ppecc ce
During recording
You cannot operate the wide mode function.
When you cancel the wide mode, set your
camcorder to the standby mode and then set
16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.
B pe ac
He paae ppa pe. Ec
y e ppa pe,
ycae eaepy pe
a, a ae ycae pe
16:9WIDE ee OFF ycaax
e.
Using the wide mode
55
Using the fader

function
cae
y eepa
You can fade the picture in or out to give your

recording a professional appearance.
M peypa ceee
ee ceee pae,
pa cee pecca
.
[a]
STBY
REC
FADER
OVERLAP*
WIPE*
DOT*
(Random)/
(ecp)
* Fade in only/
* T ee
pae
[b]
STBY
MONOTONE
When fading in, the picture gradually changes
from black-and-white to colour.
When fading out the picture gradually changes
from colour to black-and-white.
56
REC
MONOTONE
p e paee ye
cee ec ep-e
e.
p a cee paee
ye cee ec e
ep-e.
Using the fader function
(1) p a e pae
[a]
B pee a aae y
FADER ex p, a e ae
a y ap eepa.
p a cee
pae [b]
B pee ac aae y
FADER ex p, a e ae
a y ap eepa.
ap eec cey
pa:
FADER t MONOTONE t OVERLAP t
WIPE t DOT t e a
ce pax pe
eepa paaec ep.
(2) Hae y START/STOP. ce
e epa e/
cee pae
eaepa aaec epec
pe.
1
FADER
FADER
POWER
VCR
Press FADER until the indicator disappears.

Note
You cannot use the following functions while
using the fader function, and vice versa:
Digital effect
Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE (Only in
OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT mode)
Tape Photo recording
Interval recording
Cut recording
When the OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT indicator
appears
Your camcorder automatically stores the image
recorded on a tape. As the image is being
stored, the fader indicator flashes fast, and the
playback picture appears.
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
To cancel the fader function
e y eepa
Haae y FADER ex p, a
e cee ap.
peae
p ca y eepa
e ca eceye
y ( ap):
p e
Pe ceec PROGRAM
AE ( pe OVERLAP, WIPE
DOT)
cea a ey
ac c epaa
apa cea
Ec ec ap OVERLAP,
WIPE DOT
Beaepa aaec cxpa
paee a ee. B pe
cxpae pae ap
eepa ye ac a, c
cpe paee.
(1) When fading in [a]

In standby mode, press FADER until the
desired fader indicator flashes.
When fading out [b]
In recording mode, press FADER until the
desired fader indicator flashes.
The indicator changes as follows:
FADER t MONOTONE t OVERLAP t
WIPE t DOT t no indicator
The last selected fader mode is indicated
first.
(2) Press START/STOP. After the fade in/out
is carried out, your camcorder
automatically returns to the normal mode.
cae y
eepa
57
Using special effects

Picture effect
You can digitally process images to obtain
special effects like those in films or on TV.
NEG. ART [a] : The colour and brightness of
the picture is reversed.
SEPIA :
The picture gets sepia-toned.
B&W :
The picture appears in
monochrome (black-andwhite).
SOLARIZE [b] :The light intensity is emphatic,
and the picture looks like an
illustration.
SLIM [c] :
The picture expands vertically.
STRETCH [d] : The picture expands
horizontally.
[a]
[b]
(1) In standby or recording mode, press

PICTURE EFFECT.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired picture effect mode.
The picture effect indicator changes as
follows:
NEG. ART y SEPIA y B&W y
SOLARIZE y SLIM y STRETCH
cae
ceax e
e pae
Opay pae p
e ye
ceax e, a
ax a eee.
NEG. ART [a]: e pc pae
yy ea.
SEPIA:
paee ye ee
ce.
B&W:
paee ye
xp (epe).
SOLARIZE [b]: pc cea ye
yce, a paee
ye e a
pcy.
SLIM [c]:
paee pacec
epa.
STRETCH [d]: paee pacec
pa.
[c]
[d]
(1) B pee a ac
ae y PICTURE EFFECT.
pa pea y ea
pae.
ap ea pae ye
ec cey pa:
NEG. ART y SEPIA y B&W y
SOLARIZE y SLIM y STRETCH
1
2
58
PICTURE
EFFECT
Using special effects Picture

effect
cae ceax
e e
pae
To cancel the picture effect

function
e y e
pae
Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator

disappears.
Hae y PICTURE EFFECT,

ap ce.
While using the picture effect function

You cannot select the old movie mode.
p ca y ea
pae
He pa pe cap .
When PROG. SCAN is set to ON in the menu

settings
You cannot select SLIM and STRETCH.
p e a
y e pae ye
aaec eea.
Ec apaep PROG. SCAN ycae
ee ON ycaax e
He pa pe SLIM STRETCH.
When you turn the power off

The picture effect function will be
automatically canceled.
59
Using special effects

Digital effect
cae ceax
e p e
You can add special effects to recorded

pictures using the various digital functions.
The sound is recorded normally.
B ee a ceae
e a acaee paee c
pax px y.
acae y ye .
STILL
You can record a still image so that it is
superimposed on a moving picture.
FLASH (FLASH MOTION)
You can record still images successively at
constant intervals.
LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)
You can swap a brighter area in a still image
with a moving picture.
TRAIL
You can record the picture so that an
incidental image like a trail is left.
OLD MOVIE
You can add an old movie type atmosphere to
pictures. The black bands appear on the upper
and lower of the screen to change the virtual
screen size to the cinemascope size, and the
picture effect is set to SEPIA.
STILL
B ee aca ee
paee ae e a
e paee.
FLASH (FLASH MOTION)
B ee aca ee
pae ceae epe
peeee epa.
LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)
B ee e pe eca a
e pae a e
pae.
TRAIL
B ee aca paee c
e aaa.
OLD MOVIE
B ee cey c e
cap . B epxe e ac
paa c epe c a,
pa pyay pay
pp paa, p e
pae ycae ee
SEPIA.
Still image/
Hee
paee
Moving picture/
e
paee
Still image/
Hee
paee
Moving picture/
e
paee
STILL
LUMI.
60
cae ceax
e p e
(1) In standby or recording mode, press

DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect
indicator appears.
desired digital effect mode.
The digital effect indicator changes as
follows:
STILL y FLASH y LUMI. y TRAIL
y OLD MOVIE
(3) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The
indicator lights up and the bar appears. In
STILL and LUMI. modes, the still image is
stored in memory.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust
the effect.
(1) B pee a ac
ae y DIGITAL EFFECT.
c ap p
ea.
pa pea y p
ea.
ap p ea ye
ec cey pa:
STILL y FLASH y LUMI. y TRAIL y
OLD MOVIE
(3) Hae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
apaec ap, ec
ca. B peax STILL LUMI.
ee paee cxpaec
a.
peyp ea.
Items to be adjusted
STILL
The rate of the still image you want to

superimpose on the moving picture
FLASH
The interval of flash motion
LUMI.
The colour scheme of the area in the

still image which is to be swapped
with a moving picture
TRAIL
The time until the incidental image

vanishes
OLD MOVIE
No adjustment necessary
The longer the bar on the screen, the stronger

the digital effect. The bar appears in the
following modes: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and
TRAIL.
ee peyp
STILL
ecc e
pae, pe y
a a e
paee
FLASH
epa pepc
e
LUMI.
ea aa ac
e pae,
py y ae
paee
TRAIL
Bpe cee
pae
OLD MOVIE
Peypa e peyec
e e caec ca a pae,
e cee p e. ca
ec ceyx peax: STILL,
FLASH, LUMI. TRAIL.
3
1
2
Using special effects Digital

effect
LUMI.
DIGITAL
EFFECT
4
LUMI.
61
Using special effects Digital

effect
cae ceax
e p e
To cancel the digital effect
e p ea
Press DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect

indicator disappears.
Hae y DIGITAL EFFECT.

ap p ea cee.
Notes
The following functions do not work in
digital effect mode:
Fader
Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE
Tape Photo recording
Shutter speed (1/25 or smaller) adjustment
The following functions do not work in old
movie mode:
Wide mode
Picture effect
PROGRAM AE
Spot light mode
Shutter speed adjustment
pea
B pee p ea e
paa ceye y:
eep
Pe ceec PROGRAM
AE
cea a ey
Peypa cpc apa (1/25
e)
B pee cap e paa
ceye y:
ppa pe
e pae
PROGRAM AE
Pe pep cee
Peypa cpc apa
When you turn the power off

The digital effect function will be
62
p e a
y px e
aaec eec.
Shooting with
manual adjustment
Cea c cae
py peyp
Under normal conditions, this unit

automatically makes various adjustments as it
shoots. However, you can adjust the following
functions manually to suit your preference.
B pax ycx ae ycpc

aaec p pae
acp pecce ce. Oa,
cx ccex pee,
peypa pyy ceye
y.
Functions you can adjust by setting the

AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock
release) position
Brightness (exposure), shutter speed, white
balance, and PROGRAM AE
Functions you can adjust by using other

selectors/rings
ND filter, zebra pattern, focus, and zoom
y, pe peypa
ycaax e
Oee y yc ce
The following describes how to adjust all the

functions mentioned above except white
balance (p. 72), PROGRAM AE (p. 79), focus
(p. 83), and zoom (p. 31).
y, pe peypa,
cy pye epeae/c
p ND, ca a, yc
paca
AUTO LOCK selector

Set the selector as shown below to maintain or
release the settings of the functions.
aee caec, a pa
acpaac ce eepecee
y, pe aaca e (cp. 72),
PROGRAM AE (cp. 79), yca (cp. 83)
paca (cp. 31).
epeae AUTO LOCK
cae epeae ee,
a aa e, cxpa
e acp y.
AUTO
LOCK
[a]
[c]
[b]
Functions you can adjust in menu settings

Deactivating the SteadyShot
y, pe peypa,
yca epeae AUTO LOCK
epae ee (ee
aaec peyp)
pc (c), cpc apa,
aac e PROGRAM AE
HOLD
AUTO LOCK [a]

Select this position to let the unit adjust all the
functions automatically.
HOLD [b]
Select this position after setting the functions
manually to maintain the settings.
AUTO LOCK [a]

Bepe ee,
ycpc ca aaec
p acp cex y.
HOLD [b]
ce py acp epe
ee, cxpa ee
yca.
63
Shooting with manual

adjustment
Cea c cae
py peyp
Manual position (AUTO LOCK release) [c]

Select this position to adjust the functions
listed above manually.
Pya acpa (ee AUTO

LOCK) [c]
Bepe ee, pyy
peypa y, epecee
e.
If you use the video flash light (optional)

We recommend that you set the AUTO LOCK
selector to AUTO LOCK.
Note
during backlight or spot light mode, the
backlight or spot light function will be
Adjusting exposure
Adjust the exposure manually under the
following cases.
The background is too bright (back lighting)
Insufficient light: most of the picture is dark
Bright subject and dark background
To record the darkness faithfully
p ca ec
(ppeac e)
Peeyec ycaaa
epeae AUTO LOCK ee
AUTO LOCK.
peae
p acpe c pyy
pee ae ce
pep cee y ae
ce pep cee
yy aaec e.
Peypa c
Be pyy peypy
c ceyx cyax.
c ce (cea ca)
Heca cea: aea ac
pae ea
p e a e e
Hexc ca e ee
paee
64
Cea c cae
py peyp
(1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center

(auto lock release) position while the
camcorder is in standby, recording, or
memory mode.
(2) Press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator
appears on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder.
(3) Turn the EXPOSURE dial to adjust the
exposure.
As you turn the dial, the iris value changes
between OPEN and CLOSE and the gain
value changes between 0 dB and 18dB.
To brighten the picture, adjust the level to
the + side.
(1) a aepa axc pee

a, ac a,
ycae epeae AUTO LOCK
epae ee (ee
aaec peyp).
(2) Hae y EXPOSURE. Ha pae
caee c
ap c.
(3) epe c EXPOSURE
peyp c.
p pe ca aee pc
apa eec OPEN
(pa) CLOSE (apa), a
ea yce - 0 18 .
cea paee ee
p, cece ype cpy +.
AUTO
LOCK
EXP
RE
SU
HOLD
F5.6 0dB
To return to automatic exposure

mode
paa pe
aaec c
Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK

or press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator
disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.
cae epeae AUTO LOCK

ee AUTO LOCK ae
y EXPOSURE. ap c
cee c paa cae.
If you press PROGRAM AE when adjusting

the exposure manually
The exposure comes back to automatic
adjustment again.

adjustment
Ec pe py peyp
c aa y PROGRAM AE
c ca epeaec pe
aaec peyp.
65

adjustment
Adjusting the shutter speed
memory mode.
(2) If the PROGRAM AE indicator is lit, press
PROGRAM AE repeatedly until the
indicator disappears from the LCD or
viewfinder screen.
(3) Press SHUTTER SPEED. The shutter speed
indicator appears on the LCD screen or in
the viewfinder.
desired speed. The available shutter speed
ranges from 1/3 to 1/10000. As you turn
the dial, the shutter speed changes as
follows:
1/3 y 1/6 y 1/12 y 1/25 y ... y
1/3500 y 1/6000 y 1/10000
To increase the shutter speed, select a
smaller setting (large value indicator on the
LCD screen or in the viewfinder).
Cea c cae
py peyp
Peypa cpc apa
(1) a aepa axc pee
a, ac a,
epae ee (ee
aaec peyp).
(2) Ec p ap PROGRAM AE,
ae y PROGRAM AE
ec pa, a ap e
cee c paa
cae.
(3) Hae SHUTTER SPEED. Ha pae
caee c
ap cpc apa.
pa y cpc. Cpc
apa e ycaea
peeax 1/3 1/10000. p
pe ca cpc apa
eec cey pa:
1/3 y 1/6 y 1/12 y 1/25 y ... y
1/3500 y 1/6000 y 1/10000
yee cpc apa
epe eee aee (ap
e e a pae
caee).
PROGRAM
AE
AUTO
LOCK
3
SHUTTER
SPEED
50
HOLD
4
To return to automatic shutter
speed mode
or press SHUTTER SPEED. The shutter speed
viewfinder screen.
66
paa pe
aaec peyp
cpc apa
cae epeae AUTO LOCK
ee AUTO LOCK ae
SHUTTER SPEED. ap cpc
apa cee c paa
cae.

adjustment
Cea c cae
py peyp
When shooting at slow shutter speed

At slow shutter speed, automatic focus may be
lost. Use a tripod and adjust the focus
manually.
p cee c cpc apa

p cee c cpc apa
e e paa aaeca
ycpa. cye a
ycae yc pyy.
If you set the shutter speed value to 1/25 or

smaller
You cannot use the spot light (p. 35) and
digital effect (p. 60) functions.
Using the ND filter

Using the ND filter (the ND filter 1 setting
corresponds to 1/4 of the quantity of light and
the ND filter 2 setting corresponds to 1/32 of
the quantity of light), you can record a picture
clearly by adjusting light amounts, even if you
shoot under too bright conditions.
Cea p cee aa
e cea aa
aaa
B pe ce p cee aa
e cea aa aaa
e y pee ee, p
p pa p cxae
acc cpc apa
(epae).
Ec ycaea ea cpc
apa, paa 1/25 e
He ye ca y
pep cee (cp. 35)
p ea (cp. 60).
cae pa ND
cy p ND ( 1 pa
ND cecye 1/4 eca cea, a
2 pa ND cecye 1/32
eca cea), e c
apy, pa p e e
yca, yy p cee.
When shooting under fluorescent light or

light bulbs
When shooting under fluorescent light or light
bulbs, a rare phenomenon may happen in
which the screen lights up brightly depending
on the shutter speed (Flicker phenomenon).
67

adjustment
Cea c cae
py peyp
When the ND1 or ND2 indicator

flashes on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder
a a pae
caee ae ap
ND1 ND2
The ND filter is necessary.

When ND 1 flashes, set the ND FILTER
selector to 1 so that the ND 1 indicator lights
up on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
When ND 2 flashes, set the ND FILTER
selector to 2 so that the ND 2 indicator lights
up on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
Tpeyec p ND.
a ae ap ND 1, ycae
epeae ND FILTER ee 1,
a pae caee
apec ap ND 1.
a ae ap ND 2, ycae
epeae ND FILTER ee 2,
a pae caee
apec ap ND 2.
When ND OFF flashes on the LCD

screen or in the viewfinder
The ND filter is not necessary. Set the ND
FILTER selector to OFF so that the indicator
The ND filter is now deactivated.
a ae ap ND OFF a
pae caee
p ND e ye. cae
epeae ND FILTER ee
OFF, ce ap a pae
caee.
p ND eep e.
ND FILTER
2
1
OFF
Notes
If you set the ND FILTER selector to another
positions during recording, the picture may
be blurred or audio noise may occur. We
recommend that you check the position of
the ND FILTER selector before shooting.
When shooting a too bright object, diffraction
off the small aperture may cause slight off set
in focusing. This phenomenon is quite
common with a use of a video camera
recorder. Using the ND filter will reduce
influence of such phenomenon, and you can
attain a better shooting condition.
If you use the video flash light (optional)
Set the ND FILTER selector to OFF when you
use the flash.
68
pea
Ec pe ac epey
epeae ND FILTER pye
ee, paee e ca
epe e c y.
ee epeae ND FILTER
peeyec pep epe ce.
B pe ce c p ea
pa p e ae
apa e a ee
ceee ycp. e
e ee p ca
eaep. p ca
pa ND ee cac
eee ae, cac ee
ape yc ce.
p ca ec
(ppeac e)
Ec cyec ca, ycae
epeae ND FILTER ee
OFF.

adjustment
Shooting with the zebra
pattern
Set the ZEBRA selector to 70 or 100 in standby

or memory mode.
Cea c cae
ca aa
M acp eaepy a
paee ca aa
(aax c) ac
pae a pae
caee, e pc peae
peee ype. a
epeae ZEBRA ycae
ee 100, ca a
paaec acx c c
pc epeep. M pep
ype pc ea, pa
ca a. ca a
cyec aece pepa
acp ex c
cpc apa ye
eae pae.
cae epeae ZEBRA
ee 70 100 pee a
a.
ZEBRA
OFF
70
100
Setting Meaning
70
The zebra pattern appears in the portion of

the picture on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder with a subject whose brightness
is about 70%.
100
The zebra pattern appears in the portion of

the picture on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder with a subject whose brightness
exceeds more than 100%.
OFF
The zebra pattern does not appear on the

caa Haaee
70
ca a ec a
pae caee
ex acx pae, e
pc ea ccae
70%.
100
ca a ec a
pae caee
ex acx pae, e
pc ea peae 100%.
OFF
ca a e paaec
a pae caee.
You can set the camcorder to display a zebra

pattern (diagonal stripes) in the portion of the
picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder
with a subject whose brightness exceeds a
certain level. When the ZEBRA selector is set
to 100, the portion of the picture where zebra
pattern appears is an area of high brightness
and overexposure. You can check the picture
level of a subject by displaying the zebra
pattern. Use the zebra pattern as a guide for
adjusting the exposure and shutter speed so
that you can get the desired picture.
Cea c cae
py peyp
To erase the zebra pattern

Set the ZEBRA selector to OFF.
Note on shooting with the zebra pattern
Even though you see the zebra pattern on the
LCD screen or in the viewfinder, the zebra
pattern is not recorded.
ya ca a
cae epeae ZEBRA
ee OFF.
aea ce ce c
cae ca aa
ae ec ca a
paaec a pae
caee, e acaec.
69

adjustment
Releasing the SteadyShot
function
When the SteadyShot function is working, the
camcorder compensates for camera-shake.You
can release the SteadyShot function when you
do not need to use it. The
indicator appears
on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Do not
use the SteadyShot function when shooting a
stationary object with a tripod.
standby or memory mode.
STEADYSHOT, then press the dial.
OFF, then press the dial.
Cea c cae
py peyp
Oee y
yc ce (SteadyShot)
a ea y yc
ce, eaepa ecpye
paa. a a y e
peyec, ee . Ha pae
caee c
ap
. He cye y
yc ce p cee
e ea c
aa.
(1) Hae y MENU
pae e pee a
a.
, a ae ae
pa yca
a c.
pa yca STEADYSHOT, ae
ae c.
pa OFF, ae ae c.
(5) Hae y MENU yae
a e.
2-4
CAMERA SET
D ZOOM
16 : 9W I DE
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC
I NT. REC
1,5
CAMERA SET
D ZOOM
: 9W I DE
[MENU] 16
: END
STEADYSHOT ON
FRAME REC OFF
I NT. REC
RETURN
MENU
CAMERA SET
D ZOOM
: 9W I DE
[MENU] 16
: END
STEADYSHOT OFF
FRAME REC
I NT. REC
RETURN
[MENU] : END
70
Cea c cae
py peyp
To activate the SteadyShot

function again
ca apa
y yc ce
Select ON in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH

EXEC dial.
Bepe ON ye 4, ae ae
c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
Notes on the SteadyShot function

The SteadyShot function will not correct
excessive camera-shake.
If you use a tele conversion lens (optional) or
a wide conversion lens (optional), these lens
may influence the SteadyShot function.
pea y yc
ce
y yc ce e
cc ecpa peepe
paae eaep.
cae ee-
py e
(ppeac e) e
a pay y yc
ce SteadyShot.

adjustment
71
Adjusting the white

balance
Peypa aaca
e ea
White balance adjustment makes white

subjects look white and allows more natural
colour balance for camera recording.
Normally, white balance is automatically
adjusted. You can obtain better results by
adjusting the white balance manually when
lighting conditions change quickly or when
recording outdoors: e.g., neon signs, fireworks.
memory mode.
(2) Press WHT BAL. The white balance
the viewfinder.
appropriate white balance mode under the
following conditions. As you turn the dial,
the display changes as follows:
(One-push white balance) y
(Outdoor) y n (Indoor)
Peypa aaca e ea
e pa e ea
c e e c ee
ecece e aaca p
cee. O peypa aaca
e ea ec aaec.
Peypa aaca e ea pyy
e y ye peya
ex cyax, a yc cee
cp ec p cee a
ye: apep, ex ec,
eepep.
(1) a aepa axc pee
a, ac a,
epae ee (ee
aaec peyp).
(2) Hae y WHT BAL. Ha pae
caee c
ap aaca e ea.
pa ex pea aaca
e ceyx ycx. p
pe ca a eec
cey pa:
(aac e aae) y
(a ye) y n (eee)
72
AUTO
LOCK
HOLD
WHT BAL
Adjusting the white balance
Peypa aaca e
ea
Indicator
ap
Shooting conditions
n (Indoor)
Lighting condition changes quickly

Too bright a place such as a
photography studio
Under sodium lamps or mercury
lamps
If you have selected
in step 3
When you set the white balance to one-push

white balance mode, the setting is locked and
maintained even if lighting conditions change.
You can achieve recording with natural
colours without the image being affected by
ambient light.
(With the
indicator on the screen)
(1) Aim a white object such as paper fully.
(2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
The
indicator flashes quickly. When the
white balance has been adjusted and stored in
the memory, the indicator stops flashing. The
setting will be maintained even if the battery is
detached.
To return to automatic adjustment

or press WHT BAL. The white balance
viewfinder screen.
(a ye)
p ac aaa/cxa
ca, eepe
ypee ap, ex
pea eepep
p cee aa
e cea
aa
n ( ee) p cp cee yc
cee
B e xp cee
ece, apep, cy
p cee ea
ape py a
Ec ye 3 paa ycaa
Ec ycae pe peyp
aaca e aae,
paa ycaa cpyec
cxpaec ex p, a e ec
yc cee. B peyae
yaec ac c ecece
ea, a paee e e
pya ce.
)
(a a pae p ap
(1) Haee a e e ea,
apep c e ya.
ap
ac aae. ce
acp aaca e cxpae e
a ap epecae a.
Hacpa cxpac ae ce
e aape.
(Outdoor) Recording a sunset/sunrise, just after

sunset, just before sunrise, neon
signs, or fireworks
Under a colour matching fluorescent
lamp
c ce
Peypa aaca e
ea cec c
c cea.
a epa ea
pe ac. Ceye
eca peype
p e
acp.

according to the light source.
This operation is not available during
recording. Follow the procedure
described below to adjust the setting
again.
ca pe
aaec acp
cae epeae AUTO LOCK
ee AUTO LOCK ae
y WHT BAL. ap aaca
e cee c paa
caee.
73

Notes on white balance
When you shoot with studio lighting or
video lighting, use the n (indoor) mode.
When you shoot with fluorescent lighting,
readjust the white balance using the
(onepush white balance) mode , or use the
automatic white balance mode. If you use the
n (indoor) mode, white balance may not be
adjusted appropriately.
Shooting when lighting conditions have
changed
When lighting conditions have changed,
readjust the white balance while the
camcorder is in standby mode.
In automatic white balance mode, point your
camcorder at a white subject for about 10
seconds after setting the POWER switch to
CAMERA to get a better adjustment when:
You detach the battery for replacement.
You bring your camcorder outdoors from
the interior of a house, or vice versa.
If the
indicator does not stop flashing
after you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial
The white balance cannot be set. Use the
automatic white balance mode.
Peypa aaca e
ea
aea ce aaca e
p cee c cy ceee
c ece
cye pe n ( ee).
p cee c ceee aa
e cea peypye aac
e, cy pe
(peypa
aaca e aae)
aaec peyp. B cyae
ca pea n ( ee),
peypa aaca e e
c eep.
Cea p ee yc
cee
Ec yc cee ec,
epee eaepy pe
a a peypye aac
e.
B pee aaec peyp
aaca e apae eaepy
a e pee pe a 10
cey ce yca epeae
POWER ee CAMERA
ye yye cp
peyp, a:
B ceee aape
ae.
B xe c aep ee
a yy ap.
Ec ap
pae a
ce aa a c SEL/PUSH EXEC
aac e e yca.
cye pe aaec
peyp aaca.
74
Peypa yp
Adjusting recording
ac pyy
level manually
Sound recording level pe ac ya
M acpaa ype ac ya.
pcya ya pe
peyp cye ay.
Setting up the menu

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or
VCR.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.
MIC LEVEL, then press the dial.
MANUAL, then press the dial.
Hacpa e
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee CAMERA VCR.
(2) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa yca MIC LEVEL, ae
ae a c.
pa yca MANUAL, ae
ae a c.
(6) Hae y MENU yae
a e.
Adjusting the recording level

(7) Press AUDIO LEVEL to display the
recording level adjustment display in
standby or recording mode.
the recording level.
POWER
VCR
Peypa yp ac
(7) Hae y AUDIO LEVEL
pae paa peyp
yp ac pee a
ac.
peyp yp ac.
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
2,6
AUDIO LEVEL
[a]
MENU
30 20 12
0 dB
You can adjust the recording sound level. Use

headphones to monitor the sound when you
adjust it.
[b][c]
3,4
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUD I O MODE
REMA I N
M I C LEVEL
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUD I O MODE
REMA I N
I C LEVEL
AUTO
[MENU] M
: END
RETURN
[MENU] : END
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUD I O MODE
REMA I N
AUTO
M I C LEVEL
RETURN
MANUAL
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUD I O MODE
REMA I N
I C LEVEL
MANUAL
[MENU] :MEND
RETURN
[MENU] : END
75
Adjusting recording level

manually Sound recording
level
Peypa yp ac
pyy pe ac ya
[a] Recording level meter

[b]Decreases the recording level
[c] Increases the recording level
[a] ap yp ac
[b] eae ype ac
[c] eae ype ac
To clear the recording level

adjustment display
e pae paa
peyp yp ac
Press AUDIO LEVEL again.
Hae y AUDIO LEVEL ee pa.
To adjust the recording level

automatically
aaec acp
yp ac
Select AUTO in step 5, then press the SEL/

PUSH EXEC dial.
Bepe ycay AUTO ye 5,

ae ae c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
Notes on the manual adjustment

The recording level setting is retained for
about five minutes after removing the
battery.
The recording level indicator appears at the
lower-right on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder.
aea ce py
peyp
Hacpa yp ac cxpaec
eee pep y ce
e aape.
ap yp ac paaec
pa e yy a pae
caee.
The sound input through the AUDIO L/R

jacks or DV Interface
You cannot adjust the recording level.
When MIC LEVEL is set to AUTO
You cannot adjust the recording level,
however, the recording level adjustment
display is displayed.
76
B y caa epe ea
AUDIO L/R epec DV
pe ac e peypyec.
a aa MIC LEVEL ycaea
ee AUTO
Peypa yp ac ea,
pa peyp yp ac
paaec.
peapea acpa
aeca pae
yaa acpa
You can preset the camcorder to record the

picture with the desired picture quality.
When presetting, adjust the picture by
shooting a subject and checking the picture
displayed on a TV using the menu settings.
(1) Press CUSTOM PRESET to display the
CUSTOM PRESET menu in standby or
memory mode.
SET, then press the dial.
desired item, then press the dial.
the selected item, then press the dial.
(7) Press CUSTOM PRESET.
The CUSTOM PRESET menu disappears
and the indicator
appears on the LCD
M peape acp
eaepy ac pae c
peye aec.
ce e acpe
paee c apaep e,
pcapa paee a pae
eepa.
(1) Hae y CUSTOM PRESET
pae e CUSTOM PRESET
pee a a.
pa yca SET, ae ae
a c.
pa yca ON, a ae ae
a c.
pa y eea, a ae
ae a c.
acp pa eea, a
ae ae a c.
(7) Hae y CUSTOM PRESET.
Me CUSTOM PRESET cee, a
pae caee
c ap
.
1
CUSTOM PRESET
CUSTOM PRESET
SET
OFF
COLOUR LVL
SHARPNESS
WB SH I FT
AE SH I FT
AGC LIMIT
OFF
RESET
STBY
2-4
[CP] : END
CUSTOM PRESET
STBY
SET
OFF
COLOUR LVL
SHARPNESS
WB SH I FT
AE SH I FT
AGC LIMIT
RESET
RETURN
CUSTOM PRESET
STBY
OFF
SET
COLOUR LVL ON
[CP] : END
SHARPNESS
WB SH I FT
AE SH I FT
AGC LIMIT
RESET
RETURN
CUSTOM PRESET
STBY
SET
ON
COLOUR LVL
[CP] : END
SHARPNESS
WB SH I FT
AE SH I FT
AGC LIMIT
RESET
RETURN
Presetting the
adjustment for picture
quality Custom preset
[CP] : END
5,6
CUSTOM PRESET
STBY
SET
COLOUR LVL
SHARPNESS
WB SH I FT
AE SH I FT
AGC LIMIT
RESET
RETURN
CUSTOM PRESET
STBY
COLOUR LVL
[CP] : END
7
CUSTOM PRESET
[CP] : END
77
Presetting the adjustment for

picture quality Custom preset
peapea acpa
aeca pae
yaa acpa
Items to be adjusted/ee peyp

Item/ee
Meaning/Haaee
Adjustment value/Bea peyp
COLOUR LVL
Colour intensity/
ecc e
Decreases colour intensity y Increases

colour intensity/
eee ecc ea y
eee ecc ea
SHARPNESS
Sharpness/
Pec
Softer y Sharper/
Caee y Pee
WB SHIFT
White balance/
aac e
Bluish y Reddish/
C y pac
AE SHIFT
Brightness/
pc
4 y +4
AGC LIMIT
Auto Gain-limit/
Aaece paee yce
6 dB/12 dB/OFF/
6 /12 /OFF
RESET
Sets items above to the default settings./

caa eyaax ee
ae ya.
To cancel using the custom preset

EXEC dial.
To return to the standard setting

Select OK from the RESET item in step 5, then
press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. To cancel,
select RETURN, then press the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial.
To check the custom preset setting

Press CUSTOM PRESET while the camcorder
is in standby, recording or memory mode.
The custom preset setting appears on the LCD
Once you adjust AE shift
You can adjust the brightness of the picture
according to recording circumstances or
objects.
About the AGC Limit
When adjusting the exposure manually, the
level of the gain is up to 18 dB (OFF).
When you preset the desired picture quality
in CAMERA or memory mode
The preset is only available in each mode you
preset. If you want to use a preset both in
CAMERA and memory modes, you have to
preset in each mode.
78
e ya
acp
Bepe ycay OFF ye 4, ae
ccae caapx
acpe
Bepe ycay OK eea
RESET ye 5, ae ae a c
SEL/PUSH EXEC. e epe
RETURN, ae ae a c SEL/
PUSH EXEC.
pep ya
acp
a eaepa axc pee
a, ac a, ae
y CUSTOM PRESET.
Ha pae caee
c a ya
acp.
ce peyp ca AE
pc pae peypa
acc yc ac
e.
O pae yce AGC
p acpe c pyy ype
yce ccae e ee 18 (OFF).
Ec peapea acpa peye
aeca pae ec
pee CAMERA a
peapea acpa cya
ex peax, e a
pac. Ec peapey
acpy peyec ca a
pee CAMERA, a pee a,
ee ex cea a pee.
Using the PROGRAM

AE function
cae
y PROGRAM AE
You can select from five PROGRAM AE (Auto

Exposure) modes to suit your shooting
situation, referring to the following.
M pa pe
PROGRAM AE (aaeca
c) cec c yc
ce, pycyc cey.
Selecting the best mode

Select a proper PROGRAM AE mode referring
to the following description.
Bp aee xe
pea
Bepe ex pe PROGRAM
AE a ce ceye ca.
S: Shutter speed priority mode

Selecting the shutter speed manually. The
exposure value changes in accordance with the
selected shutter speed.
: Sports lesson mode
Capturing high-speed action in sports such as
golf or tennis
: Sunset & Moon mode
Recording sunset, night views, fireworks or
neon signs
: Low lux mode
For recording a subject in insufficient light.
Subject becomes bright.
A: Pe ppea apa
Bp apa peee
ex y pec. cee
cpc apa acpaac
aaec cec c
ycae aee apa
ye ex c.
S: Pe ppea cpc
apa
Bp cpc apa pyy.
aee c eec
cec c pa cpc
apa.
: Pe cpx cca
Cea cp yxc e,
apep, pe p
ec
: Pe aaa ca y
cee
Cea aa ca, x ,
eepep ex pea
A: Aperture priority mode

Selecting the aperture to determine the desired
depth of field. Gain and shutter speed are
automatically set in combination with the
aperture value to maintain appropriate
exposure.
: Pe ceec
ce e p eca
cee. Oe cac p.
79
Using the PROGRAM AE

function
function
memory mode.
(2) Press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE
the viewfinder.
desired PROGRAM AE mode.
The PROGRAM AE mode changes as
follows:
Aperture priority mode y Shutter speed
priority mode y Sports lesson mode y
Sunset & Moon mode y Low lux mode
When you select the aperture priority mode
or the shutter speed priority mode, press
the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
(4) In aperture priority mode ( A) or shutter
speed priority mode ( S), turn the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired
aperture value (F value) or shutter speed.
Aperture priority mode:
Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired aperture value. As you turn the
dial, the F value changes between F1.6 and
F11.
For a smaller aperture, select a higher
value. The gain and shutter speed change in
accordance with the selected aperture
value.
Shutter speed priority mode:
Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired shutter speed. As you turn the dial,
shutter speed changes between 1/50 and
1/10000.
For a faster shutter speed, select a smaller
value indicator on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder. The gain and aperture values
change in accordance with the selected
shutter speed.
80
cae y
PROGRAM AE
cae y
PROGRAM AE
(1) a aepa axc pee
a, ac a,
epae ee (ee
aaec peyp).
(2) Hae y PROGRAM AE. Ha
pae caee
c ap PROGRAM AE.
pa y pea PROGRAM AE.
Pe PROGRAM AE eec
cey pa:
Pe ppea apa y
Pe ppea cpc apa y
Pe cpx cca y
Pe aaa ca y
cee y Pe
ceec
p pe pea ppea
apa pea ppea
cpc apa ae a c SEL/
PUSH EXEC.
(4) B pee ppea apa (
A)
pee ppea cpc
apa (
S) epe c SEL/
PUSH EXEC pa peye
e apa (ae F)
cpc apa.
Pe ppea apa:
epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa peye e
apa. p pe ca
aee F eec F1.6 F11.
a apa epe
ee aee. cee cpc
apa ec cec c
pa e apa.
Pe ppea cpc apa:
epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa peye cpc apa.
p pe ca cpc apa
eec 1/50 1/10000.
ee c cpc apa
epe ap c e
aee a pae
caee. ae yce
apa ec cec
c pa cpc apa.

function
AUTO
LOCK
cae y
PROGRAM AE
3,4
HOLD
AE
To cancel using the PROGRAM AE

function
e y
PROGRAM AE

or press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE
viewfinder screen.
cae epeae AUTO LOCK

ee AUTO LOCK ae
y PROGRAM AE. ap
PROGRAM AE cee a pae
caee.
Notes
In sports lesson mode, you cannot take closeups. This is because your camcorder is set to
focus only on subjects in the middle to far
distance.
In sunset & moon mode, your camcorder is
set to focus only on distant subjects.
The old movie mode and the shutter speed
adjustment do not work in PROGRAM AE
mode.
The following functions do not work in low
lux mode:
Digital effect
Overlap
Wipe
Dot
Spot light mode
While shooting in memory mode, the low lux
and sports lesson modes do not work. (The
indicator flashes.)
pea
B pee cpx cca cea
py a ea.
cec e, eaepa
acpea ycp a
e, axec a cpee
ae paccx.
B pee aaa ca y
cee eaepa e
ycpac a yaee
e.
Pe cap peypa
cpc apa e paa pee
PROGRAM AE.
Ceye y e paa
pee ceec:
p e
Haee pae
aee pae
Dot
Pe pep cee
p cee pee MEMORY pe
ceec cpx
cca e paa. (ap
ae.)
PROGRAM
81

function
cae y
PROGRAM AE
If you are recording under a discharge tube

such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp or
mercury lamp
Flickering or changes in colour may occur in
sports lesson mode. If this happens, turn the
PROGRAM AE function off.
Ec cea pc p
ca apapx a,
apep, a e cea,
apex pyx a
B pee cpx cca e
y epae ee
ec. Ec pe,
e y PROGRAM AE.
Even if the PROGRAM AE function is

selected
You can adjust the exposure.
When you focus in telephoto
You cannot choose F1.6 and F2.
About the depth of field
The depth of field is the in-focus range,
measured from the distance behind a subject to
the distance in front. The depth of field can
vary with the iris (F value) and the focal
length. Lowering the F value (large iris)
reduces the depth of field. Raising the F value
(small iris) provides a larger depth of field.
Zooming in telephoto position offers a smaller
depth of field while the depth of field in the
wide-angle position is greater.
The depth of field Shallow
Deep
Iris
Near open
Near close
(Low F value) (High F value)
Zoom
Telephoto (T)
Wide (W)
Ec paa y PROGRAM AE
Ba acpa c.
p ycpe e
ee
ae F1.6 F2 cac
ecy.
O ye pec
ya pec - ac pe
paae pcpaca,
peeea pacce ey
cc epe e ycp
ca e. yy pec
e c pc apa
(ea F) yc pacc. p
yee ae F (a ea
apa) ya pec
yeaec. p yee ae F
(aa ea apa) ya
pec yeaec. Cea
e ee eceae
ey yy pec, ya
pec e py e.
ya
pec
Mee
apaa
pa
(ae
aee F)
apa
(e
aee F)
Tpaca Tee (T)
82
py
(W)
Pya ycpa
You can gain better results by manually

adjusting the focus in the following cases:
The autofocus mode is not effective when
shooting
subjects through glass coated with water
droplets
horizontal stripes
subjects with little contrast with
backgrounds such as walls and sky
When you want to change the focus from a
subject in the foreground to a subject in the
background
Shooting a stationary subject when using a
tripod
ye peya c py
ycp y ceyx
cyax:
Pe aaec ycp
ec ee p
e ce
e epe ce, pe
a
pax c
e c a pacc a
a e, a cea e
Ec y eee
ycp c ea a epee
ae a e a ae ae
p cee e ea c
aa
(1) Slide FOCUS down to MANUAL in

standby, recording, or memory mode. The
9 indicator appears on the LCD screen or
in the viewfinder in recording, standby, or
memory mode.
(2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen the focus.
(1) epee peyp FOCUS

ee MANUAL, a aepa
axc pee a, ac
a. B pee a, ac
a a pae
caee c ap 9.
(2) epe ycp
ye e ycp.
FOCUS
AUTO
Focusing manually
MAN
INFINITY
PUSH AUTO
83
Focusing manually
Pya ycpa
To return to the autofocus mode
paa pe
aaec ycp
Slide FOCUS up to AUTO to turn off the 9 or

indicator.
To focus in infinity
Slide FOCUS to INFINITY. The
indicator
viewfinder. This function is useful when the
nearer subject is focused automatically, even
though you want to focus on a faraway
subject.
To shoot with auto focusing

momentarily
Press PUSH AUTO.
The auto focus functions while you are
pressing PUSH AUTO.
Use this button to focus on one subject and
then another with smooth focusing.
When you release PUSH AUTO, manual
focusing resumes.
To obtain the correct focus
First, focus on a subject manually with the
zoom set toward the T (telephoto) side, then
adjust the zoom by pressing the W side of
the lever gradually.
When you shoot close to the subject
Focus at the end of the W (wide-angle)
position.
9 changes as follows:
when recording a distant subject.
when the subject is too close to focus on.
epee epeae FOCUS epx

ee AUTO,
ap 9 .
yca yc a
ecec
epee epeae FOCUS
ee INFINITY. Ha pae
caee c ap . a
y ea cyae, a
ycpa aaec
acpaaec a e, a yc
peyec aec a yae e.
ce c e
aaec ycp
Hae y PUSH AUTO.
Aycpa ec pe
aa PUSH AUTO.
cye y y ycp
a e, a ae a py c
a ycp.
a ycaec a PUSH AUTO,
eaepa paaec pe
py ycp.
ye pa
ycp
Caaa aee yc a e
pyy, epey pa
pacapa apae T
(ee), ae cee
peypye paca, aa a
cpy W paa.
Ec ec cea
ea
Be ycpy e
e W (py).
ap 9 ye ec
cey pa:
p ac yaex e.
ec e axc c ,
ycpy a e.
84
Interval recording
You can make a time-lapse recording by
setting the camcorder to automatically record
and standby sequentially. You can achieve an
excellent recording for flowering, emergence,
etc., with this function.
Example
11 ss
11 ss
[a]
9 9min
min59
59 ss
10 min
min
10
M cey c e
ycpe e, acp
eaepy a pa, a
ceae a ac
epexa pe a. C
y y yay
cey pacp ea, e
cx ..
9 9min
min 59
59 ss
pep
[b]
10
10 min
min
1
1 sc
11 cs
[a]
9 9
min 59
59 cs
[b]
[a] Recording time
[b]Waiting time
10
10 min
[a] Bpe ac
[b] Bpe a
[a]
9 9
min 59
59 sc
[b]
10
10min
[b]
[a]
ac c
epaa
85
Interval recording
ac c epaa

standby mode.
INT. REC, then press the dial.
SET, then press the dial.
(5) Set INTERVAL and REC TIME.
1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
INTERVAL, then press the dial.
the desired interval time, then press the
dial.
The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN
y 10MIN
REC TIME, then press the dial.
the desired recording time, then press
the dial.
The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC
y 2SEC
RETURN, then press the dial twice.
(1) Hae y MENU

pae e pee a.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa yca INT. REC, ae
ae a c.
pa yca SET, ae ae
a c.
(5) cae apaep INTERVAL REC
TIME.
1 epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca INTERVAL, ae
ae a c.
pa ex
pec epaa,
ae ae a c.
Bpe: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y
10MIN
pa yca REC TIME, ae
ae a c.
pa ex pee
ac, ae ae a c.
Bpe: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC
y 2SEC
pa
RETURN, ae a
ae a c.
MENU
2-4
CAMERA SET
D ZOOM
16 : 9W I DE
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC
I NT. REC
CAMERA SET
D ZOOM
: 9W I DE
[MENU] 16
: END
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC
I NT. REC
OFF
RETURN
CAMERA SET
D ZOOM
: 9W I DE
[MENU] 16
: END
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC
I NT. REC
ON
RETURN
OFF
SET
86
[MENU] : END
CAMERA SET
I NT. REC
I NTERVAL
REC T I ME
RETURN
2
30SEC
[MENU] : END
CAMERA SET
I NT. REC
I NTERVAL
REC T I ME
RETURN
[MENU] : END
CAMERA SET
I NT. REC
I NTERVAL
REC T I ME
RETURN
30SEC
1M I N
5M I N
10M I N
[MENU] : END
4
0 . 5SEC
CAMERA SET
I NT. REC
I NTERVAL
REC T I ME
RETURN
[MENU] : END
0 . 5SEC
1SEC
1 . 5SEC
2SEC
Interval recording
ac c epaa

The interval recording indicator flashes.
(8) Press START/STOP to start interval
recording. The interval recording indicator
lights up.

pa yca ON, a ae ae
a c.
(7) Hae y MENU yae
a e. aae ap
ac c epaa.
(8) Hae y START/STOP,
aa ac c epaa. apc
ap ac c epaa.
MENU
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
CAMERA SET
D ZOOM
16 : 9W I DE
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC
I NT. REC
ON
RETURN
I NTERVAL
[MENU] : END
To cancel the interval recording
e ac c epaa
Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings.

Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR
or MEMORY.
cae ay INT. REC

ee OFF ycaax e.
cae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG), VCR
MEMORY.
To stop the interval recording

momentarily and perform normal
recording
Press START/STOP. You can perform normal
recording only once. To cancel the normal
recording, press START/STOP again.
e ca
ac c epaa
y ac
POWER
VCR
Hae y START/STOP. Oy
ac cea pa.
e ac ae
y START/STOP ee pa.
87
Interval recording
ac c epaa
Note on interval recording

You cannot do interval recording in memory
mode.
aea ce ac c
epaa
ac c epaa ea
pee a.
On recording time
There may be a discrepancy in recording time
of up to +/ 6 frames from the selected time.
Even if you press INDEX MARK during
interval recording
You cannot mark an index.
88
O pee ac
Peae pe ac e ac
pa a +/ 6 ap.
ae ec aa y INDEX MARK
pe ac c epaa
ac ec e ea.
apa ac
ac c a
apa
You can make a recording with a stop-motion

animated effect using cut recording. To create
this effect, alternately move the subject a little
and make a cut recording. We recommend that
you use a tripod, and operate the camcorder
using the Remote Commander after step 6.
standby mode.
FRAME REC, then press the dial.
The FRAME REC indicator lights up.
(6) Press START/STOP to start cut recording.
The camcorder makes a recording for about
six frames, and returns to recording
standby.
(7) Move the subject, and repeat step 6.
M cey c e
aee aa
pae, cy ac c
a apa. ca a
ea epeeae ey e
e cey c a
apa. Peeyec ca
a ypa eaep c
ya ca
ypae ce ya 6.
(1) Hae y MENU
pae e pee a.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa yca FRAME REC, ae
ae a c.
pa yca ON, a ae ae
a c.
(5) Hae y MENU yae
a e.
apc ap FRAME REC.
(6) Hae y START/STOP,
aa ac c a apa.
Beaepa ceae ac
ec ap pac pe
a.
(7) epeece e pe
ec ya 6.
6,7
MENU
POWER
VCR
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
2-4
Frame by frame
recording Cut
recording
CAMERA SET
D ZOOM
16 : 9W I DE
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC
I NT. REC
CAMERA SET
D ZOOM
: 9W I DE
[MENU] 16
: END
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC OFF
I NT. REC
ON
RETURN
MENU
FRAME REC
CAMERA SET
D ZOOM
: 9W I DE
[MENU] 16
: END
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC ON
I NT. REC
RETURN
[MENU] : END
89
Frame by frame recording Cut

recording
apa ac ac c
a apa
To cancel the cut recording
e ac c a
apa
Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings.

Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR,
or MEMORY.
Notes on cut recording
The last recorded cut is longer than other
cuts.
The proper remaining tape time is not
indicated if you use this function
continuously.
You cannot mark an index during cut
recording.
90
cae ay FRAME REC

ee OFF ycaax e.
cae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG), VCR
MEMORY.
aea ce ac c
a apa
ce aca ap e
cax.
Ocaeec pe ac a accee
paaec eep, ec a y
cyec ac.
B pe ac c a apa
e aca ece e.
ac ec
e
If you mark an index at the scene you want to

search for, you can easily search for the scene
later (p. 95).
Ec peee a aca
ecy ey, aee
e pya e a (cp. 95).
In recording mode [a]:

Press INDEX MARK.
The INDEX MARK indicator appears on the
LCD screen or in the viewfinder for seven
seconds and the index is marked after the
indicator disappears.
In standby mode [b]:
Press INDEX MARK.
The INDEX STBY indicator appears on the
LCD screen or in the viewfinder. And when
you press START/STOP to start recording, the
INDEX STBY indicator changes to INDEX
MARK and after the indicator disappears, the
index marking is complete.
The camcorder starts index-marking at the
11th frame from the recording start point. An
index signal will be recorded on cassette
memory about 0.3 sec, and on a tape about five
seconds.
You can mark an index in VCR mode (p. 131).
B pee ac [a]:
Hae y INDEX MARK.
Ha pae caee
eee ce cey apc ap
INDEX MARK. eca ea ye
acaa ce , a cee
ap.
B pee a [b]:
Hae y INDEX MARK.
Ha pae caee
c ap INDEX STBY. a
aaec a START/STOP
aaa ac, ec apa INDEX
STBY ec ap INDEX
MARK, a a ceae, ycaa
ec e aea.
Beaepa ycaaae ecy
ey a 11- ape c aaa
ac. ec ca acaec
accey a pe
eee 0,3 c, a a ey - 5 cey.
ecy ey aca
pee VCR (cp. 131).
[a]
Marking an Index
[b]
STBY
REC
INDEX MARK
I NDEX
STBY
I NDEX
MARK
REC
I NDEX
MARK
91
Marking an Index
ac ec e
To cancel index marking
e ac ec
e
Press INDEX MARK again in standby mode.

Notes on the index
Index marks are recorded during recording,
you cannot mark an index after recording.
Index signals will be recorded both on the
tape and on cassette memory. If you use
cassettes without cassette memory or the
cassette memory is full, the signals will be
recorded only on the tape.
When you record over the recorded tape and
mark an index on the tape, we recommend
that you clear all data in the cassette memory
before marking an index.
92
Hae y INDEX MARK ee pa,

a aepa axc pee
a.
aea ce ec
e
ece e ycaaac
pe ac, ac ec e
ce ce ea.
ece ca yy aca a
a ey, a accey a. Ec
cyec accea e acce
a accea a
epeea, ca yy aca
a ee.
p e ac ycae
ec e a ey, cepay
paee ceay ac, pee e
ycaaa ecy ey,
peeyec cepe ce ae
acce a.
Advanced Playback Operations
Quickly locating a scene using

the zero set memory function
DISPLAY
cp c a c
y a ye e
C y a ye
e eaepa epeaae ey
aa epe ca y
a c aaec ca
ca a e, e aae cea
e - 0:00:00. cea c
ya ca
ypae.
(1) B pee cpee ae
y DISPLAY, ec a pae
caee e paaec
ce.
(2) Hae y ZERO SET MEMORY
ece, pe peyec a
e. aae cea cae
pa 0:00:00, ae a
ap ZERO SET MEMORY.
(3) Hae y x, a ex
ca cpeee.
(4) Hae y m ycpe
epe e aa ye e
cea e. ea cac
aaec, a ce ce
ye e. ap ZERO SET
MEMORY cee, c
pee.
(5) Hae y N. Haec
cpeee.
ZERO SET MEMORY
Notes
When you press ZERO SET MEMORY again
before rewinding the tape, the zero set
memory function will be canceled.
There may be a discrepancy of several
seconds from the time code.
pea
Ec ee pa aa y ZERO SET
MEMORY aaa pa epe
e, y a ye
e ye eea.
Mey pee ece
peee e pacxee
ec cey.
Advanced Playback Operations / cepecae epa cpee
Using the zero set memory function, your

camcorder rewinds or advances the tape to
locate the desired scene, and the searching
automatically stops at the scene having a tape
counter value of 0:00:00. You can do this
with the Remote Commander.
(1) In playback mode, press DISPLAY if the
counter is not on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder.
(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you
want to locate later. The tape counter shows
0:00:00 and the ZERO SET MEMORY
indicator flashes.
(3) Press x when you want to stop playback.
(4) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape
counters zero point. The tape stops
automatically when the tape counter
reaches approximately zero. The ZERO SET
MEMORY indicator disappears and the
time code appears.
(5) Press N. Playback starts.
cepecae epa cpee
93
Quickly locating a scene using

the zero set memory function
When there is a blank portion between
pictures on a tape
The zero set memory function may not work.
ZERO SET MEMORY functions also in
standby mode
When you insert a scene in the middle of a
recorded tape, press ZERO SET MEMORY at
the point you want to end the insertion.
Rewind the tape to the insert start point, and
start recording. Recording stops automatically
at the tape counter zero point. Your camcorder
returns to standby mode.
94
cp c a c
y a
ye e
Ec ey aca a ee
pae eec eaca
yac
y a ye e e e
paa.
y ZERO SET MEMORY paae
ae pee c ac
p cae a cepey
aca e, ae y ZERO
SET MEMORY ece, e y
a cay a. epeae
ey ecy aaa ca a
ae ac. ac cac
aaec ece ye e
cea. Beaepa epec pe
a.
Searching for a
recording by index
Index search
c ac
ecy
c ecy
You can automatically search for the point

where an index is marked and start playback
from that point (Index search). Use a tape
with cassette memory for convenience. Use the
Remote Commander for this operation.
Use this function to check where indexes are
marked or to edit the tape at each sequence
where the index is marked.
M aaec a ec, e
acaa ea, aa cpeee
c ea (c ecy).
eae ca ey c
acce a. epa
cye y ca
ypae.
cye y y pep
, e aca ece e,
peapa e a
a ece.
You can use this function only when playing

back a tape with cassette memory (p. 210).
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
to ON in the menu
(2) Set CM SEARCH in
settings (p. 156). The default setting is ON.
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote
Commander repeatedly, until the index
search indicator appears.
INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t
PHOTO SCAN t no indicator
(4) Press . or > on the Remote
Commander to select the index point for
playback.
Your camcorder automatically starts
playing back at the selected index point.
c ec e
c acce a
y y ca
p cpee e c acce
a (cp. 210).
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
(2) cae ay CM SEARCH

ee ON ycaax e (cp.
156). caa ya - ON.
(3) Haae y SEARCH MODE a
ye ca ypae
ex p, a e c ap
ca ec ee.
ap eec cey
pa:
PHOTO SCAN t e apa
(4) Hae . > a ye
ca ypae,
pa ecy ey, c p
ex aa cpeee.
Beaepa aaec ae
cpeee c pa
ec e.
POWER
INDEX SEARCH
VCR
SEARCH
MODE
CH
CAM
LINE
CAM
CAM
CAM
CAM
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
1
5 / 9 / 03 1 7 : 30
2
6 / 9 / 03
8 : 50
3 24 / 12 / 03 10 : 30
4
1 / 1 / 04 23: 25
5 11 / 2 / 04 1 6 : 11
6 29 / 4 / 04 1 3 : 45
Searching for the index point

using cassette memory
INDEX SEARCH
1
5 / 9 / 03 1 7 : 30
8 : 50
2
6 / 9 / 03
3 24 / 12 / 03 10 : 30
4
1 / 1 / 04 23: 25
5 11 / 2 / 04 1 6 : 11
6 29 / 4 / 04 1 3 : 45
CH
CAM
LINE
CAM
CAM
CAM
CAM
95
Searching for a recording by

index Index search
c ac ecy
c ecy
To stop searching
ca ca
Hae y x.
Press x.
In the
mark
The bar in the
mark indicates the
present point on the tape.
The mark in the
indicates the
actual point you are trying to search for.
If a tape has a blank portion between
recorded portions
The index search function may not work
correctly.
If you mark an index onto an external input
signal
LINE appears in the CH column.
The index of the recording start point when
recorded from external audio equipment
The index mark is not recorded in cassette
memory when recorded from external audio
equipment. If you want to search for the index
point, set CM SEARCH to OFF in the menu
settings and search for the index point without
cassette memory.
Searching for the index point

without using cassette
memory
to OFF in the menu
settings (p. 156). If using a tape without
cassette memory, skip this step.
Commander repeatedly, until the index
INDEX SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t
PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no
indicator
(4) Press . on the Remote Commander to
search for the previous index point or press
> on the Remote Commander to search
for the next index point. Your camcorder
automatically starts playback at the selected
index point. Each time you press . or
>, your camcorder searches for the
previous or next index point.
To stop searching
B ape
ca ape
eyee ec a ee.
Mea ape
eyee ec ca.
yaae
Ec a ee eec eaca
yac ey aca ac
y ca ec ee e
paa epa.
Ec eca ea acaec a
e x ca
B ce CH c a LINE.
caa ec e aaa
ac p e ac c
ee ayycpca
p e ac c ee
ayycpca eca ea e
acaec accey a. Ec
peyec a y yca
ec e, yae ycaax
e apaepa CM SEARCH aee
OFF e c yca
ec e e ca
acce a.
c ec e e
ca acce
a
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
ee OFF ycaax e (cp.

156). Ec cyec ea e
acce a, pyce y.
ye ca ypae
ex p, a e c ap
ca ec ee.
ap eec cey
pa:
PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t
e apa
(4) Hae . a ye ca
ypae ca peye
ec e y > a
ye ca ypae
ca ceye ec e.
Beaepa aaec ae
cpeee c pa ec
e. Bc pa p aa
. > eaepa e
c peye ceye
ec e.
Press x.
96
yaae
ca ca
Hae y x.
Searching the boundaries c pa ac

of recorded tape by title a ee py
Title search
c pa
If you use a tape with cassette
memory, you can search for the
boundaries of recorded tape by title
(Title search) (p. 210). Use the Remote
Commander for this operation.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee VCR.
ee ON ycaax e
(cp. 156). caa ya ON.
ye ca ypae
epa ex p, a e
c ap ca pa.
ap eec cey
pa:
PHOTO SCAN t e apa
(4) Hae . > a ye
ca ypae,
pa p cpee.
Beaepa aaec ae
cpeee a c pa
pa.
POWER
TITLE SEARCH
VCR
SEARCH
MODE
HELLO!
CONGRATULATIONS!
HAPPY NEW YEAR!
PRESENT
GOOD MORNING
WEDDING
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
1
2
3
4
5
6
TITLE SEARCH
3
4
5
6
7
8
HAPPY NEW YEAR!

PRESENT
GOOD MORNING
WEDDING
NIGHT
BASEBALL

to ON in the menu
Commander repeatedly, until the title
Commander to select the title for playback.
playback of the scene having the title that
you selected.
p ca e c
acce a
c pa ac a
ee py (c pa) (cp.
210). epa
cye y ca
ypae.
97
Searching the boundaries of

recorded tape by title Title
search
c pa ac a ee
py c pa
To stop searching
ca ca
Press x.
Hae y x.
If you use a tape without cassette memory

You cannot superimpose or search for a title.
p ca e e acce
a
He aee
c pa.
In the
mark
The bar in the
mark indicates the
The mark in the
indicates the
recorded portions
The title search function may not work
correctly.
98
B ape
ca ape
eyee ec a ee.
Mea ape
eyee ec ca.
yaae
yaae
Ec a ee eec eaca
yac ey aca ac
y ca pa e paa
epa.
c ac ae
c a
You can automatically search for the point

where the recording date changes and start
playback from that point (Date search). Use a
tape with cassette memory for convenience.
Use the Remote Commander for this
operation.
Use this function to check where recording
dates change or to edit the tape at each
recording date.
M aaec c
eca, e eec aa ac,
aa cpeee c eca
(c a). eae ca
ey c acce a.
epa cye y
ca ypae.
cye y y ca ec
ee a ac
e aa cex x ecax.
Searching for the date using

cassette memory
c a c cae
acce a

to ON in the menu
Commander repeatedly, until the date
Commander to select the date for playback.
playback at the beginning of the selected
date.
y y ca
p cpee e c acce
a (cp. 210).
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
ee ON ycaax e
(cp. 156). caa ya ON.
ye ca ypae
ex p, a e c ap
ca a.
ap eec cey
pa:
PHOTO SCAN t e apa
(4) Hae . > a ye
ca ypae,
pa ay cpee.
Beaepa aaec ae
cpeee c pa a.
POWER
DATE SEARCH
VCR
SEARCH
MODE
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
1
5 / 9 / 03
2
6 / 9 / 03
3 24 / 12 / 03
4
1 / 1 / 04
5 11 / 2 / 04
6 29 / 4 / 04
Searching a
recording by date
Date search
DATE SEARCH
1
5 / 9 / 03
2
6 / 9 / 03
3 24 / 12 / 03
4
1 / 1 / 04
5 11 / 2 / 04
6 29 / 4 / 04
99
Searching a recording by date

Date search
c ac ae
c a
To stop searching
ca ca
Press x.
Hae y x.
Note
If one days recording is less than two minutes,
your camcorder may not accurately find the
point where the recording date changes.
peae
Ec pec ac eee
eee yx y, eaepa
e e a ec, e
eec aa ac.
In the
mark
The bar in the
mark indicates the
The mark in the
indicates the
actual point you are trying to search.
recorded portions
The date search function may not work
correctly.
Searching for the date

without using cassette
memory
to OFF in the menu
settings (p. 156). If using a tape without
cassette memory, skip this step.
Commander repeatedly, until the date
indicator
(4) Press . on the Remote Commander to
search for the previous date or press >
on the Remote Commander to search for
the next date. Your camcorder
automatically starts playback at the point
where the date changes. Each time you
press . or >, your camcorder searches
for the previous or next date.
To stop searching
Press x.
B ape
ca ape
eyee ec a ee.
Mea ape
eyee ec ca.
yaae
Ec a ee eec eaca
yac ey aca ac
y ca a e paa
epa.
c ac ae e
ca acce
a
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
ee OFF ycaax e
(cp. 156). Ec cyec ea e
acce a, pyce
y.
ye ca ypae
ex p, a e c ap
ca a.
ap eec cey
pa:
e apa
(4) Hae . a ye ca
ypae ca peye
a ae y > a ye
ca ypae ca
ceye a. Beaepa
aaec ae cpeee
ece, e eec aa.
Bc pa p aa .
> eaepa e c
peye ceye a.
ca ca
Hae y x.
100
yaae
Searching for a
photo Photo
search/Photo scan
c
c/
capae
You can search for a still picture you have

recorded on a tape (photo search).
You can also search for still pictures one after
another and display each picture for five
seconds automatically regardless of cassette
memory (photo scan). Use the Remote
Commander for these operations.
Use this function to check or edit still pictures.
M c e
pae, aca a accey
(c).
M ae c
ex pae epe
paa ae x eee
cey, eac acce a
(capae). x epa
cye y ca
ypae.
cye y y pep
aa ex pae.

to ON in the menu
settings (p. 156). Default setting is ON.
Commander repeatedly, until the photo
Commander to select the date for playback.
playback of the photo having the date that
you selected.
c c cae
acce a
y y ca
p cpee e c acce
a (cp. 210).
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
ee ON ycaax e
(cp. 156). ca ya
ec ON.
ye ca ypae
ex p, a e c ap
ca .
ap eec cey
pa:
PHOTO SCAN t e apa
(4) Hae . > a ye
ca ypae,
pa ay cpee.
Beaepa aaec ae
cpeee c pa
a.
POWER
PHOTO SEARCH
VCR
SEARCH
MODE
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
1
5 / 9 / 03 1 7 : 30
8 : 50
2
6 / 9 / 03
3 24 / 12 / 03 10 : 30
4
1 / 1 / 04 23: 25
5 11 / 2 / 04 1 6 : 11
6 29 / 4 / 04 1 3 : 45
Searching for a photo using

cassette memory
PHOTO SEARCH
1
5 / 9 / 03 1 7 : 30
8 : 50
2
6 / 9 / 03
3 24 / 12 / 03 10 : 30
4
1 / 1 / 04 23: 25
5 11 / 2 / 04 1 6 : 11
6 29 / 4 / 04 1 3 : 45
101
Searching for a photo Photo

search/Photo scan
c c/
capae
To stop searching
ca ca
Press x.
Hae y x.
In the
mark
The bar in the
mark indicates the
The mark in the
indicates the
B ape
ca ape
eyee ec a ee.
Mea ape
eyee ec ca.

recorded portions
The photo search function may not work
correctly.
Ec a ee eec eaca
yac ey aca ac
y ca e paa
epa.
Searching for a photo without

using cassette memory
to OFF in the menu
settings (p. 156).
indicator
Commander to select a photo for playback.
Each time you press . or >, your
camcorder searches for the previous or next
photo.
playback of the photo.
To stop searching
Press x.
yaae
c e
ca acce
a
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
ee OFF ycaax e
(cp. 156).
ye ca ypae
ex p, a e c ap
ca .
ap eec cey
pa:
e apa
(4) Hae . > a ye
ca ypae,
pa cpee.
Bc pa p aa .
> eaepa e c
peye ceye .
Beaepa aaec ae
cpeee .
ca ca
Hae y x.
102
yaae
Searching for a photo Photo

search/Photo scan
Scanning photo
1
POWER
Capae
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
ye ca ypae
ex p, a e c ap
ca capa.
ap eec cey
pa:
PHOTO SCAN t e apa
(3) Hae . > a ye
ca ypae.
ae ye aaec
paac eee
pe cey.
VCR
SEARCH
MODE
PHOTO 00
SCAN
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
To stop scanning
ca capa
Press x.
Hae y x.

scan indicator appears.
Commander.
Each photo is played back for about five
seconds automatically.
c c/
capae
103
Playing back a tape

with picture effects
Bcpeee e c
ea pae
During playback, you can process a scene

using the picture effect functions: NEG. ART,
SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.
B pe cpee
e paee c
y e pae: NEG.
ART, SEPIA, B&W SOLARIZE.
In playback or playback pause mode, press

PICTURE EFFECT and turn the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial until the desired picture effect
indicator (NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W or
SOLARIZE) appears.
For details of each picture effect function, see
page 58.
B pee cpee ay
cpee ae y
PICTURE EFFECT paae c
SEL/PUSH EXEC ex p, a e
c ap y p
ea (NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W
SOLARIZE).
pe cee a y
px e pee a cp. 58.
PICTURE
EFFECT
To cancel the picture effect

function
Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator
disappears.
Hae y PICTURE EFFECT,

ap ce.
Notes
You cannot process a picture using the
picture effect function that is input from
other equipment.
To record pictures that you have processed
using the picture effect function, record the
pictures on the VCR, using your camcorder
as a player.
pea
pae, eee c py
aapayp, e e c
y e
pae.
ac pae, pe
ee c y
e pae, ae
pae a ea,
cy eaepy aece
eepa.
Pictures processed by the picture effect

function
Pictures processed by the picture effect
function are not output through the DV
Interface.
When you set the POWER switch to OFF
(CHG) or stop playing back
The picture effect function will be
104
e y e
pae
pae, eee c
y e
pae
pae, eee c
y e pae, e
c epe epec DV.
p ycae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG) cae
cpee
y e pae ye
aaec eea.
Bcpeee e
c p ea
During playback, you can process a scene

using the digital effect functions: STILL,
FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.
(1) In playback or playback pause mode, press
DIGITAL EFFECT and turn the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial until the desired digital effect
indicator (STILL, FLASH, LUMI. or TRAIL)
flashes.
The digital effect indicator lights up and the
bars appear. In STILL or LUMI. mode, the
picture is captured and is stored in memory
as a still picture at the time you press the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
the effect.
For details of each digital effect function,
see page 60.
B pe cpee
e paee c
y px e: STILL,
FLASH, LUMI. TRAIL.
(1) B pee cpee ay
cpee ae y
DIGITAL EFFECT paae c
SEL/PUSH EXEC ex p, a e
ae a ap y
p ea (STILL, FLASH,
LUMI. TRAIL).
apc ap p
ea c c. B pee
STILL LUMI. pe aa
ca SEL/PUSH EXEC paee
caec cxpaec a a
ee paee.
peyp ea.
pe cee a
y px e
pee a cp. 60.
2
1
STILL
DIGITAL
EFFECT
3
STILL
To cancel the digital effect function

Press DIGITAL EFFECT so that the indicator
disappears.
e y px
e
Playing back a tape

with digital effects
Hae y DIGITAL EFFECT,

ap ce.
105
Playing back a tape with digital

effects
Bcpeee e c
p ea
Notes
You cannot process a picture using the digital
effect function that is input from other
equipment.
To record pictures that you have processed
using the digital effect function, record the
pictures on the VCR, using your camcorder
as a player.
pea
pae, eee c py
aapayp, e e c
y px e.
ac pae, pe
ee c y
px e, ae
pae a ea,
cy eaepy aece
eepa.
Pictures processed by the digital effect

function
Pictures processed by the digital effect
function are not output through the DV
Interface.
When you set the POWER switch to OFF
(CHG) or stop playing back
The digital effect function will be
106
pae, eee c
y px e
pae, eee c
y px e, e
c epe epec DV.
p ycae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG) cae
cpee
y px e
aaec eec.
Editing
Ma
Dubbing a tape
epeac e
Using the A/V connecting cable
cae cee
ae ay/e
Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the

A/V connecting cable supplied with your
camcorder.
Before a dubbing
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings.
(Default setting is LCD.)
epe epeac
cae apaep DISPLAY
ee LCD ycaax e.
(ca ya ec LCD.)
cae ceep epeae
x caa a eae
ee LINE, ec ae eec.
(1) Bcae eacay ey (
ey, a py ex
ac) ea
cae acay ey
eaepy.
(2) cae ceep x caa
a eae ee
LINE. pe cee c.
cpy cyaa
eaa.
(3) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
(4) Hae cpeee aca
e a eaepe.
(5) Hae ac a eae.
pe cee c. cpy
cyaa eaa.
Editing / Ma
Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE, if

available.
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to
record over) into the VCR, and insert the
recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.
For details, refer to the operating
instructions of the VCR.
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your
camcorder.
(5) Start recording on the VCR. For details,
refer to the operating instructions of the
VCR.
cee eaepy
eay c
cee ae ay/e,
p paaec eaepe.
S VIDEO
S VIDEO cable (optional)/
eae S (ppeac e)
IN
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L/R
AUDIO
A/V connecting cable (supplied)/

Cee ae ay/e (x e)
: Signal flow/pxee caa
When you have finished dubbing

the tape
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.
a epeac e aea
Hae y x a eaepe a
eae.
107
Dubbing a tape
epeac e
Be sure to clear the indicators from the

screen
If they are displayed, press the following
buttons so as not to record the indicators on
the dubbed tape:
The DISPLAY button
The DATA CODE button
The SEARCH MODE button on the Remote
Commander
Oae e ap a
pae
Ec paac, ae
ceye , e aca
ap a epeacaey ey:
a DISPLAY
a DATA CODE
a SEARCH MODE a ye
ca ypae
You can edit on VCRs that support the

following systems
8 mm,
Hi8,
Digital8,
VHS,
S-VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHSC,
Betamax,
mini DV,
DV or
MICROMV
If your VCR is a monaural type
connecting cable to the video input jack and
the white plug to the audio input jack on the
VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used.
obtain high-quality pictures
With this connection, you do not need to
connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V
connecting cable. Connect the S video cable
(optional) to the S video jacks on both your
camcorder and the TV or the VCR. This
connection produces higher quality DV format
pictures.
If you use a LANC cable
You can edit precisely by connecting a LANC
cable (optional) to this camcorder and other
video equipment having a fine synchro-editing
function, using this camcorder as a player.
Using an i.LINK cable

Simply connect the i.LINK cable (optional) to
DV Interface and to DV Interface of the DV
products. With a digital-to-digital connection,
video and audio signals are transmitted in
digital form for high-quality editing. You
cannot dub the titles, display indicators or the
contents of cassette memory.
108
Ma a
eaax, pe
epa ceye cce
8 ,
Hi8,
Digital8,
VHS,
S-VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHSC,
Betamax,
miniDV,
DV
MICROMV
Ec ea
ec a
cee e eep
cee ae ay/e
xy ey ecaa, a e
eep - xy ey aycaa
a eae eepe.
pace eep e cyc.
Ceee c eae S
(ppeac e)
ye caecex
pae
p a cee e y
a e (e) eep
cee ae ay/e.
cee eae S
(ppeac e)
eea S a eaepe
eepe eae.
ceee e y
caecee paee
paa DV.
Ec cyec ae LANC
Ceee eaep c py
eaapayp, ee y
cxpa aa, c
ae LANC (ppeac
e) ceyee
cae eaep aece
eepa e e
a.
cae ae i.LINK
pc cee ae i.LINK
(ppeaec e)
epecy DV epecy DV
aapa DV. p ca
p cee e-
ayca epeac p
e, eceae ce aec
aa. Tp, ap a cee
cepae acce a
epeaca e.
Dubbing a tape
epeac e

record over) into the VCR, and insert the
recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Set the input selector on the VCR to the DV
input position if the VCR is equipped with
an input selector. For details, refer to the
operating instructions of the VCR.
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your
camcorder.
(5) Start recording on the VCR.
(1) Bcae eacay ey (

ey, a py ex
ac) ea
cae acay ey
eaepy.
(2) cae ceep x caa
a eae (ec a
eec) ee DV. pe
cee c. cpy
cyaa eaa.
(3) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
(4) Hae cpeee aca
e a eaepe.
(5) Hae ac a eae.
Editing / Ma
DV Interface/
epec DV
i.LINK
i.LINK cable (optional)/ae i.LINK

(ppeac e)
When you have finished dubbing a

tape
You can connect one VCR only using the
i.LINK cable
Pictures processed by the digital effect or
picture effect function
Pictures processed by the digital effect or
picture effect function are not output through
the DV Interface.
If you record a playback pause picture with
the DV Interface
The recorded picture becomes rough. And
when you play back the picture using other
video equipment, the picture may jitter.
a epeac e aea
Hae y x a eaepe a
eae.
C ae i.LINK
ce
ea
pae, eee c
y px e
y e pae
pae, eee c
y px e
e pae, e c
epe epec DV.
p ac pae pee
ay cpee c
epeca DV
acaee paee ye
ee. p cpee
pae a py eaapaype
e pa.
109
Dubbing only desired

scenes Digital
program editing
epeac yx
p
ea ppae
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs)

for editing onto a tape without operating the
VCR. Scenes can be selected by frame.
M ec pa aca a
accey pae aa
(ppa), e ypa
ea.
pa apa.
[a]
[a]
[b]
[a] Undesired frame

[b]Moves the scene
[a] Hey ap
[b] epeeee a
Before operating the digital

program editing
epe aa p aa
ppae
Preparation 1 Connecting the VCR (p. 107,

109).
Preparation 2 Setting the VCR to operate by
infrared rays emitter (p. 112)/Setting the
VCR to operate with an i.LINK cable (p. 118).
Preparation 3 Adjusting the synchronization
of the VCR (p. 119).
a 1 ee
eaa (cp. 107, 109).
a 2 Hacpa ypae
eaa papac
yae (cp. 112)/Hacpa
eaa pa c aee
i.LINK (cp. 118).
a 3 Hacpa cxpa
eaa (cp. 119).
When you dub using the same VCR again, you

can skip Preparations 2 and 3.
Using the digital program editing

function
Ec epeac ca ec c
e eaa,
y 2 3 pyc.
Operation 1 Making programs (p. 123).

Operation 2 Performing a digital program
editing (Dubbing a tape) (p. 126).
cae y p
aa ppae
ece 1 Ccaee ppa
(cp. 123).
ece 2 Bee p
aa ppa (epeac acce)
(cp. 126).
110

Digital program editing
Notes
You cannot dub the titles, display indicators,
or the contents of cassette memory.
When you connect with an i.LINK cable, you
may not be able to operate the dubbing
function correctly, depending on the VCR.
Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of
your camcorder.
You cannot send the control signal of the
digital program editing through the
(LANC) jack.
Preparation 1: Connecting the

VCR
Connect your camcorder and the VCR as
shown on pages 107 and 109.
You can use an A/V connecting cable, or an
i.LINK cable.
pea
Tp, ap a cee
cepae acce a e
epeacac.
p e c ae
i.LINK y epeac e
paa epa, acc
eaa.
B ycaax e eaep
ycae CONTROL ee IR.
epeaa caa ypae p
p ae ppae epe
e (LANC) ea.
Ec ee pc c
ae i.LINK
p p cee e-
ayca epeac p
e, eceae ce aec
aa.
Editing / Ma
If you connect using an i.LINK cable

With digital-to-digital connection, video and
audio signals are transmitted in digital form
for high-quality editing.
epeac yx
p
ea ppae
a 1: ee
eaa
e eaepy
ea, a aa a cp. 107
109.
M ca cee
ae ay/e ae i.LINK.
111

epeac yx
p
ea ppae
Preparation 2: Setting the VCR

to operate by infrared rays
emitter
a 2: Hacpa
ypae eaa
papac yae
To edit using the VCR, send the control signal

by infrared ray to the remote sensor on the
VCR. When you connect using the A/V cable,
this procedure is required.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your
camcorder.
(2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on,
then set the input selector to LINE.
When you connect a video camera recorder,
set its POWER switch to VCR.
EDIT SET, then press the dial.
CONTROL, then press the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR,
then press the dial.
e aa c
cae eaa
ca a e -a -ca
ypae. p e c
cee ae ay/e a
peypa aea.
(1) cae a eaepe
epeae POWER ee
VCR.
(2) Be ae e
eaa ycae
ceep x caa ee
LINE.
p cee eaep
ycae ee epeae POWER
ee VCR.
(3) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa EDIT SET, a ae ae a
c.
pa CONTROL, a ae ae a
c.
pa IR, a ae ae a c.
Set the IR SETUP code

(8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR
SETUP, then press the dial.
IR SETUP code of your VCR, then press the
dial.
See About the IR SETUP code on page
114.
caa a IR SETUP
pa IR SETUP, a ae ae a
c.
pa a IR SETUP a
eae, a ae ae a
c.
C. pae pa e IR
SETUP a cp. 114.
112

epeac yx
p
ea ppae
POWER
VCR
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
MENU
6-9
[MENU] : END
5
OTHERS
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
OTHERS
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
i . L I NK
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
OTHERS
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
OTHERS
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
OTHERS
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
Editing / Ma
OTHERS
BEEP
MELODY
COMMANDER
D I SPLAY
V I DEO ED I T
ED I T SET
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
113

About the IR SETUP code
The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of
your camcorder. Be sure to set the correct
code, depending on your VCR. Code number 1
is the default setting.
pa e IR SETUP
IR SETUP cepc a
eaep. cae pa
, cecy cyey
eay. ya
ycaaaec ep 1.
Brand
IR SETUP code
Sony
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
pa-e
IR SETUP
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
47, 53, 54
Sony
Akai
50, 62, 74
Aiwa
47, 53, 54
Alba
73
Akai
50, 62, 74
Amstrad
73
Alba
73
Baird
30, 36
Amstrad
73
Blaupunkt
11, 83
Baird
30, 36
Bush
74
Blaupunkt
11, 83
CGM
36, 47, 83
Bush
74
Clatronic
73
CGM
36, 47, 83
Daewoo
26
Clatronic
73
Ferguson
76, 83
Daewoo
26
Fisher
73
Ferguson
76, 83
Funai
80
Fisher
73
Goldstar
47
Funai
80
Goodmans
26, 84
Goldstar
47
Grundig
9, 83
Goodmans
26, 84
Hitachi
42, 56
Grundig
9, 83
ITT/Nokia
Instant
36
Hitachi
42, 56
11, 12, 15, 21
ITT/Nokia
Instant
36
JVC
Kendo
47
JVC
11, 12, 15, 21
Loewe
16, 47, 84
Kendo
47
Luxor
89
Loewe
16, 47, 84
Mark
26*
Luxor
89
Matsui
47, 58*, 60
Mark
26*
Mitsubishi
28, 29
Matsui
47, 58*, 60
Nokia
36, 89
Mitsubishi
28, 29
Nokia Oceanic
89
Nokia
36, 89
Nordmende
76
Nokia Oceanic
89
Nordmende
76
Aiwa
114
epeac yx
p
ea ppae

epeac yx
p
ea ppae
Brand
IR SETUP code
pa-e
Okano
60, 62, 63
Okano
60, 62, 63
Orion
58*, 70
Orion
58*, 70
Panasonic
16, 78
Panasonic
16, 78
Philips
83, 84, 86
Philips
83, 84, 86
Phonola
83, 84
Phonola
83, 84
Roadstar
47
Roadstar
47
SABA
21, 76, 91
SABA
21, 76, 91
Salora
89
Salora
89
Samsung
22, 32, 52, 93, 94
Samsung
22, 32, 52, 93, 94
Sanyo
36
Sanyo
36
Schneider
10, 83, 84
Schneider
10, 83, 84
SEG
73
SEG
73
Seleco
47, 74
Seleco
47, 74
Sharp
89
Sharp
89
Siemens
10, 36
Siemens
10, 36
Tandberg
26
Tandberg
26
Telefunken
91, 92
Telefunken
91, 92
Thomson
76, 100
Thomson
76, 100
Thorn
36, 47
Thorn
36, 47
Toshiba
40, 93
Toshiba
40, 93
Universum
47, 70, 84, 92
Universum
47, 70, 84, 92
W. W. House
47
W. W. House
47
Watson
58, 83
Watson
58, 83
Note on remote control code

You cannot do assemble editing with some
VCRs (for recording) if the remote control code
does not correspond to this camcorder (for
playback).
Editing / Ma
* TV/VCR component
IR SETUP
* TB/ea
aea ce a ya
ca ypae
C ep eaa
e a ( ac),
ec ya ca
ypae e cecye
eaepe ( cpee).
115

Setting the buttons to cancel the
recording pause on the VCR
PAUSEMODE, then press the dial.
button to cancel recording pause on the
VCR, then press the dial.
The correct button depends on your VCR.
Refer to the operating instructions of your
VCR.
epeac yx
p
ea ppae
Hacpa e
ay p ac a
eae
pa PAUSEMODE, a ae ae
a c.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC,
pa y e ay p
ac a eae, a ae
ae a c.
Bp pa ac
eaa.
Opaec cpy
cyaa eaa.
1,2
The buttons to cancel recording pause on

the VCR
The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To
cancel recording pause:
Select PAUSE if the button to cancel
recording pause is X.
Select REC if the button to cancel recording
pause is z.
Select PB if the button to cancel recording
pause is B.
116
OTHERS
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE PAUSE
REC
I R TEST
PB
RETURN
OTHERS
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE PAUSE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
e ay p ac a
eae
ac acc
e eaa. e
ay p ac:
Bepe PAUSE, ec a
e ay p ac - X.
Bepe REC, ec a e
ay ac - z.
Bepe PB, ec a e
ay ac - B.

Setting your camcorder and the
VCR to face each other
Locate the infrared ray emitter of your
camcorder and face it towards the remote
sensor of the VCR.
Set the devices about 30 cm (about 11 7/8 in)
apart, and remove any obstacles between the
devices.
epeac yx
p
ea ppae
caa eaep
eaa py p
pya
papac yae eaep
ex apa a a
ca ypae
eaa.
cae ycpca a pacc
pep 30 c ycpae e
pec ey .
Confirming the VCR operation

(1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then
set it to recording pause.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR
TEST, then press the dial.
EXECUTE, then press the dial.
If the VCR starts recording, the setting is
correct.
When finished, the indicator changes to
COMPLETE.
Editing / Ma
Remote sensor/
a ca
ypae
epee pa
eaa
(1) Bcae accey ac
ea, ae ycae
pe ay ac.
pa IR TEST, a ae ae a
c.
pa yca EXECUTE, a ae
ae a c.
Ec ea p
ac, aae pay
acpy.
a ap ec a
COMPLETE.
2,3
OTHERS
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
ENGAGE
REC PAUSE
RETURN
EXECUTE
OTHERS
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
COMPLETE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
117

epeac yx
p
ea ppae
When the VCR does not operate

correctly
Ec ea paae
epa
Set the IR SETUP code, or select the button to

cancel the recording pause on the VCR.
cae IR SETUP epe

y e ay p ac a
eae.
Preparation 2: Setting the VCR

to operate with an i.LINK
cable
When you connect using an i.LINK cable
(optional), follow the procedures below.
camcorder.
(2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on,
then set the input selector to DV input.
When you connect a video camera recorder,
set its POWER switch to VCR.
CONTROL, then press the dial.
i.LINK, then press the dial.
118
a 2: Hacpa
eaa
pa c aee i.LINK
p cee c ae i.LINK
(ppeac e)
e peyp, yaae e.
(1) cae a eaepe
epeae POWER ee
VCR.
(2) Be ae a cee
eae, ae ycae
ceep x caa ee
x caa DV.
p cee eaep
ycae ee epeae POWER
ee VCR.
(3) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
c.
pa CONTROL, a ae ae a
c.
pa i.LINK, a ae ae a c.
epeac yx
p
ea ppae

POWER
VCR
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
MENU
6,7
4,5
[MENU] : END
OTHERS
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
Preparation 3: Adjusting the

synchronization of the VCR
You can adjust the synchronization of your
camcorder and the VCR.
Remove the casstte from the camcorder
beforehand. We recommend that you prepare
a pen and paper for notes.
When you connect to a Sony VCR using an
i.LINK cable, and have set CONTROL to
i.LINK, the setup below is not necessary.
OTHERS
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
OTHERS
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
i . L I NK
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
OTHERS
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
i . L I NK
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
OTHERS
ED I T SET
i . L I NK
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
Editing / Ma
OTHERS
MELODY
BEEP
COMMANDER
D I SPLAY
V I DEO ED I T
ED I T SET
RETURN
a 3: Hacpa
cxpa
eaa
M acp cxpa
eaep eaa.
peape ee accey
eaep. Peeyec p
pyy yay ae.
Ec e ea Sony c
ae i.LINK, aa
CONTROL ycaea ee i.LINK,
cay e peypy acp
e y.
119

(1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then
set it to recording pause.
When you connect using an i.LINK cable
and have set CONTROL to i.LINK, you do
not have to turn the recording VCR to
recording pause mode.
ADJ TEST, then press the dial.
CUT-IN and CUT-OUT are recorded on an
image for five times each to calculate the
numerical values for adjusting the
synchronization.
The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the
LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When
finished, the indicator changes to
COMPLETE.
epeac yx
p
ea ppae
(1) Bcae accey ac
ea, ae ycae
pe ay ac.
Ec ee e c
ae i.LINK aa
CONTROL ycaea ee
i.LINK, aca ea
e y epe pe ay
ac.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
(3) Hae y MENU
pae e.
, a ae ae
pa yca
a c.
c.
pa ADJ TEST, a ae ae a
c.
ae a c.
Ha paee ayc
e CUT-IN CUT-OUT, e
pacca ce ae
acp cxpa.
Ha pae caee
ae ap EXECUTING.
a ap ec a
COMPLETE.
4-6
MENU
OTHERS
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST RETURN
EXECUTE
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP ENGAGE
PAUSEMODE REC PAUSE
I R TEST
OTHERS
RETURN
ED I T SET
CONTROL
[MENU] : END
ADJ TEST EXECUT I NG
CUTI N
CUTOUT No . 2
IN
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE +215
I R TEST
OTHERS
RETURN
ED I T SET
[MENU] : CONTROL
END
ADJ TEST COMPLETE
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
120
epeac yx
p
ea ppae

(8) epeae accey

eae a aa, ae
e aeee
cpeee.
Opae ae a aae
ce aee a e CUTIN ee ce aee
a e CUT-OUT.
(9) Paccae cpeee aee cex
aax cx ae a
e CUT-IN, a ae cpeee
aee cex ex cx
ae a e CUT-OUT.
pa CUT-IN, a ae ae a
c.
pa cpee c ae
CUT-IN, ae ae a c.
Paccae aae ee
ac ycae.
pa CUT-OUT, a ae ae
a c.
pa cpee c ae
CUT-OUT, ae ae a c.
Paccae ee ee
ac ycae.
pa
RETURN, a ae ae
a c.
Editing / Ma
(8) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow

playback.
Take a note of the opening numerical value
of each CUT-IN and the closing numerical
value of each CUT-OUT.
(9) Calculate the average of all the opening
numerical values of each CUT-IN, and the
average of all the closing numerical values
of each CUT-OUT.
CUT-IN, then press the dial.
the average numerical value of CUT-IN,
The calculated start position for recording
is set.
CUT-OUT, then press the dial.
the average numerical value of CUT-OUT,
The calculated stop position for recording
is set.
RETURN, then press the dial.
10,11
OTHERS
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
OTHERS
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
12,13
OTHERS
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
OTHERS
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUTI N
CUTOUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
121

epeac yx
p
ea ppae
Errors in editing
If you connect your camcorder to Sony
equipment with the DV jack, the range of
errors is within +/ 5 frames.
The range may become wider in the following
conditions:
The interval between CUT-IN and CUT-OUT
is less than five seconds (p. 123).
CUT-IN or CUT-OUT is set at the beginning
of the tape.
O p ae
p cee eaep
aapaype Sony c e DV aa
ye peeax +/ 5 ap.
aa e pe p ceyx
ycx:
epa ey ea CUT-IN CUTOUT ee cey (cp. 123).
Mea CUT-IN CUT-OUT ycaea
aae e.
When ENGAGE REC PAUSE appears on the

LCD screen or in the viewfinder
Turn the recording VCR to recording pause
mode.
Ec a pae caee
c a ENGAGE REC
PAUSE
epeee aca
ea pe ay ac.
Note
If you start recording from the very beginning
of the tape, the first few seconds of the tape
may not record properly. Be sure to allow
about 10 seconds' lead before starting the
recording.
If the VCR does not operate correctly
Make sure the IR SETUP code is correct; reset
if necessary.
When the operations of the VCR do not
work with an i.LINK cable
Keep the i.LINK connection, and carry out
Preparation 2 (p. 112) again. The audio and
video signals are sent as digital signals.
122
peae
Ec ac aaec c ca aaa
acce, epe ec cey
pae y acac a
accey epa. pee e aa
ac, ex pyc
pe 10 cey a accee.
Ec ea paae
epa
eec pac a IR SETUP;
p exc epeycae e.
Ec ypaee ea c
aee i.LINK e paae
He a ae i.LINK, e
y 2 (cp. 112) ee pa. Ay-
eca epeac p
e.
epeac yx
p
ea ppae

Operation 1: Making
Programs
ece 1: Ccaee
ppa
(1) Insert the tape for playback into your

camcorder, and insert a tape for recording
into the VCR.
VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.
(5) Search for the beginning of the first scene
you want to insert using the video control
buttons, then pause playback (p. 44).
STOP
REW
PLAY
FF
PAUSE
Editing / Ma
(1) Bcae accey, c p ex

cea ac, eaepy, a
accey ac -
ea.
(2) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa VIDEO EDIT, ae ae a
c.
(5) Hae aa ep a,
p peyec ca, c
ep, ae e
pe ay cpee (cp. 44).
MENU
3,4
OTHERS
BEEP
MELODY
COMMANDER
D I SPLAY
V I DEO ED I T
ED I T SET
RETURN
V I DEO ED I T
MARK
UNDO
ERASE AL L
START
TOTAL
SCENE
[MENU] : END
0:32:30:14
IN
0:00:00:00
0
[MENU] : END
123
epeac yx
p
ea ppae

(6) Hae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC

y MARK a ye ca
ypae.
Mec aaa CUT-IN ep
appapa a
ycae, e epxe
apa e ppa eec
a ce-y.
(7) Hae e ep a,
p peyec ca, c
ep, ae e
pe ay cpee (cp. 44).
y MARK a ye ca
ypae.
Mec a CUT-OUT ep
appapa a
ycae, e e
apa e ppa eec
a ce-y.
(9) pe y c 5 8, ae
aepe ppapae.
ce aepe ppapa
e apa e ppa
eec a ce-y.
M cca e ee 20 ppa.
(6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, or MARK

on the Remote Commander.
The CUT-IN point of the first program is
set, and the top part of the program mark
changes to light blue.
(7) Search for the end of the first scene you
want to insert using the video operating
buttons, then pause playback (p. 44).
(8) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, or MARK
on the Remote Commander.
The CUT-OUT point of the first program is
set, then the bottom part of the program
mark changes to light blue.
(9) Repeat steps 5 to 8, then set the program.
When the program is set, the program mark
changes to light blue.
You can set a maximum of 20 programs.
7
STOP
6
REW
PLAY
FF
V I DEO ED I T
MARK
UNDO
ERASE AL L
START
PAUSE
TOTAL
SCENE
0:08:55:06
1 OUT
0:00:00:00
0
[MENU] : END
8,9
V I DEO ED I T
MARK
UNDO
ERASE AL L
START
TOTAL
SCENE
[MENU] : END
124
0:09:07:06
IN
0:00:12:13
1
V I DEO ED I T
MARK
UNDO
ERASE AL L
START
TOTAL
SCENE
0:10:01:23
IN
0:00:47:12
3
[MENU] : END
On a blank portion of the tape

You cannot set CUT-IN or CUT-OUT on a
blank portion of the tape.
Ha eaca yace e
Me aaa CUT-IN a CUTOUT e yca a eaca
ac e.
Note
The total time of the programs is indicated on
the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, however,
if the time code on the tape is not continuous,
the time may not be indicated properly.
peae
Oee pe ppa yaaec a
pae caee, a,
ec pee a ee e ec
epep, pe e paac
epa.

Erasing the last program
To change the end of the last program, delete
the CUT-OUT mark.
To erase the whole program, delete both the
CUT-IN and CUT-OUT marks.
UNDO, then press the dial. The last set
program mark flashes.
EXECUTE, then press the dial and the
setting is canceled.
Erasing all programs

(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings.
Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
ERASE ALL, then press the dial. All the
program marks flash.
EXECUTE, then press the dial and the
settings are canceled.
To cancel erasing all programs
Select RETURN in step 2, then press the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial.
To cancel a program you have set
Press MENU.
The program is stored in memory until the
tape is ejected.
aee ppa cee

appapa a
yca pye ec a
cee appapa
a, yae ey CUT-OUT.
ya ppa ec
appapa , yae e
e CUT-IN CUT-OUT.
pa UNDO, a ae ae a
c. aae ea cee
ppa.
pa EXECUTE, ae ae a
c, ycaa ye eea.
e yae
Bepe RETURN ye 2, ae
Editing / Ma
To cancel erasing
Select RETURN in step 2, then press the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial.
epeac yx
p
ea ppae
aee ppa cex

appapax
(1) Bepe VIDEO EDIT ycaax
e. epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa ERASE ALL, a ae
ae a c. aa e cex
ppa.
pa EXECUTE, ae ae a
c, yca yy ee.
e yae cex
appapax
Bepe RETURN ye 2, ae
e ppa
Hae y MENU.
ppaa xpac a ea
ee acce.
125

Operation 2: Performing a
digital program editing
(Dubbing a tape)
Make sure your camcorder and VCR are
connected, and that the VCR is set to recording
pause. When you use an i.LINK cable, you do
not have to set the VCR to recording pause.
When you use a video camera recorder, set its
POWER switch to VCR.
(1) Select VIDEO EDIT. Turn the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial to select START, then press the
dial.
The camcorder automatically searches for
the beginning of the first program, then
starts dubbing.
The EXECUTING indicator flashes.
The SEARCH indicator appears during
search, and the EDIT indicator appears
during edit on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder.
The program marks light up after dubbing
is complete.
When the dubbing ends, your camcorder
and the VCR automatically stop.
To stop dubbing
Press x on this camcorder or on the Remote
Commander.
To end the digital program editing function
Your camcorder stops when the dubbing is
complete. Then the display returns to VIDEO
EDIT in the menu settings.
Press MENU to end the digital program
editing function.
126
epeac yx
p
ea ppae
ece 2: Bee
p aa
ppa (epeac
acce)
eec, eaepa ea
eay, a ea
e pe ay p ac. Ec
cyec ae i.LINK,
ea e y epe
pe ay ac.
p ac a eaepy ycae ee
epeae POWER ee VCR.
(1) Bepe VIDEO EDIT. epe c
SEL/PUSH EXEC pa START, a
ae ae a c.
ae a c.
Beaepa aaec ax
aa ep appapa
a aae epeac.
Mae ap EXECUTING.
ap SEARCH ec
pe ca, a ap EDIT
ec pe aa a pae
caee.
ce aepe epeac
apc ap e ppa.
a aaaec epeac,
eaepa ea
aaec caaac.
ca epeac
Hae y x a eaepe a
ye ca ypae.
y p
aa ppa
Beaepa caaaec ce
aepe epeac. ae a cee
ca ec aa VIDEO EDIT
ycaax e.
Hae y MENU aepe
y aa ppa.
epeac yx
p
ea ppae
When the operations of the VCR do not

work with an i.LINK cable
Keep the i.LINK connection, and carry out
Preparation 2 (p. 112) again.
Ec ypaee ea c
aee i.LINK e paae
He a ae i.LINK, e
y 2 (cp. 112) ee pa.
You cannot record on the VCR when:

The cassette is not inserted.
The tape has run out.
The write-protect tab is set to the protect
position.
The IR SETUP code is not correct. (When IR
is selected.)
The setup to cancel recording pause is not
correct (p. 116). (When IR is selected.)
Ha ea e yacc
pec ac, ec:
He caea accea.
aac ea.
eec a ac ycae
ee a.
Hepa IR SETUP. (a
pa IR.)
Hepaa acpa e
ay p ac (cp. 116). (a
pa IR.)
NOT READY appears on the LCD screen

when:
The program to operate the digital program
edit has not been made.
i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable is not
connected. (When i.LINK is selected.)
The power of the connected VCR is not
turned on.
Hac NOT READY ec a

pae , ec:
He ccaea ppaa ypae
p a ppa.
Bpa i.LINK, ae i.LINK e
e. (a pa i.LINK.)
e ea e
e.
Editing / Ma

127
Using with an analog

video unit and a PC
Signal convert function
cae c aa
epyae
y pepaa caa
You can convert the analog input signal to the

digital signal and output it from the DV
Interface on this camcorder. You can capture
images and sound from an analog video unit
connecting a PC which has the i.LINK
(IEEE1394) connector to your camcorder.
M pepaa aa x
ca p ec e a
epec DV eaep.
eaepe ep c
pae i.LINK (IEEE1394), ca
pae y c aa
eycpca.
S VIDEO
eae S (ppeac e)
OUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
i.LINK (IEEE1394)
Cee ae ay/e (x
e)
I.LINK cable (optional)/
ae i.LINK (ppeac e)

A/V t DV OUT, then press the dial.
(7) Start playback on the analog video unit
slightly ahead of the point from which you
want to start capturing images.
(8) Start capturing procedures on your PC. The
operation procedures depend on your PC
and the software which you use.
For details on how to capture images, refer
to the instruction manual of your PC and
your software.
128
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee VCR.
(2) Hae y MENU
pae e.
, a ae ae
pa yca
a c.
pa A/V t DV OUT, ae ae
a c.
pa yca ON, a ae ae
a c.
(6) Hae y MENU yae
a e.
(7) Be pe cpee a
aa eycpce e
pae eca, c p y
aa ac ap.
(8) Hae ac ap a . p
ec p ac
cye ppa
ecee.
ee py pa ac
ap c. cpyx
cyaa ppa
ecee.
Using with an analog video unit

and a PC Signal convert
function
cae c aa
epyae
y pepaa caa
After capturing images and sound

Stop capturing procedures on your PC, and
stop the playback on the analog video unit.
ce ac ap ya
pepae peypy ac a
cae cpeee a
aa eycpce.
pea
p ae cx ap ya c
aa eycpca c
ex yca
cecyee ppae
eceee, cce epeaa
eca ey eaep .
B acc aeca aa
ecaa, e epa
paa ap ce pepaa
eaep aax eca
pe. B acc
aa eycpca,
paee e paca
c epa eepeae.
Beaepa e e aa
p ca, ec x
aa ca cep ca
a apcx pa.
Editing / Ma
Notes
When you edit the captured image and
sound from the analog video unit by a PC,
you need to install an appropriate software
which can exchange video signals between
the camcorder and a PC.
Depending on the condition of the analog
video signals, the PC may not be able to
output the images correctly when you
convert analog video signals into digital
video signals via your camcorder. Depending
on the analog video unit, the image may
contain noise or incorrect colours.
The camcorder cannot output the digital
signal when you input the analog signal that
includes a copyright protection signal.
129
Recording video or
TV programs
ac e
eeppa
Using the A/V connecting cable
cae cee
ae ay/e
You can record a tape from another VCR or a

TV program from a TV that has video/audio
outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder.
record over) into your camcorder. If you
want to record a tape from the VCR, insert
a recorded tape into the VCR.
camcorder.
(3) Set DISPLAY in
to LCD in the menu
settings (p. 156).
(5) Press z REC and the button on its right
simultaneously on your camcorder, then
immediately press X on your camcorder.
(6) Press N on the VCR to start playback if
you record a tape from a VCR. Select a TV
program if you record from a TV. The
picture from a TV or VCR appears on the
(7) Press X on your camcorder at the scene
from which you want to start recording.
M ac a ey c
py eaa aca
eey ppay c eepa,
p ee e/ay x.
cye eaepy aece
acae ycpca.
(1) Bcae cy ey ( ey, a
py y ac)
eaepy. Ec ex cea
ac c eaa, cae
acay ey ea.
(2) cae a eaepe
epeae POWER ee
VCR.
(3) cae ay DISPLAY
ee LCD ycaax e
(cp. 156).
(4) Hae y MENU yae
a e.
(5) Opee ae y z REC
y cpaa ee a eaepe,
ae cpay ae y X a
eaepe.
(6) Hae y N a
eae aaa
cpee, ec ac
ec c eaa.
Bepe eey ppay,
ec ac ec c eepa.
paee c eepa
eaa c a pae
caee.
(7) Hae y X a eaepe
ece, c p y aa
ac.
REC
PAUSE
S VIDEO
eae S (ppeac
e)
OUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L/R
130
: Signal flow/
pxee
caa

Cee ae ay/
e (x e)
VIDEO
AUDIO
Recording video or TV
programs
ac e eeppa
When you have finished recording
ce aepe ac
Hae y x a eaepe a
eae.
Using the Remote Commander
cae ya
ca ypae
In step 5, press z REC and MARK

simultaneously, then immediately press X.
And in step 7, press X at the scene from which
you want to start recording.
If your VCR is a monaural type
connecting cable to the video output jack and
the white plug to the audio output jack on the
VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used.
If you do various playbacks on the VCR

during recording
The recorded picture may be blurred.
On the commander mode
Your camcorder works in the commander
mode, VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3
are used to distinguish your camcorder from
other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control
misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in
the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend
changing the commander mode or covering
the sensor of the VCR with black paper.
On index signal
The index is automatically marked on a tape
when you start recording. If you mark the
index using the INDEX MARK button during
recording, LINE appears in the CH column
on the INDEX SEARCH screen, and the index
is recorded on cassette memory.
Ec ea
ec a
e e eep
cee ae ay/e
xy ey ecaa, a e
eep xy ey aycaa
a eae eepe.
pace eep e cyc.
Ceee c eae S
(ppeac e)
ye caecex
pae
p a cee e y
a e (e) eep
cee ae ay/e.
cee eae S
(ppeac e)
eea S a eaepe
eae.
ceee e y
caecee paee
paa DV.
Editing / Ma

connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S
video jacks of both your camcorder and the
VCR.
This connection produces higher quality DV
format pictures.
B ye 5 pee ae y
z REC y MARK, ae cpay
ae y X. B ye 7 ae
y X ece, c p y
aa ac.
Ec pe ac a
eae cpc
pae
acaee paee e
epe.
O pee ya ca
ypae
a eaepa paae pee
ya ca ypae VTR 2.
Pe ya ca
ypae 1, 2 3 cyc
a eaep pyx
ea p Sony
eae epa pa ya
ca ypae. Ec
cyec py ea
p Sony, paa pee VTR 2,
peeyec e pe ya
ca ypae ap
a ca ypae
eaa ep ya.
O ec cae
Ca ec e acaec
cpay ce aaa ac. Ec eca
ea acaec c
INDEX MARK pe ac, ce
CH a pae INDEX SEARCH ec
a LINE, eca ea
acaec accey a.
131
programs
ac e eeppa
Using an i.LINK cable
cae ae i.LINK
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (optional) to

DV Interface and to DV Interface of the DV
products. With digital-to-digital connection,
video and audio signals are transmitted in
digital form for high-quality editing.
record over) into your camcorder, and
insert the recorded tape into the VCR.
camcorder.
(3) Set DISPLAY in
to LCD in the menu
settings (p. 156).
simultaneously on your camcorder, then
immediately press X on your camcorder.
(6) Press N on the VCR to start playback. The
picture to be recorded appears on the LCD
(7) Press X on your camcorder at the scene
from which you want to start recording.
pc cee ae i.LINK
(ppeaec e)
epecy DV epecy DV
aapa DV. p p cee
e- ayca epeac
p e, eceae ce
aec aa.
(1) Bcae eacay ey (
ey, a py y
ac) eaepy, a acay
ey - ea.
(2) cae a eaepe
epeae POWER ee
VCR.
(3) cae ay DISPLAY

ee LCD ycaax e
(cp. 156).
(4) Hae y MENU yae
a e.
(5) Opee ae y z REC
y cpaa ee a eaepe,
ae cpay ae y X a
eaepe.
(6) Hae y N a
eae aaa
cpee. acaee
paee c a pae
caee.
(7) Hae y X a eaepe
ece, c p y aa
ac.
REC
DV Interface/
epec DV
i.LINK
i.LINK cable
(optional)/
ae i.LINK
(ppeac
e)
132
PAUSE
programs
ac e eeppa
When you have finished recording
ce aepe ac
Hae y x a eaepe a
eae.

You can connect only one VCR using the

i.LINK cable
When you dub a picture in digital form
The colour of the display may be uneven.
However this does not affect the dubbed
picture.
If you record a still picture in playback
pause mode via the DV Interface
The recorded picture becomes rough. And
when you play back the picture using your
camcorder, the picture may jitter.
Before recording
Press DISPLAY and make sure that the DV IN
indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder. The DV IN indicator may appear
on both pieces of equipment.
On the commander mode
mode, VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3
misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in
the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend
changing the commander mode or covering
the sensor of the VCR with black paper.
B ye 5 pee ae y
ae y X. B ye 7 ae
y X ece, c p y
aa ac.
peae
Beaepa e aca c
ca ca caapa PAL.
Hapep, payce eee
eppa (caap SECAM)
yy aca epa. pe
cee cceax e eee
c. a cp. 233.
a ca caapa PAL
ex ca 21p aaep (ppeaec
e).
Editing / Ma
Note
Your camcorder can only record PAL source.
For example, French video or TV programs
(SECAM) cannot be recorded correctly. See
page 233 for details on TV colour systems.
If you use a 21-pin adaptor to input PAL
source, you need a dual direction 21-pin
adaptor (optional).
cae ya
ca ypae
C ae i.LINK
ce ea
p epeac pae p e
e pae a cee e
ep. Oa e e a
aec epeacae pae.
p ac e pae
pee ay cpee epe
epec DV
acaee paee ye
ee. p cpee
e pae a a
eaepe e pa.
epe ac
Hae y DISPLAY yeec,
a pae caee
c ap DV IN. ap DV
IN e c a x ycpcax.
O pee ya ca ypae
a eaepa paae pee ya
ca ypae VTR 2. Pe
ya ca ypae 1, 2 3
cyc a
eaep pyx ea
p Sony eae epa
pa ya ca ypae.
Ec cyec py ea
p Sony, paa pee VTR 2,
peeyec e pe ya
ca ypae ap
a ca ypae
eaa ep ya.
133
Inserting a scene
from a VCR Insert
editing
Bcaa a c
eaa
Ma ca
You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto

your originally recorded tape by specifying the
insert start and end points. Use the Remote
Commander for this operation. Connections
are the same as on page 107 or 128.
Insert a cassette containing the desired scene
into the VCR.
M ca c
eaa a ye acay
ey, yaa eca e aaa
a. epa cye
y ca ypae. ae
cee aa ca a cp.
107 128.
Bcae accey c ex
ea.
[a]
[A]
[b]
[c]
[B]
[C]
[A]:The tape that contains the scene to be

superimposed
[B]: The tape to be edited
[C]: The tape after editing
134
[A]: ea, cepaa

ae
[B]: ea aa
[C]: ea ce aa

Insert editing
0:00:00
ZERO SET
MEMORY
(1) cae a eaepe

epeae POWER ee
VCR.
(2) Ha eae ae ec,
e ye cae [a], ae
ae y X yca
eaa pe ay
cpee.
(3) Ha eaepe ae e
cae a [c], aa y
m M. ae ae y X
yca ee pe ay
cpee.
(4) Hae y ZERO SET MEMORY a
ye ca ypae.
ap ZERO SET MEMORY ae
a, a ec a ca
ye cxpae a. aae
cea cae pa 0:00:00. Ec
ce e c, ae y
DISPLAY.
(5) Ha eaepe ae ec aaa
cae a [b], aa y
m, ae pee ae
y z REC y cpaa ee
cpay ae y X a
eaepe.
(6) Caaa ae y X a
eae , cyc ec
cey, y X a eaepe
aaa ca ce.
Bcaa cac aaec
ece ye e cea.
Beaepa aaec epec
pe ay ac.
Editing / Ma

camcorder.
(2) On the VCR, locate a point just before the
insert start point [a], then press X to set the
VCR to the playback pause mode.
(3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end
point [c] by pressing m or M. Then
press X to set it to the playback pause
mode.
(4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote
Commander. The ZERO SET MEMORY
indicator flashes and the end point of the
insert is stored in memory. The tape
counter shows 0:00:00. If the tape counter
does not appear, press DISPLAY.
(5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start
point [b] by pressing m, then press z
REC and the button on its right
simultaneously, then immediately press X
on your camcorder.
(6) First press X on the VCR, and after a few
seconds press X on your camcorder to start
inserting the new scene.
Inserting automatically stops near the zero
point on the tape counter. Your camcorder
automatically returns to the recording
pause mode.
Bcaa a c
eaa
Ma ca
REC
ZERO SET
MEMORY
PAUSE
135

Insert editing
To change the insert end point
Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote
Commander again after step 5 to erase the
ZERO SET MEMORY indicator and begin from
step 3.

Note
The picture and sound recorded on the portion
between the insert start and end points will be
erased when you insert the new scene.
If you insert scenes on the tape recorded
with an other camcorder (including an other
DCR-VX2100E)
The picture and sound may be distorted. We
recommend that you insert scenes on a tape
recorded with your camcorder.
When the inserted picture is played back
The picture and sound may be distorted at the
end of the inserted portion. This is not a
malfunction.
The picture and sound at the start point and
the end point may be distorted in the LP mode.
To insert a scene without setting the insert
end point
Skip steps 3 and 4. Press x when you want to
stop inserting.
Bcaa a c
eaa
Ma ca
ee eca a
ca
Ca ae y ZERO SET
MEMORY a ye ca
ypae ce ya 5 yae
apa ZERO SET MEMORY ae
c ya 3.
cae ya
ca ypae
B ye 5 pee ae y
ae y X. B ye 6 ae
y X ece, c p y
aa ac.
peae
paee y, acae a ee
ey eca aaa a
ca, yy cep p cae
a.
p cae a ey,
acay a py eaepe
(a pyy aepy DCR-VX2100E)
paee y y caac.
Peeyec ca a
ey, acay c a
eaep.
p cpee cae
pae
paee y y caac
e cae a. Oa
e ec ecpac.
paee y pee LP y
caac aae e cae
a.
ca a e yaa eca
a ca
pyce y 3 4. Hae y
x, a y ca cay.
136
Audio dubbing
Ayepeac
You can record an audio sound to add to the

original sound on a tape by connecting audio
equipment or a microphone. If you connect
audio equipment, you can add sound to your
recorded tape by specifying the starting and
ending points. The original sound will not be
erased. You can also use the Remote
Commander for this operation.
B ee aca ayca
ee epaay yy a
ee, ce ayaapaypy
p. Ec ceea
ayaapaypa, a y
a acay ey, yaa eca aaa
a. epaa y p
e ye cep. epa
ae ca y
ca ypae.
Connecting the microphone

with the MIC jack
ceee pa
ey MIC
MIC
LINE
Set the MIC/LINE

switch to MIC./
cae
epeae MIC/LINE
ee MIC.
: Signal flow/
pxee caa
You can check the picture on TV by connecting

with the video jack. You cannot monitor the
additional sound by the speaker. Use the
headphone jack.
Editing / Ma
MIC (PLUG IN POWER)
Microphone (optional)/
Mp (ppeac
e)
paee a eepe
pep c cee c
ee. e y
ppa epe
ppe. cye e
x ee.
137
Audio dubbing
Connecting the audio
equipment with the MIC jack
MIC
LINE
Set the MIC/LINE switch

to LINE./
cae epeae
MIC/LINE ee LINE.
Ayepeac
ceee
ayaapayp c
ea MIC
Audio equipment
(optional)/
Ayaapaypa
(ppeac e)
MIC (PLUG IN
POWER)
LINE OUT
R
L
: Signal flow/
pxee caa
Connecting the microphone

with the intelligent accessory
shoe
ceee pa c
epae
caex
paece
Microphone
(optional)/
Mp
(ppeac
e)
We recommend that you use the gun
microphone. If the microphone can
select the zoom microphone type, set it
to the gun microphone position./
Peeyec ca
apae p. Ec
pa pa ypa, ycae e
ee apae
pa.
138
Ayepeac
Audio dubbing
Dubbing with the AUDIO L/R
jacks
epeac c ea
AUDIO L/R
Audio equipment (optional)/

Ayaapaypa
(ppeac e)
LINE OUT
L
R
AUDIO
L/R
: Signal flow/
pxee caa
Dubbing with the supplied

microphone
AUDIO R
Do not connect the

video (yellow) plug./
He cee
e (e)
eep.
Editing / Ma
AUDIO L
epeac c
paae pa
No connection is necessary.
Hae cee e peyc.
Notes
When dubbing with the built-in microphone
or an external one, you can check the
recorded picture on the LCD screen, in the
viewfinder, or on the screen of equipment
connected with the VIDEO jack, and you can
check the recorded sound by using
headphones.
When dubbing with the AUDIO L/R jacks,
you can check the recorded picture on the
LCD screen or in the viewfinder, and you can
check the recorded sound by using a
headphones.
You can check both the original sound and
new sound that will be dubbed, with
headphones.
You can adjust the balance of the new sound
and original sound using AUDIO MIX in the
menu settings. You can monitor the sound
using headphones during audio dubbing.
pea
p epeac c cae
cpe ee pa
pep acaee
paee a pae ,
caee a pae aapayp,
e c ea VIDEO,
a ae acae y, cy
e ee.
p epeac c e AUDIO
L/R pep acaee
paee a pae
caee, a ae acae
y c x ee.
a epaa y, a
y, p ye aca,
pep c x
ee.
M peypa aac
ya epaa ya ye
pa yca AUDIO MIX
ycaax e. B ee
ppa y pe
ayepeac c x
ee.
139
Audio dubbing
Adding an audio sound on a
recorded tape
(1) Insert the recorded tape into your
camcorder.
camcorder.
(3) Locate the recording start point by pressing
N. Then press X at the point where you
want to start recording to set your
camcorder to the playback pause mode.
(4) Press
AUDIO DUB. The green
X
the viewfinder.
(5) Press X and start playing back the audio
you want to record at the same time.
The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2)
during playback.
(6) Press x at the point where you want to
stop recording.
Ayepeac
aee y caa
a acay ey
(1) Bcae acay ey
eaepy.
(2) cae a eaepe
epeae POWER ee
VCR.
(3) Hae ec aaa ac, aa
y N. ae ae y X
ece, e y aa ac,
yca eaep pe ay
cpee.
(4) Hae y
AUDIO DUB.
X c a
ee ap
pae caee.
(5) Hae y X pee
ae cpeee ya,
p y aca.
H y ye aca pee
cepe 2 (ST2) pe
cpee.
(6) Hae y x ece, e
y a ac.
AUDIO DUB
POWER switch/
epeae
POWER
140
Audio dubbing
Ayepeac
Monitoring the new recorded

sound
p aca
ya
To play back the sound
cpee ya
Adjust the balance between the original sound

(ST1) and the new sound (ST2) by selecting
AUDIO MIX in the menu settings (p. 156).
Opeypye aac ey
epaa y (ST1)
y (ST2), pa ay AUDIO MIX
ycaax e (cp. 156).
VCR SET
H i F i SOUND
AUD I O M I X
A/V DV OUT ST1
NTSC PB
RETURN
ST2
If you wait five minutes after you disconnect

the power source or remove the battery pack,
the setting of AUDIO MIX returns to the
original sound (ST1) only. The default setting
is for original sound only.
Notes
New sound cannot be recorded on a tape
already recorded in the 16-bit mode (p. 161).
New sound cannot be recorded on a tape
already recorded in the LP mode.
You cannot add audio with the DV
Interface.
If you make all the connections
The audio input to be recorded will take
precedence over others in the following order.
MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack
Intelligent accessory shoe
AUDIO L/R jacks
Built-in microphone
If an i.LINK cable (optional) is connected to
your camcorder
You cannot add sound to a recorded tape.
epe y ce cee
ca a c aape
a ycaa AUDIO MIX epec
epaay yy (ST1) . caa
ya peaaea
epaa ya.
Editing / Ma
[MENU] : END
pea
H y e aca a ey,
acay 16- pee
(cp. 167).
H y e e aca a
ey, ye acay pee LP.
He a y epe epec
DV.
Ec B ce cee
acae x ca ye e
ppe a py caa
ceye ceaec.
e MIC (PLUG IN POWER)
epae caex
paece
ea AUDIO L/R
Bcpe p
Ec eaepe cee
ae i.LINK (ppeac
e)
He a y a acay
ey.
141
Audio dubbing
Ayepeac
If you set the write-protect tab of the tape

to lock
You cannot record on the tape. Slide the writeprotect tab to release the write protection.
Ec a eec ycae
ee a ac
He aca a ey. epee
eec a ac
e a.
We recommend that you add new sound on

a tape recorded with your camcorder
If you add new sound on a tape recorded with
another camcorder (including an other
DCR-VX2100E), the sound quality may
deteriorate.
To add new sound more precisely
Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote
Commander at the point where you want to
stop recording later in playback mode. Then,
follow the procedure from step 3. Recording
automatically stops at the point where ZERO
SET MEMORY was pressed.
On blank portions
You cannot add an audio.
You can adjust the recording level manually
using the recording adjustment display in
the following cases:
Dubbing with an optional external
microphone or audio equipment through the
MIC jack
Dubbing with an optional external
microphone installed into the intelligent
accessory shoe
Dubbing with the internal microphone
142
Peeyec a y
a ey, acay c a
eaep
p ae ya a ey,
acay c py
eaep (a pyy aepy
DCR-VX2100E), aec ya e
yxyc.
ee ae
ya
Hae y ZERO SET MEMORY a
ye ca ypae
ece, e y a ac e
pee cpee. ae
e peypy ya 3. ac
aaec caaaec
ece, e ye aaa a ZERO SET
MEMORY.
Ha eacae yac
He a y.
pe ac peypa
pyy, cy pa peyp
ac, ceyx cyax:
epeac c e
ee pa
ayaapayp epe e MIC
epeac c e
ee pa, cae
epae caex
paece
epeac c cpe
pa
Superimposing a
title
If you use a tape with cassette
memory, you can superimpose the title
while recording or after recording.
When you play back the tape, the title
is displayed for five seconds from the
point where you superimposed it.
You can select one of eight preset titles and
two custom titles (p. 149).
Haee pa
Ec B cyee ey c
acce a, B ee
aee pa
pe ac ce ac.
Ec B cpe ey,
p ye paac eee
cey c eca, e B
a e.
B ee pa c
peape ycaex p
yx ccex p (cp. 149).
Editing / Ma
VACATION
You can also select the colour, size and

position of titles./
B ee ae pa e,
paep ee p.
143
144
Superimposing a title
Haee pa
(1) Press TITLE to display the title menu in

standby, recording, playback, or playback
pause mode.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ,
desired title, then press the dial. The title
flashes.
(4) Change the colour, size, or position, if
necessary.
the COLOUR, SIZE, or POSITION, then
press the dial. The item appears.
the desired item, then press the dial.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid
out as desired.
(5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial again to
complete the setting.
In playback, playback pause, or recording
mode:
The TITLE SAVE indicator appears on
the screen for five seconds and the title is
set.
In standby mode:
The TITLE indicator appears. When you
press START/STOP to start recording,
TITLE SAVE appears on the screen for
five seconds and the title is set.
(1) Hae y TITLE pae

e p pee a,
ac, cpee ay
cpee.
pa yca , a ae ae
a c.
pa y pa, a ae ae
a c. Tp ae a.
(4) ee e, paep ee
pa, ec y.
pa COLOUR, SIZE
POSITION, a ae ae a c.
c ee.
pa y ya, a ae
ae a c.
3 pe y 1 2 ex p,
a p e ye pace a,
a y.
aepe yca.
B pee cpee, ay
cpee ac:
B eee cey a pae
c ap TITLE SAVE,
ycaa pa ye aepea.
B pee a:
c ap TITLE. p
aa START/STOP
aaa ac a pae eee
cey c ap TITLE
SAVE, ycaa pa ye
aepea.
Haee pa
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
VACATION
THE END
TITLE
[T I TLE] : END
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
VACATION
THE END
[T I TLE] : END
[T I TLE] : END
SIZE
SMALL
SIZE
[T I TLE] : END
TITLE
VACATION
[EXEC] : SAVE [T I TLE] : END
TITLE
LARGE
Editing / Ma
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
VACATION
THE END
RETURN
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
VACATION
THE END
RETURN
VACATION
VACATION
[EXEC] : SAVE [T I TLE] : END
If you set the write-protect tab to lock

You cannot superimpose or erase the title.
Slide the write-protect tab to release the write
protection.
To use a custom title
If you want to use the custom title, select
step 2.
in
If the tape has a blank portion

You cannot superimpose a title on that portion.
If the tape has a blank portion in the middle
of the recorded parts
The title may not be displayed correctly.
Ec a eec ycae
ee a ac
B e cee aee
cpae pa. epee eec
a ac e a.
ca cce pa
Ec y ca cce
p, epe
ye 2.
Ec a ee eec eaca
yac
B yace aee pa
e.
Ec a ee eec eaca
yac ey aca ac
Tp e paac epa.
145
Haee pa
The titles superimposed with your

camcorder
They are displayed only on the DV
format video equipment with the index titler
function.
The point you superimposed the title may be
detected as an index signal when searching a
recording with other video equipment.
Tp, aee c Bae

eaep
O paac a
eaapaype paa DV
c
ye ec ae p.
Mec ae pa e
apye ecy cay p
ce ac c py
eaapayp.
To not display titles

Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings
(p. 156).
Title setting
The title colour changes as follows:
WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED
y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE
The title size changes as follows:
SMALL y LARGE
You cannot input more than 12 characters in
LARGE size.
If you select the title size SMALL, you have
nine choices for the title position.
If you select the title size LARGE, you have
eight choices for the title position.
If the
FULL mark appears
The cassette memory is full. If you erase the
title, index data, date data, photo data, or
cassette label in the cassette, you can then
superimpose a title.
e pae p
cae ay TITLE DSPL
ee OFF ycaax e
(cp. 156).
caa pa
e pa eec cey
pa:
WHITE (E) y YELLOW (ET)
y VIOLET (OETOB) y RED
(PACH) y CYAN (OO) y
GREEN (EEH) y BLUE (CH)
Paep pa eec cey
pa:
SMALL (MAEH) y LARGE
(OO)
p paepe e ec
ee 12 c.
Ec pa SMALL (ae)
paep pa, pa
e apa c
pa.
Ec pa LARGE () paep
p, pa c
apa c pa.
Ec ec c
FULL
accea a epeea. Ec a
accee cepe p, ece ae,
pa ae, ae
accey appy, ce
cea aee pa.
146
Erasing a title
Cpae pa
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR CAMERA.
(2) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa TITLE ERASE, a ae ae
a c.
c a cpa pa.
pa pa, p B xe
cepe, a ae ae a c.
c ap ERASE OK ?.
(6) eec, e p,
p B xe cepe, epe
c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
a OK, a ae ae a c.
a OK ec a
a EXECUTE.
a ERASING ae pep
e cey, ce cpa pa
ec a COMPLETE.
POWER
VCR
MENU
CM SET
CM SEARCH
TAPE T I TLE
T I TLE DSPL
T I TLEERASE
I TEM ERASE
ERASE ALL
CM SET
CM SEARCH
TAPE T I TLE
I TLE DSPL
[MENU] T
: END
T I TLEERASE
I TEM ERASE
ERASE ALL
RETURN
T I TLE ERASE
1 HELLO !
CONGRATULAT I ONS !
[MENU]2 : END
3 HAPPY NEW YEAR !
4 PRESENT
5 GOOD MORN I NG
6 WEDD I NG
[MENU] : END
6,7
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
3-5
Editing / Ma
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or

CAMERA.
TITLEERASE, then press the dial.
The title erase display appears.
title you want to erase, then press the dial.
The ERASE OK ? indicator appears.
(6) Make sure the title is the one you want to
erase, and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial
to select OK, then press the dial.
OK changes to EXECUTE.
ERASING flashes for about two seconds
and COMPLETE appears after erasing
the title.
Haee pa
T I TLE ERASE
4 PRESENT
ERASE OK ?
RETURN
OK
T I TLE ERASE
4 PRESENT
[MENU] ERASE
: END OK ?
RETURN
EXECUTE
CM SET
CM SEARCH
TAPE T I TLE
I TLE DSPL
[MENU] T
: END
T I TLEERASE COMPLETE
I TEM ERASE
ERASE ALL
RETURN
[MENU] : END
147
148
Haee pa
To cancel erasing
e yae
Select RETURN in step 6 or 7, then press the

SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
Bepe RETURN ye 6 7, ae
To erase all the titles
yae cex p
See Erasing the cassette memory data on

page 153.
C. pae Cpae ax a
acce a cp. 153.
Making your own

titles
Cae Bax
ccex p
M ca e ee yx
p cxpa x acce
a. a p e
cepa 20 c.
You can make up to two titles and

store them in cassette memory. Each
title can have up to 20 characters.
(1) Hae y TITLE pee

a, cpee ay
cpee.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2
SET, a ae ae a c.
pa c y c, a
ae ae a c.
pa y ca, a ae
ae a c.
(6) pe y 4 5 ex p,
a B e epe ce c
c e ccae p.
(7) aepe ccae cx
ccex p epe c
SEL/PUSH EXEC pa a
[SET], a ae ae a c. Tp
ye cxpae a.
(8) Hae y TITLE cpa
a e p.
TITLE SET
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
TITLE
TITLE SET
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
RETURN
[T I TLE] : END
[T I TLE] : END
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
VACATION
THE END
Editing / Ma
(1) Press TITLE in the standby, playback, or

playback pause mode.
CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, then
press the dial.
column of the desired character, then press
the dial.
desired character, then press the dial.
(6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have selected
all characters and completed the title.
(7) To finish making your own titles, turn the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then
press the dial. The title is stored in memory.
(8) Press TITLE to erase the title menu display.
TITLE SET
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
RETURN
TITLE SET
[T I TLE] : END
[T I TLE] : END
4-6
TITLE SET
[T I TLE] : END
[T I TLE] : END
[T I TLE] : END
TITLE SET
[T I TLE] : END
TITLE SET
TITLE SET
S
[T I TLE] : END
149
Making your own titles

To change a title you have stored
In step 3, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2
SET, depending on which title you want to
change, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [C],
then press the dial to delete the title. The last
character is erased. Enter a new title as desired.
If you take five minutes or longer to enter
characters in standby mode while a cassette
is in your camcorder, the power
automatically goes off
The characters you have entered remain stored
in memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF
(CHG) once and then follow the procedure
from step 7 again.
We recommend setting the operation in
playback or playback pause mode or removing
the cassette so that your camcorder does not
automatically turn off while you are entering
title characters.
To erase a character
Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [ C ],
then press the dial. The last character is erased.
To enter a space
Select [
], then select the blank part.
Cae Bax ccex

p
ee cxpae
a pa
B ye 3 epe ycay CUSTOM1
SET CUSTOM2 SET, acc
pa, p B xe e, a
ae ae c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca [C], ae ae a
c yae pa. ce
c ye cep. Bee
y p.
Ec pee a
c aae ee
y, a accea axc
eaepe, ae aaec
aec
C, pe B e, cxpac
a eaep. cae
epeae POWER ee OFF
(CHG), a ae ca e peypy
ya 7.
Peeyec yca pe
cpee ay
cpee, e accey,
eaepa aaec e
aac pe a c
p.
cpa ca
epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca [ C ], a ae ae a
c. ce c ye cep.
a pea
], ae epe
Bepe [
ycy ac.
150
Mappa acce
If you use a tape with cassette memory,

you can label a cassette. The label can
consist of up to 10 characters and is
stored in cassette memory. When you insert
the labeled cassette and set the POWER switch
to VCR, CAMERA, or MEMORY, the label is
displayed for about five seconds.
(1) Insert the cassette you want to label.
CAMERA.
TAPE TITLE, then press the dial. The tape
title display appears.
column of the desired character, then press
the dial.
desired character, then press the dial.
(8) Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you finish the
label.
[SET], then press the dial.
The label is stored in memory.
p ca e c acce
a B ee
appy acce. Mappa
e cc 10 c
xpac a acce. p cae
appa acce ycae
epeae POWER ee VCR,
CAMERA MEMORY eee
cey ye paac
appa.
(1) Bcae accey, py B xe
appa.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR CAMERA.
(3) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa yca TAPE TITLE, a ae
ae a c. c
paee app e.
pa c y c, a
ae ae a c.
pa y ca, a ae
ae a c.
(8) pe y 6 7 ex p,
a e aepe appy.
pa a [SET], a ae ae
a c.
Mappa cxpaea a.
MENU
POWER
VCR
Editing / Ma
Labeling a cassette
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
6-8
4,5
CM SET
CM SEARCH
TAPE T I TLE
T I TLE DSPL
T I TLEERASE
I TEM ERASE
ERASE ALL
CM SET
CM SEARCH
TAPE T I TLE
T I TLE DSPL
I TLEERASE
[MENU] T
: END
I TEM ERASE
ERASE ALL
TAPE T I TLE
RETURN
TAPE T I TLE
TAPE T I TLE
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
TAPE T I TLE
TAPE T I TLE
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
151
Labeling a cassette
Mappa acce
To change the label you have made
ee e
app
Insert the cassette to change the label, and

operate in the same way as you do to make a
new label.
If you set the write-protect tab of the tape
to lock
You cannot label the tape. Slide the writeprotect tab to release the write protection.
If you have superimposed titles in the
cassette
When the label is displayed, up to four titles
also appear.
When the ----- indicator has fewer than 10
spaces
The cassette memory is full.
The ----- indicates the number of characters
you can select for the label.
To erase a character
Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [ C ],
then press the dial. The last character is erased.
To enter a space
Select [
], then select the blank part.
Bcae accey, appy p

ex e, e e e
ec, ca
app.
Ec a eec ycae
ee a ac
B e cee appy
e. epee eec a
ac e a.
Ec B aee p
a accee
a paaec appa, ae
paaec epex p.
Ec ap ----- cep eee
10 a
accea a epeea.
ap ----- aae ec
c, pe pa
app.
cpa ca
epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca [ C ], a ae ae a
c. ce c ye cep.
a pea
Bepe [
], ae epe
ycy ac.
152
Erasing the cassette

memory data
Cpae ax
a acce
You can erase data stored in cassette memory,

each items data can be erased separately.
You can also erase all items data once.
ae, xpaec acce a

cepe, p ae a
eea cpac e.
M ae cepe ae cex
ee pee.
Erasing each items data

separately
Item
Meaning
INDEX ALL
Erases all the index data.
TITLE ALL
Erases all the title data.
DATE ALL
Erases all the date data.
PHOTO ALL
Erases all the photo data.

OK, then press the dial. OK changes to
EXECUTE.
and COMPLETE appears after erasing
the selected items data.
Cpae ax a
eea e
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR CAMERA.
(2) Hae y MENU
pae ce e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa a ITEM ERASE, a ae
ae c.
pa eea, ae p
y cepe, a ae ae a
c.
ee
Haaee
INDEX ALL
Cpae ce ece ae.
TITLE ALL
Cpae ce ae p.
DATE ALL
Cpae ce ae a.
PHOTO ALL
Cpae ce ae .
Editing / Ma

CAMERA.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu display.
ITEM ERASE, then press the dial.
item that you want to erase its data, then
press the dial.

pa yca OK, a ae ae
a c. a OK ec a
a EXECUTE.
a ERASING ae pep
e cey, ce cpa ax
pa eea ec
a COMPLETE.
153
Erasing the cassette memory

data
Cpae ax a
acce
3-5
1
POWER
VCR
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
MENU
CM SET
CM SEARCH
TAPE T I TLE
T I TLE DSPL
T I TLEERASE
I TEM ERASE
ERASE ALL
CM SET
CM SEARCH
TAPE T I TLE
T I TLE DSPL
[MENU] T
: END
I TLEERASE
I TEM ERASE
ERASE ALL
RETURN
CM SET
I TEM ERASE
I NDEX ALL
T I TLE ALL
[MENU] : END
DATE ALL
PHOTO ALL
RETURN
[MENU] : END
6,7
154
CM SET
I TEM ERASE
I NDEX ALL RETURN
T I TLE ALL OK
DATE ALL
PHOTO ALL
RETURN
CM SET
I TEM ERASE
I NDEX ALL COMPLETE
T I TLE ALL
DATE ALL
PHOTO ALL
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
To cancel erasing
e yae

SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
Erasing the cassette memory

data
Erasing all the data in
cassette memory
To cancel erasing
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
Cpae cex ax
acce a
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR CAMERA.
(2) Hae y MENU
pae ce e.
, a ae ae
pa yca
a c.
pa ERASE ALL, a ae ae a
c.
pa yca OK, a ae ae
a c. OK eec a EXECUTE.
a ERASING ae pep
e cey, ce cpa cex
ax ec a
COMPLETE.
Editing / Ma

CAMERA.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu display.
ERASE ALL, then press the dial.
EXECUTE.
and COMPLETE appears after erasing all
the data.
Cpae ax a
acce
e yae
155
Customizing Your Camcorder
Changing the menu

settings
To change the mode settings in the menu
settings, select the menu items with the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be
partially changed. First, select the icon, then
the menu item and then the mode.
(1) In standby, or when the POWER switch is
set to VCR or MEMORY, press MENU.
desired icon, then press the dial to set it.
desired item, then press the dial to set it.
desired mode, then press the dial to set it.
(5) If you want to change other items, select
RETURN and press the dial, then repeat
steps 2 to 4.
For details, see Selecting the mode setting of
each item (p. 158).
156
Bee yax
yca a eaepe
eee yca e
ee yca pea
ycaax e epe y e c
ca SEL/PUSH EXEC.
ace yca y ac
ac. Caaa epe
pay, ae y e, a ae
pe.
(1) B pee a a
epeae POWER ycae
ee VCR MEMORY, ae
MENU.
pa y pa, a ae
ae a c e
yca.
pa y eea, a ae
ae a c e
yca.
pa y pea, a ae
ae a c e
yca.
(5) Ec ex e pye
ee, epe
RETURN
ae a c, ae pe
y 2 - 4.
pe cee pee paee
Bp yca pea a
eea (cp. 164).
Changing the menu settings
1
MENU
CAMERA
VCR
MANUAL SET
AUTO SHTR
PROG. SCAN
VCR SET
H i F i SOUND
AUD I O M I X
A/V DV OUT
NTSC PB
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
eee yca e
OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
REC LAMP
COLOUR BAR
[MENU] : END
OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
REC LAMP
COLOUR BAR
RETURN
MEMORY
MANUAL SET
AUTO SHTR
MANUAL SET
AUTO SHTR
PROG. SCAN
OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
0 HR
0 HR
[MENU] : END
OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER ON
OFF
DISPLAY
REC LAMP
COLOUR BAR
RETURN
OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER ON
OFF
DISPLAY
REC LAMP
COLOUR BAR
RETURN
OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER OFF
DISPLAY
REC LAMP
COLOUR BAR
RETURN
To make the menu display

disappear
, cp a
e
Press MENU.
Hae y MENU.
Menu items are displayed as the following

icons:
MANUAL SET
CAMERA SET
VCR SET
LCD/VF SET
MEMORY SET
CM SET
TAPE SET
SETUP MENU
OTHERS
y e paac e
peex e pa:
MANUAL SET
CAMERA SET
VCR SET
LCD/VF SET
MEMORY SET
CM SET
TAPE SET
SETUP MENU
OTHERS
Customizing Your Camcorder / Bee yax yca a eaepe
OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER ON
DISPLAY
REC LAMP
COLOUR BAR
[MENU] : END
RETURN
157

English
Selecting the mode setting of each item
z is the default setting.
Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch.

The LCD screen or viewfinder screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment.
Icon/item
AUTO SHTR
Mode
Meaning
POWER switch
z ON
To automatically adjust the electronic shutter*

speed.
CAMERA
OFF
PROG. SCAN
z OFF
ON
D ZOOM
16:9WIDE
z OFF
To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 12 zoom is

carried out.
48
To activate the digital zoom. More than 12 zoom is

performed digitally. This value goes up to 48 (p.
32).
z ON
OFF
CAMERA
Records still/moving pictures in progressive

recording mode.
To activate the digital zoom. More than 12 zoom is

performed digitally. This value goes up to 24 (p.
32).
ON
STEADYSHOT
Records still/moving pictures in the interlace

format.
24
z OFF
MEMORY
To fix the electronic shutter* speed.
To not record a 16:9 wide picture.
CAMERA
CAMERA
To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 54).

To compensate for camera-shake.
CAMERA
To cancel the SteadyShot function. Natural pictures MEMORY

are produced when shooting a stationary object
with a tripod.
* About the electronic shutter

The electronic shutter is the function used to adjust the shutter speed electrically.
Notes on the SteadyShot function
The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake.
Attachment of a conversion lens (optional) may influence the SteadyShot function.
If you cancel the SteadyShot function
appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive compensation for
The SteadyShot OFF indicator
camera-shake.
158

Icon/item
FRAME REC
Mode
Meaning
POWER switch
z OFF
Does not make a cut recording.
CAMERA
INT. REC
ON
Makes a cut recording (p. 89).
ON
Makes an interval recording (p. 85).
z OFF
SET
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
z STEREO
Sets the interval time and recording time.

To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track tape
with main and sub sound (p. 212).
To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or a

dual sound tape with main sound.
To play back a stereo tape with the right sound or a

dual sound track tape with sub sound.
To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and
stereo 2 (p. 141).
NTSC PB
To output analog images in digital format using

your camcorder.
ON
To output digital images in analog format using

your camcorder.
NTSC 4.43
LCD B. L.
LCD COLOUR
VCR
ST2
z OFF
z ON PAL TV
VCR
VCR
To play back a tape recorded on your camcorder on VCR

a PAL system TV.
To play back a tape recorded in the NTSC colour
system on a TV with the NTSC 4.43 mode.
To set the brightness on the LCD screen to normal.
VCR
BRIGHT
To brighten the LCD screen.
CAMERA
MEMORY
To adjust the colour on the LCD screen with the

SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY
z BRT NORMAL
To get highintensity
To get lowintensity
VF B.L.
z BRT NORMAL
GUIDEFRAME
z OFF
BRIGHT
ON
To set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to

normal.
VCR
CAMERA
To brighten the viewfinder screen.
MEMORY
Does not display the guide frame.
CAMERA
Displays the guide frame (p. 53).
MEMORY
Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L.

When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced a little during recording.
When you use power sources other than the battery pack, BRIGHT is automatically selected.
ST1
A/VtDV OUT
CAMERA
Does not make an interval recording.
(continued on the following page)
159

Icon/item
CONTINUOUS
QUALITY
PRINT MARK
Mode
Meaning
POWER switch
z OFF
Not to record continuously.
MEMORY
ON
To record four images continuously (p. 178).
MULTI SCRN
To record nine images continuously (p. 178).
z SUPER FINE
FINE
To record still images in the fine image quality

mode, using a Memory Stick (p. 174).
STANDARD
To record still images in the standard image quality

mode, using a Memory Stick (p. 174).
z OFF
ON
PROTECT
z OFF
ON
SLIDE SHOW
z RETURN
OK
PHOTO SAVE
VCR
MEMORY
To erase print marks on still images.
VCR
To write a print mark on the recorded still images

you want to print out later.
MEMORY
To release protection from still images.
VCR
To protect selected still images against accidental

erasure (p. 202).
MEMORY
To play back all the images as a slide show (p. 200). MEMORY
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
To record still images in the super fine image

quality mode, using a Memory Stick (p. 174).
To delete all unprotected images (p. 206).
MEMORY
To cancel formatting.
MEMORY
To format an inserted Memory Stick.

1. Select FORMAT with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial,
then press the dial. 2. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC
dial to select OK, then press the dial. 3. After
EXECUTE appears, press the SEL/PUSH EXEC
dial. FORMATTING appears during formatting.
COMPLETE appears when formatting is finished.
To duplicate images on a tape onto a Memory
Stick (p. 191).
VCR
Formatting erases all information on the Memory Stick

Check the contents of the Memory Stick before formatting:
Formatting erases the protected image data on the Memory Stick.
Notes on formatting
Supplied or optional Memory Sticks have been formatted at the factory. Formatting with this
camcorder is not required.
While the display shows FORMATTING, do not turn the POWER switch, press any button, or
eject a Memory Stick.
You cannot format a Memory Stick if the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to
LOCK.
Format again if the message appears.
If formatting fails
The FORMAT ERROR message appears.
160

Icon/item
CM SEARCH
Meaning
z ON
To search using cassette memory (p. 95, 97, 99, 101). VCR
OFF
TAPE TITLE
TITLE DSPL
POWER switch
Mode
z ON
OFF
To search without using cassette memory.

To label a cassette (p. 151).
VCR
CAMERA
To display the title you have superimposed.
VCR
Not to display the title.
TITLEERASE
To erase the title you have superimposed (p. 147).
VCR
CAMERA
ITEM ERASE
To erase each items data in cassette memory

(p. 153).
VCR
CAMERA
ERASE ALL
To erase all the data in cassette memory (p. 155).
VCR
CAMERA
REC MODE
z SP
To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode.
VCR
CAMERA
LP
z 12BIT
16BIT
To record in 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds).
VCR
To record in 16-bit mode (one stereo sound with

high quality).
CAMERA
Notes on the LP mode

When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing back the
tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or VCRs, noise may
occur in pictures or sound.
When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/Master mini DV
cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder.
You cannot make audio dubbing on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for the
tape to be audio-dubbed.
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in the LP
mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly
between scenes.
Notes on AUDIO MODE
You cannot dub an audio sound on a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode.
When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance in AUDIO
MIX.
AUDIO MODE
To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the SP

mode.
161

POWER switch
Mode
Meaning
qREMAIN
z AUTO
VCR
To display the remaining tape indication:
CAMERA
for about eight seconds after your camcorder is
turned on and calculates the remaining amount
of tape
for about eight seconds after a cassette is inserted
and your camcorder calculates the remaining
amount of tape
for about eight seconds after N is pressed in
VCR mode
for about eight seconds after DISPLAY is pressed
to display the screen indicators
for the period of tape rewinding, forwarding or
picture search in the VCR mode
To always display the remaining tape indicator.
DATA CODE
z DATE/CAM
MIC LEVEL
z AUTO
Icon/item
ON
DATE
MANUAL
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
z NORMAL
2
DEMO MODE
WORLD TIME
To display date, time and various settings during

playback.
VCR
To display date and time during playback.

Adjusts audio recording level automatically.
VCR
Adjusts audio recording level manually (p. 75).
CAMERA
To set the date or time (p. 20).
CAMERA
MEMORY
To display selected menu items in normal size.
VCR
To display selected menu items at twice the normal CAMERA

MEMORY
size.
z ON
To make the demonstration appear.
OFF
To cancel the demonstration mode.

To set the clock to the local time. Turn the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial to set a time difference. The clock
changes by the time difference you set here. If you
set the time difference to 0, the clock returns to the
originally set time.
CAMERA
CAMERA
MEMORY
Notes on DEMO MODE

You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette is inserted in your camcorder.
DEMO MODE is set to STBY (Standby) at the factory and the demonstration starts about 10
minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a cassette inserted.
To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette, set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA, or
set DEMO MODE to OFF.
162

Icon/item
BEEP
COMMANDER
Mode
Meaning
POWER switch
z MELODY
To chime a melody in normal operations, and beep

a warning sound for five seconds.
VCR
CAMERA
NORMAL
To beep in the following situations:

When you turn on the power, the recording starts/
stops, or a warning message appears.
MEMORY
OFF
To cancel the melody, beep, and shutter click sound.
z ON
OFF
DISPLAY
z LCD
V-OUT/LCD
z ON
COLOUR BAR
z OFF
OFF
ON
VCR
CAMERA
To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid

remote control misoperation caused by an other
VCRs remote control.
MEMORY
To show the display on the LCD screen and

viewfinder screen.
VCR
CAMERA
To show the display on a TV screen, LCD screen

and viewfinder screen.
MEMORY
To light up the camera recording lamps at the front

and rear of your camcorder.
CAMERA
MEMORY
To turn the camera recording lamps off.

Does not display the colour bar.
CAMERA
Displays the colour bar.
VIDEO EDIT
To make programs and perform video editing

(p. 123).
VCR
EDIT SET
To adjust and set the synchronization of your

camcorder and a VCR for dubbing in video
program editing mode (p. 112).
VCR
Note
If you press DISPLAY with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings, the picture from a
TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when your camcorder is connected to outputs
on the TV or VCR (except using an i.LINK cable).
When recording a close subject
When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamps on the front and rear of the
camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend you set REC LAMP
to OFF.
After more than five minutes after removing the power source
The PROG. SCAN, HiFi SOUND, AUDIO MIX, MIC LEVEL, and COMMANDER
items are returned to their default settings.
The other menu items are held in memory even when the power source is removed.
REC LAMP
To activate the Remote Commander supplied with

your camcorder.
163
eee yca e
Pycc
Bp yca pea a eea
z ec yca
ya.
y e ac acc e epeae POWER.
Ha pae cae paac e ee, c p
a e paa.
a/ee
AUTO SHTR
Pe
Haaee
epeae
POWER
z ON
aaec cp cpc ep
apa.*
CAMERA
MEMORY
OFF
PROG. SCAN
z OFF
ON
D ZOOM
16:9WIDE
z OFF
yca cpc ep apa*

ac ex/x pae
epeccp pae.
ac ex/yxc pae pee
ppecc ce.
ac ex/yxc pae pee CAMERA
ppecc ce.
24
aa p pacapa. eee
ce 12 ec p e.
aee e yee 24 (cp. 32).
48
aa p pacapa. eee
ce 12 ec p e.
aee e yee 48 (cp. 32).
z OFF
ON
STEADYSHOT z ON
OFF
CAMERA
e ac ppa pae 16:9.
CAMERA
ac ppa pae 16:9 (cp. 54).

eca paa eaep.
e y yc ce. p cee
e ea c aa yac
e ececee pae.
CAMERA
MEMORY
* ep ap
ep ap - y, cyea ep peyp cpc apa.
pea y yc ce
y SteadyShot e cc ecpa peepe paae
eaep.
Ha y SteadyShot e pceee py ea
(ppeac e).
Ec e y SteadyShot
c ap SteadyShot OFF
. Baa eaepa e ye ecpa
paae.
164
eee yca e
a/ee
FRAME REC
Haaee
z OFF
He ec ac c a apa. CAMERA
INT. REC
ON
Bec ac c a apa
(cp. 89).
ON
Bec ac c epaa (cp. 85).

caaae pe epaa pe ac.
SET
cpee cepeec e VCR

e e c p ya c
c cae y (cp. 212).
z STEREO
cpee cepeec e
c y e aaa e e
ya c c y.
cpee cepeec e
c y pa aaa e e
ya c cae y.
peyp aaca ey
cepeec aa 1
cepeec aa 2 (cp. 141).
ST1
A/VtDV OUT
LCD B. L.
LCD COLOUR
cpee e, aca a
VCR
eaepe, a eepe cce PAL.
z ON PAL TV
NTSC 4.43
cpee e, aca a
eaepe, ccee e
eee NTSC, a eepe c pe
NTSC 4.43.
z BRT NORMAL
yca pa pc a pae .
BRIGHT
ee p paa .
peyp ea a pae c
ca SEL/PUSH EXEC.
Meee
ec
VF B.L.
z BRT NORMAL
BRIGHT
GUIDEFRAME z OFF
ON
VCR
a c eaep px
pae aa pae.
ON
NTSC PB
ST2
a c eaep aax
pae p pae.
z OFF
VCR
ee
ec
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY
yca pa pc
caee.
VCR
CAMERA
ee p pae caee. MEMORY
Oee pae p pa.
Opaee p pa (cp. 53).
CAMERA
MEMORY
pea pey LCD B.L. VF B.L.

p pe yca BRIGHT cp cy aape a pe ac
e cpaaec.
p ca c a, x aape a, aaec
ye paa ycaa BRIGHT.
(pee a ceye cpae)
AUDIO MIX
CAMERA
He ec ac c epaa.
z OFF
HiFi SOUND
epeae
POWER
Pe
165
eee yca e
a/ee
Pe
CONTINUOUS z OFF
QUALITY
PRINT MARK
epep ac epex pae

(cp. 178).
MULTI SCRN
epep ac e pae
(cp. 178).
z SUPER FINE
ac ex pae
pee ca c aeca c
y Memory Stick (cp. 174).
FINE
ac ex pae
pee ca c aeca c Memory
Stick (cp. 174).
STANDARD
ac ex pae
pee caap aeca c
y Memory Stick (cp. 174).
z OFF
z OFF
ON
epeae
POWER
, e epepy ac. MEMORY
ON
ON
PROTECT
Haaee
yae ea e a ex
paex.
VCR
MEMORY
VCR
MEMORY
ac ea e a acax
ex paex, pe
ex paceaa e.
c a c ex
pae.
VCR
MEMORY
a pax ex
pae cya yae (cp. 202).
SLIDE SHOW
cpee cex pae

epepy y (cp. 200).
DELETE ALL
yae cex eaex pae MEMORY

(cp. 206).
FORMAT
z RETURN
OK
PHOTO SAVE
e papa.
MEMORY
MEMORY
papa cae Memory Stick.

1. Bepe FORMAT c ca SEL/PUSH
EXEC, ae ae a c. 2. epe c
SEL/PUSH EXEC pa yca OK, a ae
ae a c. 3. ce e a
EXECUTE ae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC. B
pe papa c a
FORMATTING. ce aepe papa
c a COMPLETE.
pa pae, exc a
accee, a Memory Stick (cp. 191).
VCR
B pe papa yaec c pa a Memory Stick

epe papae pepe cepe Memory Stick:
B pe papa yac ce ae aex pae a Memory Stick.
pea papa
Bxa e e caea Memory Stick
papaa a ae. papae a eaepe e peyec.
p pae a FORMATTING e ae epeae POWER, e
aae e eae Memory Stick.
He papa Memory Stick, ec eec a ac a Memory
Stick ycae ee LOCK.
Ec c cee e papae ee pa.
166
p ce pe papa
c cee FORMAT ERROR.
eee yca e
a/ee
CM SEARCH
Pe
Haaee
epeae
POWER
z ON
ca c acce a
(cp. 95, 97, 99, 101).
VCR
OFF
TAPE TITLE
TITLE DSPL
z ON
OFF
ca e acce a.
app acce (cp. 151).
VCR
CAMERA
pae ae pa.
VCR
, e paa p.
yae ae pa (cp. 147).
VCR
CAMERA
ITEM ERASE
yae ax a eea
acce a (cp. 153).
VCR
CAMERA
ERASE ALL
REC MODE
z SP
yae cex ax acce a VCR

(cp. 155).
CAMERA
ac pee SP (caape
VCR
cpeee).
CAMERA
yee pee ac 1,5 paa
cpae c pe SP.
LP
AUDIO MODE
z 12BIT
16BIT
ac 12- pee (a
cepeecx ya).
VCR
CAMERA
ac 16- pee (
cepeec caece y).
pea pey LP
Ec ea a acaa a eaepe pee LP, ee peeyec
cp a e eaepe. p cpee e a pyx
eaepax eaax, paee y y c exa.
p e ac pee LP peeyec ca acce Sony
Excellence/Master DV, y acay ay Bae
eaep.
B e ee ayepeac a ee, aca pee LP.
e, a p ye c ayepeac, ex ca pe
SP.
Ec ac a ee ec peax SP LP epe
acac pee LP, cpe paee e cae
pee epa aca ey a.
pea pey AUDIO MODE
He ayepeac a ee, aca 16- pee.
p cpee e 16- pee B e ee peypa aac
ycae AUDIO MIX.
(pee a ceye cpae)
TITLEERASE
167
eee yca e
a/ee
qREMAIN
Haaee
z AUTO
pae a caec e: VCR

CAMERA
pe ee c cey
ce e eaep pacea
caec eca a ee
pe ee c cey
ce , a ye caea accea
eaepa paccae caeec ec a
ee
pe ee c cey
ce aa N pee VCR
pe ee c cey
ce aa DISPLAY
pae pax ap
pe ycpe epe e aa,
epe ca pae pee
VCR
c pae apa
caec e.
ON
DATA CODE
epeae
POWER
Pe
z DATE/CAM
DATE
pae a, pee pax

yca pe cpee.
VCR
pae a pee pe
cpee.
MIC LEVEL
z AUTO
CLOCK SET
yca a pee (cp. 20).
CAMERA
MEMORY
LTR SIZE
z NORMAL
pae pax y e c
paep.
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY
MANUAL
2
DEMO MODE
z ON
OFF
WORLD TIME
Aaeca acpa yp
ayac.
VCR
CAMERA
Pya acpa yp ayac (cp. 75).
pae pax y e
paep e e .
, ac ecpa.
CAMERA
e pea ecpa.
CAMERA
yca ac a ece pe.
epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC yca MEMORY
pa pee. aee pee
ec acc ycae
pa. Ec B ycae pay
pee a 0, ac epyc epaa
ycaey pee.
pea pey DEMO MODE

B e ee pa ay DEMO MODE, ec eaepy caea accea.
aa DEMO MODE ycaea ee STBY (ae) a pepee, pe ecpa aec pep epe 10 y ce
yca epeae POWER ee CAMERA p cyc aepe
acce.
e ecpa cae accey, ycae epeae POWER
pye ee (e CAMERA) ycae ay DEMO MODE ee OFF.
168
eee yca e
a/ee
BEEP
Pe
Haaee
epeae
POWER
z MELODY
e e p pae
peypeae yep caa
eee cey.
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY
NORMAL
e yep caa
ceyx cyax:
p e a, ayce/cae
ac e peypeae
ce.
OFF
e e yep
ca, a ae e ya apa.
COMMANDER z ON
OFF
z LCD
V-OUT/LCD
REC LAMP
z ON
OFF
COLOUR BAR z OFF

ON
e ypae ya
ca ypae eae
epa pa eaep, a
pa ya ypae py
eaa.
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY
pae a a pae VCR

caee.
CAMERA
MEMORY
pae a a pae
eepa, pae caee.
e a ac a epee CAMERA
MEMORY
ae ae eaep.
e ae ac.
Oee pae e c.
CAMERA
Opaee e c.
VCR
VIDEO EDIT
ccae ppa e
eaa (cp. 123).
EDIT SET
VCR
acp yca cxpa
eaep eaa
epeac pee p eaa
ppa (cp. 112).
peae
p aa DISPLAY, a aa DISPLAY ycaea ee V-OUT/
LCD ycaax e, paee c eepa eaa e c a
pae , ae ec eaepa ceea xa eepa
eaa (ec e cyec ae i.LINK).
p ac pace ea
Ec aa REC LAMP ycaea ee ON, pace a ac a
epee ae aex eaep y paac a ee, ec
pace aepe. B y cyae peeyec yca ay REC
LAMP ee OFF.
Cyc ee y ce e ca a
ee PROG. SCAN, HiFi SOUND, AUDIO MIX, MIC LEVEL COMMANDER
epyc ac ycaa.
pye yca e cxpac a ae ce e a.
DISPLAY
e ya ca
ypae, cae c eaep.
169
Memory Stick Operations
Oepa c Memory Stick
Using a Memory
Stick introduction
cae Memory
Stick eee
The Memory Stick is a new light and small

recording media which, despite its size, can
store more data than a floppy disk.
You can use following types of Memory
Stick on your camcorder. However,
appearance on the list does not guarantee the
operation of all types of Memory Stick on
your camcorder.
Memory Stick- e
paepy ce ac, a p,
ecp a e paep, e xpac
e ax, pa , e a
ce.
Ha eaepe ca
ceye ap Memory Stick.
Oa e apa, ce epecee
cce Memory Stick yy paa
a a eaepe.
Types of Memory Stick
Recording / Playback
Memory Stick
Memory Stick
Memory Stick Duo*
Memory Stick
MagicGate Memory Stick
a**
Memory Stick Duo*
MagicGate Memory Stick Duo*
a**
MagicGate Memory Stick
a**
Memory Stick PRO
MagicGate Memory Stick Duo*
a**
Memory Stick PRO Duo*
Memory Stick PRO
Memory Stick PRO Duo*
* Attach the Memory Stick Duo adaptor before

inserting it into the camcorder.
** MagicGate is a copyright protection
technology that records and transfers the
contents in an encrypted format. Note that data
that uses MagicGate technology cannot be
recorded or played on your camcorder.
On file format (JPEG)

Your camcorder compresses image data in
JPEG format (extension .jpg).
Typical image data file name
100-0001: As displayed on the LCD screen or in
the viewfinder of the camcorder.
Dsc00001.jpg: As displayed on your PC screen.
Before using a Memory Stick
* cee aaep ap Memory Stick

Duo, pee e ca ee eaepy.
** MagicGate - ex a apcx
pa, pa acae pepaye
cepae apa pa.
e, a eaepe e
aca cpec ae,
cepae ca a ex
MagicGate.
O pae a (JPEG)
a eaepa cae ae
pae pa JPEG
(c pacpee .jpg).
Oe aa ax pae
100-0001: a paaec a pae
caee eaep.
Dsc00001.jpg: a paaec a pae
.
epe cae Memory Stick

Terminal/a paea
Write-protect tab/
eec a
ac
Rear/Ca
170
The position or the shape of the write-protect

tab may differ depending on the Memory
Stick you use.
You cannot record or erase still images when
the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick
is set to LOCK.
Labeling position/
app
Front/Cepe
ee pa eeca a
ac e ac acc
cye Memory Stick.
Hee pae e
aca cpa, ec eec
a ac a Memory Stick
ycae ee LOCK.
cae Memory Stick

eee
We recommend backing up important data.

Image data may be damaged in the following
cases:
If you remove the Memory Stick, turn the
power off, or detach the battery for
replacement when the access lamp is
flashing.
If you use a Memory Stick near static
electricity or magnetic fields.
Prevent metallic objects or your finger from
coming into contact with the metal parts of
the connecting section.
Stick its label on the labeling position.
Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to a
Memory Stick.
Do not disassemble or modify a Memory Stick.
Do not let the Memory Stick get wet.
Do not use or keep a Memory Stick in
locations that are:
Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the
sun or under the scorching sun.
Under direct sunlight.
Very humid or subject to corrosive gases.
When you carry or store a Memory Stick,
put it in its case.
ax ax peeyec
caa peepy .
ae pae y
pee ceyx cyax:
Ec B eaee Memory Stick,
aee ae ceee
aape ae, a
ae aa pae.
Ec Memory Stick cyec p
c ca caec
epeca ax e.
He pacaec eaec
peea aa eaec
ac ceex ce.
ey ceye ppe
app.
He cae, e pe c e
pce Memory Stick.
He papae e pye
Memory Stick.
He ycae aa a a
Memory Stick.
He cye e xpae Memory Stick:
B c apx ecax, apep,
ae, papa
ce ece, a
ce.
Ha ce.
B e ax ecax ecax,
epex ec
apeccx a.
p epece xpae Memory
Stick ex yp.
A Memory Stick formatted by a

computer
A Memory Stick formatted by the Windows
OS or Macintosh computers does not have a
guaranteed compatibility with this camcorder.
Note on using the Memory Stick Duo
You can use a Memory Stick Duo in your
camcorder after inserting it into the Memory
Stick Duo adaptor.
You may damage the Memory Stick Duo or
the Memory Stick slot on your camcorder in
the following situations.
When you insert a Memory Stick Duo that
is not inserted into a Memory Stick Duo
adaptor into the Memory Stick slot on your
camcorder.
When you insert the Memory Stick Duo in
the wrong direction.
If you insert a Memory Stick Duo without a
Memory Stick Duo adaptor by mistake, hold
the camcorder so the Memory Stick slot is
facing down, then hold the lid aside using a
toothpick or similar object to let the Memory
Stick Duo slide out.
Memory Stick, papaa

a epe
Memory Stick, papae c
ep c epa
cce Windows Macintosh, e
aa apapa
cecc c eaep.
Memory
Stick Duo
eaep ca
apy Memory Stick Duo, peape
ca ee aaep Memory Stick Duo.
apa Memory Stick Duo e
Memory Stick a eaepe y
pee, ec:
ca apy Memory Stick Duo e
aaepa Memory Stick Duo e
Memory Stick a eaepe;
ca apy Memory Stick Duo
epa cp.
Ec e apa Memory Stick Duo
a caea e aaepa Memory Stick
Duo, e eaepy epe ee
a, e Memory Stick
apae . ae c
yc py peea
e py. e e
apy Memory Stick Duo ea.
Memory Stick Operations / Oepa c Memory Stick
Using a Memory Stick

introduction
171

introduction
cae Memory Stick

eee
Notes on image data compatibility
pea cecc
ax pae
Image data files recorded on a Memory

Stick by your camcorder conform to the
Design Rules for Camera File Systems
universal standard (DCF98 standard)
established by the JEIDA (Japan Electronic
Industry Development Association). You
cannot play back on your camcorder still
images recorded on other equipment (DCRTRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E or DSC-D700/
D770) that does not conform to this universal
standard. (These models are not sold in some
areas.)
If you cannot use a Memory Stick that is
used with other equipment, format it with this
camcorder (p. 160). However, formatting
erases all information on the Memory Stick.
Memory Stick,
and MagicGate
Memory Stick are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
Memory Stick Duo and
are trademarks of Sony

Corporation.
Memory Stick PRO and
are trademarks of Sony

Corporation.
MagicGate and
are
trademarks of Sony Corporation.
All other product names mentioned herein
may be the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
Furthermore, and are not mentioned
in each case in this manual.
172
a ax pae, acae
eaep a Memory Stick,
cecy yepcay caapy
(DCF98), cac paa
pepa ax cce
eaep, ycaey
accae JEIDA (c
accae pa ep
pec). Ha eaepe
e cp ee
pae, acae a py
aapaype (DCR-TRV890E/TRV900/
TRV900E DSC-D700/D770), pa e
cecye y yepcay
caapy. ( e e pac
epx acx.)
Ec B e cee ca
Memory Stick, pe cyc a
py aapaype, papye x c
eaep (cp. 166).
Oa papae ya c
pa a Memory Stick.
Memory Stick,
MagicGate Memory
Stick c p apa Sony
Corporation.
Memory Stick Duo
c p apa Sony
Corporation.
Memory Stick PRO
c p apa Sony
Corporation.
MagicGate
c
p apa Sony Corporation.
Bce pye aea py,
yye yee, y
p apa
apecppa p
apa cecyx a.
C a cyae e
yac a pyce.

introduction
Inserting a Memory Stick
Insert the Memory Stick with the Sony logo
pointing toward the LCD panel and the b
mark pointing inward.
cae Memory Stick

eee
caa Memory Stick
Bcae Memory Stick c e Sony,
yaae apae ae ,
aee b, apae yp.
Access lamp/
aa pae
ee Memory Stick
Push the Memory Stick inward, then release

your finger. The Memory Stick comes out a
little.
Hae a Memory Stick, ae

yce. Memory Stick e
cea.
Note
The Memory Stick may pop out depending
on the way you push it.
When the access lamp is lit or flashing
Never shake or strike your camcorder. Do not
turn the power off , eject a Memory Stick or
remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image
data breakdown may occur.
peae
Memory Stick e pe c
cea, acc aa a ee.
To eject a Memory Stick
Ec aa pae p
ae
Ha e pce eaepy e
cye e. He ae ae, e
eae Memory Stick cea e
yae aape . B p
cyae ae pae y
pee.
173

introduction
cae Memory Stick

eee
If the MEMORY STICK ERROR indicator

appears
The Memory Stick is broken, the file format
is not proper, or the Memory Stick that you
are using is not compatible with your
camcorder. Eject the Memory Stick, check it,
and insert it again (p. 170).
Ec c ap MEMORY
STICK ERROR
Memory Stick peea, a ee
ececy pa,
cyea Memory Stick ececa
c eaep. ee Memory Stick,
pepe ee ca ycae (cp.170).
Selecting the image quality

mode
You can select the image quality mode in still
picture recording. The default setting is SUPER
FINE.
MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK
switch is set to the right (unlock) position.
QUALITY, then press the dial.
desired image quality, then press the dial.
VCR
POWER
Bp pea aeca
pae
B pe ac e
pae pa pe
aeca pae. ya
cyec SUPER FINE.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR MEMORY.
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae pae ee
(papa).
(2) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa yca QUALITY, a ae
ae a c.
pa eae aeca
pae, a ae ae a c.
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
[MENU] : END
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
SUPER F I NE
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
5
2
MENU
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
SUPER F I NE
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK F I NE
STANDARD
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
174

introduction
cae Memory Stick

eee
Image quality settings
ca aeca pae
Setting
(Display)
Meaning
caa
(ce)
SUPER FINE This is the highest image quality in this

camcorder. The number of still images
(SFN)
you can record is fewer than FINE. The
image is compressed to about 1/3.
FINE
(FINE)
Use this mode when you want to

record high quality images. The image
is compressed to about 1/6.
STANDARD This is the standard image quality. The

image is compressed to about 1/10.
(STD)
Differences in image quality mode

Recorded images are compressed in JPEG
format before being stored in memory. The
memory capacity allotted to each image varies
depending on the image quality mode
selected. Details are shown in the table below.
Image quality mode
Memory capacity
SUPER FINE
Approx. 190 KB
FINE
Approx. 100 KB
STANDARD
Approx. 60 KB
Note on the image quality mode indicator

This is only displayed during recording.
SUPER FINE ayee aec

pae eaepe.
(SFN)
ec ex
pae, pe
aca, ye ee, e p
ycae FINE. paee
caec pep 1/3.
FINE
(FINE)
cye pe, ec
ex aca
caecee pae.
paee caec pep
1/6.
STANDARD
(STD)
caape aec
pae. paee
caec pep 1/10.
peae
B epx cyax eee pea
aeca pae e e
pac a aece pae,
acc a pae, cey
px B pe.
Pa pee aeca
pae
epe cxpaee a acae
pae cac pae JPEG.
Oe a, ee a
pae, eec acc
pa pea aeca
pae. p aa
ae.
Pe aeca
pae
Oe a
SUPER FINE
p. 190
FINE
p. 100
STANDARD
p. 60
Note
In some cases, changing the image quality
mode may not affect the image quality,
depending on the types of images you are
shooting.
Haaee
ap pea aeca
pae
Opaaec pe ac.
175

introduction
cae Memory Stick

eee
The approximate number of

images you can record on a
Memory Stick
pee ec
pae, pe
aca a Memory Stick
The approximate number of images you can

record on a Memory Stick that is formatted
using this camcorder varies depending on
which image quality mode you select and the
complexity of the subject.
pee ec
pae, pe aca a
Memory Stick, papay c
a eaep, eec
acc pa pea
aeca pae cc
ea.
Image quality mode/Pe aeca pae

SUPER FINE
176
FINE
STANDARD
16 MB type/
16 M
80 images/
80 pae
160 images/
240 images/
160 pae 240 pae
32 MB type/
32 M
160 images/
325 images/
485 images/
160 pae 325 pae 485 pae
64 MB type/
64 M
325 images/
650 images/
980 images/
325 pae 650 pae 980 pae
128 MB type/
128 M
650 images/
1310 images/
1970 images/
650 pae 1310 pae 1970 pae
ac ex
pae a Memory Stick
ac pa a
You can record still images on a Memory

Stick.
Ha Memory Stick aca

ee pae.
Before operation
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
epe aa pa
Bcae Memory Stick eaepy.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right
(unlock) position.
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the
desired still picture appears. The green z
mark stops flashing, then lights up. The
brightness of the picture and focus are readjusted, being targeted for the middle of
the picture and are fixed. Recording does
not start yet.
(3) Press PHOTO deeply. The shutter clicks
and the image is frozen. The image
displayed on the screen will be recorded on
the Memory Stick. Recording is complete
when the bar scroll indicator disappears.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee MEMORY. eec,
epeae LOCK ycae
pae ee (papa).
(2) epe cea aa y PHOTO
ex p, a e c peyee
ee paee. eea
ea z pepa a ae
apc. pc pae
ycpa acpaac epy
pae cpyc. ac
ee e aaec.
ee ap, paee
acpyec. paee a pae
aec a Memory Stick. ac
ye aepea, a cee
ap e c.
VCR
POWER
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
SFN
1/6
[a]
Recording still images

on a Memory Stick
Memory Photo recording
SFN
PHOTO
[b]
[a] The number of images that can be recorded

on the Memory Stick
[b]The number of recorded images
PHOTO
[a] ec pae, pe
e aca a Memory Stick
[b] ec acax pae
177
Recording still images on a

Memory Stick Memory
Photo recording
ac ex
pae a Memory Stick
ac pa a
When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY

The following functions do not work: wide TV
mode, digital effect, picture effect, title, digital
zoom, fader, shutter speed (1/25 or smaller)
adjustment, and low lux mode and sports
lesson mode in PROGRAM AE. (The indicator
flashes in the low lux or sports lesson mode.)
Ec epeae POWER ycae

ee MEMORY
Ceye y e paa:
ppa ee pe,
p e, e pae,
p, pa paca, eep,
peypa cpc apa (1/25
e), pe ceec, a
ae pe cpx cca
PROGRAM AE. (ap ae p
cee pee ceec
cpx cca.)
Note
When you press the PHOTO button lightly at
step 2, the focus of the image seems to be
momentarily out.
While you are recording a still image
You can neither turn off the power nor press
PHOTO.
When you press PHOTO on the Remote
Commander
Your camcorder immediately records the
image that is on the screen when you press the
button.
Recording images
continuously
You can record still images continuously.
Select one of the two modes described below
before recording.
Continuous mode [a]
You can four record still images continuously.
The number of images is in accordance with
remaining capacity of the Memory Stick.
Multi screen mode [b]
You can record nine still images continuously
on a single page.
[a]
178
peae
Ec cea aa y PHOTO
ye 2, ae yee,
ycpa pae
papee epec.
p ac e pae
He ae
aa y PHOTO.
Ec aa y PHOTO a ye
ca ypae
Beaepa cpay e ae
paee, pe ye a pae
e aa .
Hepepa ac
pae
M epepy ac
ex pae. epe ac
epe yx pe,
cax e.
Hepep pe [a]
M epepy ac
epex ex pae.
ec pae ac
ea c a a Memory
Stick.
Mpa pe [b]
M aca 9 ex
pae epep a
cpae.
[b]

Memory Stick Memory
Photo recording
ac ex
pae a Memory Stick
ac pa a

(unlock) position.
CONTINUOUS, then press the dial.
desired setting, then press the dial.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee MEMORY. eec,
epeae LOCK ycae
pae ee (papa).
(2) Hae y MENU
pae e.
, a ae ae
pa yca
a c.
pa yca CONTINUOUS, ae
ae a c.
pa eae yca, a ae
ae a c.
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS OFF
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS OFF
ON
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK MULT I SCRN
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS ON
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
POWER
(CHG)
MENU
VCR
179

Memory Stick Memory
Photo recording
ac ex
pae a Memory Stick
ac pa a
Continuous shooting settings
ca epep ce
Setting
Meaning (indicator on the screen)
caa
OFF
Your camcorder shoots one image at a

time. (no indicator)
aee (ap a
pae)
OFF
ON
Your camcorder shoots up to four still

images at about 0.5 sec intervals.
(
)
Beaepa eae
c a pa. (e apa)
ON
Beaepa cae e ee
epex ex
pae c epaa
pep 0,5 ce. (
)
MULTI SCRN
Beaepa cae e
ex pae c
epaa pep 0,5 ce
paae x a
cpae, paee a
e py.
(
)
MULTI SCRN Your camcorder shoots nine still

images at about 0.5 sec intervals and
displays the images on a single page
divided into nine boxes.
(
)
If the capacity of the Memory

Stick becomes full
FULL appears on the screen, and you
cannot record still pictures on this Memory
Stick.
The number of images in continuous
shooting
The number of images you can shoot
continuously varies depending on the
remaining capacity of the Memory Stick. The
shutter always clicks four times, however, the
number of images recordable may be less than
four.
Note on using a video flash light (optional)
The video flash light does not work in the
continuous or multi screen mode if you install
it to the intelligent accessory shoe.
Ec Memory Stick epeec

Ha pae ec ap
FULL, ee pae
e e aca a y Memory
Stick.
ec pae p
epep cee
ec pae, pe
ca epep, eec
acc paepa pae
ec Memory Stick. ap cea
eae epe paa, a ec
acaex pae e
ee epex.
cae ec
(ppeac e)
Beca e paae epep
pa pee, ec a
ycaea epae
caex ycpc.
180

Memory Stick Memory
Photo recording
ac ex
pae a Memory Stick
ac pa a
Self-timer memory photo

recording
cea aepy
caayca c cxpaee
a
You can make a memory photo recording with

the self-timer. This mode is useful when you
want to record yourself. You can also use the
Remote Commander.
PHOTO
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee MEMORY. eec,
epeae LOCK ycae
pae ee (papa).
(2) B pee a ae y
caee c ap
(aep caayca).
Taep caayca ae pa
ce c 10 c yep ca. B
cee e cey pa
cea yep ca ye
ya ae, a ae aaec
aec ac.
PHOTO
1
MEMORY
Note
The self-timer recording mode is automatically
canceled when:
Self-timer recording is finished.
VCR.
OFF CAMERA
Press
indicator
You cannot cancel the self-timer recording
using the Remote Commander.
POWER
(CHG)
VCR

(unlock) position.
(2) Press
(3) Press PHOTO deeply.
The self-timer starts counting down from 10
with a beep sound. In the last two seconds
of the countdown, the beep sound gets
faster, then recording starts automatically.
M cey c
cxpaee a aepy
caayca. pe ee
cyae, ec B xe c ce.
ae ca y
ca ypae.
e ac aepy
caayca
Hae y
(aep caayca),
ap
ce c paa
cae. ac aepy caayca
e e c ya
ca ypae.
peae
Pe ac aepy caayca
ye aaec ee, ec:
Oea ac aepy caayca.
Bae POWER ycae
ee OFF (CHG) VCR.
181
Superimposing a still image in

a Memory Stick on a moving
picture MEMORY MIX
Haee e
pae Memory Stick a
e paee MEMORY MIX
You can superimpose a still image you have

recorded on a Memory Stick on the top of
the moving picture you are recording.
Hee paee, acae a

Memory Stick, a a
acaee e paee.
M. CHROM (Memory chromakey)

You can swap a blue area of a still image such
as an illustration or a frame with a moving
picture.
M. CHROM (a ae ec)
M ae c ac
e pae, apep,
pcy ap,
paee.
M. LUMI (Memory luminancekey)

You can swap a brighter area of a still image
such as a handwritten illustration or title with
a moving picture. Record a title on a Memory
Stick before a trip or event for convenience.
C. CHROM (Camera chromakey)
You can superimpose a moving picture on a
still image that used as background. Shoot the
subject against a blue background. The blue
area of the moving picture will be swapped
with a still image.
M. OVERLAP (Memory overlap)
You can make a moving picture fade in on top
of a still image.
M. LUMI (a ae pc)
M ae ee cey ac
e pae, apep,
pcy, cea py, p,
paee. epe
yeece a-y ce
ae p yca a Memory
Stick.
C. CHROM (a ec
eaep)
e paee a
a ee paee, pe
cyec aece a. Ce
e a ce e. C ac
pae ye aeea
a ee paee.
M. OVERLAP (aee c
a)
M cea a, e
paee cee c
epx e pae.
182

picture MEMORY MIX
Still image/
Hee
paee
Haee e pae
Memory Stick a e
paee MEMORY MIX
Moving picture/
e
paee
Moving picture + Still image/

e paee +
Hee paee
Still image/
Hee
paee
Moving picture/
e
paee

e paee +
Hee paee
Still image/
Hee
paee
Moving picture/
e
paee

e paee +
Hee paee
M. CHROM
Background: blue/
: c
M. LUMI
Background: blue/
: c
Still image/
Hee
paee
M.OVERLAP
Moving picture +
Still image/
e
paee +
Hee
paee
Moving picture/
e
paee
C. CHROM
183
184

picture MEMORY MIX
Haee e pae
Memory Stick a e
paee MEMORY MIX
Before operation
Insert a recorded Memory Stick and a tape
to be recorded into your camcorder.
epe aa pa
Bcae eaepy Memory Stick c
ac accey ac.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.

(2) Press MEMORY MIX in standby mode.
The last recorded or last composed image
appears on the lower part of the screen as a
thumbnail image.
(3) Press MEMORY+/ or +/ on the Remote
Commander to select the still image you
want to superimpose.
To see the previous image, press MEMORY
or on the Remote Commander. To see
the next image, press MEMORY+ or + on
the Remote Commander.
desired mode.
The mode changes as follows:
M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM
y M. OVERLAP
The still image is superimposed on the
moving picture, and your camcorder is in
standby mode.
the effect.
(7) Press START/STOP to start recording.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee CAMERA.
(2) Hae y MEMORY MIX
pee a.
ceee acae
cae paee c
e ac paa e
e pae.
(3) Hae y MEMORY+/ +/ a
ye ca ypae
pa e pae,
pe peyec a.
pcpe peyee
paee, ae y MEMORY
a ye ca
ypae. pcpe
ceyee paee, ae
y MEMORY + + a ye
ca ypae.
pa y pea.
Pe ye ec cey
pa:
M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM
y M. OVERLAP
Hee paee
aaaec a e, a
eaepa epex pe
a.
peyp ea.
(7) Hae y START/STOP
aaa ac.

picture MEMORY MIX
Haee e pae
Memory Stick a e
paee MEMORY MIX
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
M. CHROM
POWER
VCR
MEMORY
MEMORY MIX
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
POWER
VCR
100-0019
Still image/
Still image
M. LUMI
+
100-0019
M. LUMI I I I
100-0019
M. LUMI I
100-0019
Items to be adjusted
ee peyp
M. CHROM
The colour (blue) scheme of the area

in the still picture which is to be
swapped with a moving picture
M. CHROM
M. LUMI
The colour (bright) scheme of the

area in the still picture which is to be
swapped with a moving picture
ea aa (c) ac
e pae,
py y ae
paee
M. LUMI
C. CHROM
The colour (blue) scheme of the area

in the moving picture which is to be
swapped with a still picture
ea aa (cea) ac
e pae,
py y ae
paee
C. CHROM
ea aa (c) ac
pae, py
y ae e
paee
M. OVERLAP
No adjustment necessary
As the bar is shorter, the effect is enhanced.
M. OVERLAP Peypa e peyec
e pe ca, e cee e.
185

picture MEMORY MIX
Haee e pae
Memory Stick a e
paee MEMORY MIX
To change the still image to be

superimposed
e aaaee
ee paee
Do either of the following:

Press MEMORY+/ after step 6.
Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6,
and repeat the procedure from step 3 (except
M. OVERLAP).
Be ceyx ec.
Hae y MEMORY+/ ce ya
6.
Hae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC ce
ya 6 pe peypy c ya
3 (pe M. OVERLAP).
To change the mode setting

Press SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6, and
repeat the procedure from step 4 (except M.
OVERLAP).
ee yca pea
Hae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC ce
ya 6 pe peypy c ya 4
(pe M. OVERLAP).
To cancel MEMORY MIX

Press MEMORY MIX.
e pea MEMORY MIX

Hae y MEMORY MIX.
During recording
You cannot change the mode setting.
If a still image to be superimposed has lots
of white areas
The thumbnail image may not be displayed
clearly.
Image data modified with personal
computers or shot with other equipment
You may not be able to play them back with
your camcorder.
186
B pe ac
cay pea e e.
Ec e pae,
pe peyec a,
cyecye ace e ea
M-paee e paac e
cce e.
pae, eee c
epca epa ce
c py aapayp
My e cpc c
a eaep.
Recording an image
from a tape as a still
image
ac pae c
acce a e
pae
Your camcorder can read moving picture data

recorded on a tape and record it as a still
image on a Memory Stick. Your camcorder
can also take in moving picture data through
the input connector and record it as a still
image on a Memory Stick.
Beaepa e ca ae
yec pae, acae a
accee, aca x a ee
paee a Memory Stick.
Beaepa ae e pa
ae yec pae epe
x pae aca x a
ee paee a Memory
Stick.
Before operation
Insert a recorded tape and a Memory Stick
into your camcorder.
epe aa pa
Bcae acay accey Memory
Stick eaepy.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
(2) Hae y N. Haec
cpeee pae,
aca a accee.
(3) epe cea aa y PHOTO
ex p, a paee c acce
e ye acpa. Ha pae
caee c
a CAPTURE. ac ee e
aaec.
paee a pae ye aca
a Memory Stick. ac ye
aepea, a cee ap
e c.
1
PLAY
CAPTURE
PHOTO
MEMORY
FF
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
REW
POWER
VCR

(2) Press N. The picture recorded on the tape
is played back.
(3) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the
picture from the tape freezes. CAPTURE
viewfinder. Recording does not start yet.
(4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed
on the screen will be recorded on a
Memory Stick. Recording is complete
when the bar scroll indicator disappears.
4
PHOTO
187
Recording an image from a

tape as a still image
ac pae c acce
a e pae
When the access lamp is lit or is flashing

Never shake or strike the unit. Also, do not
turn the power off , eject a Memory Stick or
remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image
data breakdown may occur.
a p ae aa
pae
Ha e pce eaepy e
cye e. Tae e ae
ae, e ae Memory Stick
cea e cae aape . B
p cyae ae pae
y pee.
If appears on the LCD screen or in the

viewfinder
The inserted Memory Stick is incompatible
with your camcorder because its format does
not conform to that of your camcorder. Check
the format of the Memory Stick.
If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback
mode
The playback pauses momentarily.
Sound recorded on a tape
You cannot record the sound from a tape.
Titles that are already recorded on tapes
You cannot record the titles on a Memory
Stick.
When you press PHOTO on the Remote
Commander
Your camcorder immediately records the
image that is on the screen when you press the
button.
Ec a pae caee
c a
caea Memory Stick, pa e
ceca c eaep, cy ee
pa e cecye pay
eaep. pepe pa Memory
Stick.
Ec pee cpee cea
aa y PHOTO
B pe cpee cpay e
aec aya.
y, aca a accey
He aca y c acce.
Tp, paee acae a acce
p e aca a Memory
Stick.
Ec aa y PHOTO a ye
ca ypae
Beaepa cpay e ae
paee, pe ye a pae
e aa .
188
ac pae c acce
a e pae

Recording a still image from
other equipment
camcorder and set DISPLAY in
to LCD
in the menu settings.
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV
on to see the desired program.
The picture from the other equipment
viewfinder.
(3) Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 187.
When recording an image through

the VIDEO jack
ac e
pae c py
pya
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR a eaepe
ay DISPLAY
ee
LCD ycaax e.
(2) Hae cpeee aca
e e eep
pcpa eae ppa.
paee c py pya
c a pae
caee.
(3) Be y 3 4 a cp. 187.
p ac pae epe
e VIDEO

eae S (ppeac
e)
OUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
: Signal flow/
pxee
caa

Cee ae ay/e
(x e)

connecting cable supplied with your
camcorder to the video output jack on the VCR
or the TV.
connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S
video jacks of both your camcorder and the
VCR/TV.
This connection produces higher quality DV
format pictures.
e e eep
cee ae ay/e,
paae eaepe, xy
ey ecaa a eae
eepe.
Ceee c eae S
(ppeac e)
ye caecex
pae
p a cee e y
a e (e) eep
cee ae ay/e.
cee eae S
(ppeac e)
eea S a eaepe
eae/eepe.
ceee e y
caecee paee paa
DV.
S VIDEO
189

ac pae c acce
a e pae
When recording the image through

the DV Interface
p ac pae epe
epec DV
DV Interface/
epec DV
i.LINK

i.LINK cable (optional)/
ae i.LINK (ppeac e)
190
Copying still images

from a tape Photo
save
pae ex
pae c acce
Cxpaee a c
Using the search function, you can

automatically take in only still images from
tapes and record them on a Memory Stick in
sequence.
C y ca
aaec pa
ee pae, eec a
acceax, ceae aca
x a Memory Stick.
Before operation
Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder
and rewind the tape.
Insert a Memory Stick into your
camcorder.
epe aa pa
Bcae acay accey
eaepy epeae ee aa.
PHOTO SAVE
0 : 00 : 00 : 00
4 / 15
PHOTO
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
POWER
VCR
SAV I NG
0
[MENU] : END
PHOTO SAVE
0 : 30 : 00 : 00
8 / 15
MENU
END
4

PHOTO SAVE, then press the dial.
PHOTO BUTTON appears on the LCD
(5) Press PHOTO deeply. The still image from
the tape is recorded on the Memory Stick.
The number of still images copied is
displayed. END is displayed when
copying is completed.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee VCR.
(2) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa yca PHOTO SAVE, a
ae ae a c. Ha pae
caee c a
PHOTO BUTTON.
Hee paee a accee
aec a Memory Stick. ye
pae ec cpax
ex pae.
aepe pa ye
paea a END.
[MENU] : END
MEMORY SET
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
PHOTO SAVE
[MENU] : END
MEMORY SET
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
PHOTO SAVE READY
RETURN
PHOTO SAVE
[MENU] : END
[PHOTO] : START
0 : 00 : 00 : 00
4 / 15
PHOTO BUTTON
[MENU] : END
191
Copying still images from a

tape Photo save
pae ex
pae c acce
Cxpaee a c
To cancel copying
e pa
Press MENU.
Hae y MENU.
When the memory of the Memory

Stick is full
B cyae epee Memory

Stick
MEMORY FULL appears on the LCD screen

or in the viewfinder, and the copying stops.
Insert another Memory Stick and repeat the
procedure from step 2.
Ha pae caee
c a MEMORY FULL,
pae pepac. Bcae pyy
Memory Stick pe peypy c
ya 2.
When the access lamp is lit or flashing

Never shake or strike your camcorder. Also,
do not turn the power off, eject the Memory
Stick or remove the battery pack. Otherwise,
the image data breakdown may occur.
To record all the images recorded on the
tape
Rewind the tape all the way back and start
copying.
If the write-protect tab on the Memory
Stick is set to LOCK
NOT READY appears when you select the
item in the menu settings.
When you change the Memory Stick in
the middle of copying
Your camcorder resumes copying from the last
image recorded on the previous Memory
Stick.
Ec aa pae p
ae
Ha e pce eaepy e
cye e. Tae e ae
ae, e ae Memory Stick
cea e cae aape . B
p cyae ae pae
y pee.
ac cex pae,
acax a accee
epeae ey a aa
ae pae.
Ec eec a ac a
Memory Stick ycae ee
LOCK
p pe eea ycaax e
c a NOT READY.
Ec ae Memory Stick
pecce pa
Beaepa p pae c
cee pae, aca a
peye Memory Stick.
192
Viewing a still
picture Memory
Photo playback
pcp e
pae Bcpeee
c a
You can play back still images recorded on a

Memory Stick. You can also play back six
images at a time by selecting the index screen.
M cp ee
pae, acae a Memory
Stick. M ae cp
pee ec pae ye
pa ec paa.
Before operation
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee VCR MEMORY.
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae pae ee
(papa).
(2) Hae y MEMORY PLAY.
c ceee acae
paee.
(3) Hae y MEMORY +/
y +/ a ye ca
ypae pa peye
e pae.
pcpe peyee paee,
ae y MEMORY a
ye ca ypae.
pcpe ceyee
paee, ae y MEMORY
+ + a ye ca
ypae.
PLAY
VCR
epe aa pa
POWER
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)

(2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded
image is displayed.
(3) Press MEMORY +/ or +/ on the Remote
Commander to select the desired still
image. To see the previous image, press
MEMORY or on the Remote
Commander. To see the next image, press
MEMORY + or + on the Remote
Commander.
To stop memory photo playback

Press MEMORY PLAY again.
ca cpee
c a
Hae y MEMORY PLAY ee pa.
193
Viewing a still picture

Memory Photo playback
To play back recorded images on a TV
screen
Connect your camcorder to the TV with the
A/V connecting cable supplied with your
camcorder before operation.
When operating memory photo playback on
a TV or on the LCD screen, the image quality
may appear to have deteriorated. This is not
a malfunction. The image data is as good as
ever.
Turn the volume of the TV down before
operation, or noise (howling) may be output
from the TV speakers.
When no images are recorded on the
Memory Stick
The message NO FILE appears.
You may not be able to play them back with
your camcorder.
Note on the date/time indicator
Recording date/time is not displayed,
however, it is automatically recorded on the
Memory Stick. You can check the recording
date/time while in memory playback mode by
pressing DATA CODE.
Screen indicators during still

image playback
pcp e
pae Bcpeee
c a
cpee acax
pae a pae eepa
epe aa cpee
cee eaepy eepy
c cee ae
ay/e, p paaec
eaepe.
p cpee c
a a pae eepa
aec pae e
yxyc. Oa e ec
ecpac. ae pae
axc e cc, a
pee.
epe aa cpee
yee pc ya eepa,
ae ppex e
ce y (y).
Ec a Memory Stick cycy
acae pae
ec cee
NO FILE.
pae, eee c
epca epa ce
c py aapayp
My e cpc c
a eaep.
ap a/pee
aa/pe ac e paaec
pe ce, a aaec
acac a Memory Stick. ay/
pe ac pep pee
cpee a p aa
DATA CODE.
pae ap
pe cpee
ex pae
1000002
6 / 15
MEMORY PLAY
Image number/
Total number of recorded images/
Hep pae/
Oee ec acax pae
Print mark/
ea a
Protect/
aa
194
Data file name/

aa ax

Playing back six recorded

images at a time (index
screen)
You can play back six recorded images at a
time. This function is especially useful when
searching for a particular image.
(2) Press MEMORY INDEX to display the
index screen.
INDEX
Cee e aa ax
Ec ey aae pep
ep aa eec ec, ae
aa aae,
cecye caapy DCF98.
Ec ey aae pep
ep aa eec c
epa, ae aa
aae, e cecye
caapy DCF98.
pep e yaaec, ec
cpyypa aa a Memory Stick e
cecye caapy DCF98.
Ec cpyypa aa a Memory Stick
e cecye caapy DCF98,
e c cee
DIRECTORY ERROR. B cyae
p ac a Memory Stick
e, cp
pae c Memory Stick.
a aa ax ae, ,
, a pee, e
pa e cecye a
eaepe.
Opeee
cpeee ec
acax pae
(ec pa)
M cp ec acax
pae pee. a y
ec ce y p
e ca ex
pae.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR MEMORY.
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae pae ee
(papa).
(2) Hae y MEMORY INDEX
pae ec paa.
On data file name

When the hyphen is indicated between the
directory and the file number, this data file
name means that this file corresponds to the
DCF98 standard.
When the underbar is indicated between the
directory and the file number, this data file
name means that this file does not
correspond to the DCF98 standard.
The directory is not indicated if the file
structure in the Memory Stick does not
correspond to the DCF98 standard.
The - DIRECTORY ERROR message
may appear if the file structure in the
Memory Stick does not correspond to the
DCF98 standard. In this case, you cannot
record on that Memory Stick, however,
you can play back images in the Memory
Stick.
When the data file name is flashes, the file
may be broken or the file format does not
correspond to your camcorder.
pcp e
pae Bcpeee
c a
VCR
POWER
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
195
pcp e
pae Bcpeee
c a

A red B mark appears above the image that is
displayed before changing to the index screen
mode.
MEMORY : to display the previous six
images
MEMORY + : to display the following six
images
Ha paee c paca
ea B, pa paaec epe
epeee pe ec
paa.
MEMORY : pae ec
peyx pae
MEMORY + : pae ec
ceyx pae
10
11
12
[b]
100-0019
12 / 19
[a]
[a] File name

[b]B mark
[a] aa
[b] Mea B
To return to the normal playback

screen (single screen)
paa pay
cpee (
pa)
Press MEMORY +/ to move the B mark to

the image you want to display on full screen,
then press MEMORY PLAY.
Files modified with personal computers
These files may not be displayed on the index
screen. Image files shot with other equipment
may not be displayed on the index screen
either.
Note
When displaying the index screen, a number
appears above each image. This indicates the
order in which images are recorded on the
Memory Stick. These numbers are different
from the data file names.
196
Haae y MEMORY +/
epeee e B pae,
pe y pa a
pa, a ae ae y MEMORY
PLAY.
a, pae c
epca epa
a y e paac a
ec pae. a pae,
cx c py aapayp,
ae y e paac a
ec pae.
peae
p pae ec paa a
a paee ye c
ep. O yaae ceaec,
p pae aca a
Memory Stick. epa ac
e a ax.

Viewing the recorded images
using a personal computer
pcp acax
pae c
epca epa
ae pae, acae c
eaep, cac
pae JPEG. M pcapa
pae, acae a Memory
Stick, a pae epa.
epa cye ycpc e/
ac Memory Stick (ppeaec
e), aaep PC card
Memory Stick (ppeaec
e) aaep x c
Memory Stick (ppeaec
e). pe yaa
pae c. cpyx cyaa
epa ycpca e/ac
Memory Stick, aaepa PC card Memory
Stick aaepa x c
Memory Stick. pe cee
cepac cpy cyaa
caex paece.
He ee pep aa, p
cecye caapy DCF98.
ee a e ye ac.
p ca Memory Stick
ex pee ce ca
ee c eaep.
The image data recorded with your camcorder

is compressed in the JPEG format. You can see
images recorded on a Memory Stick on a
computer screen. Use the Memory Stick
Reader/Writer (optional) or PC card adaptor
for Memory Stick (optional) or floppy disk
adaptor for Memory Stick (optional) for this
operation. For detailed instructions on
operation, refer to the operating instructions of
your computer and the Memory Stick Reader/
Writer, PC card adaptor for Memory Stick, or
floppy disk adaptor for Memory Stick. For
details, refer to the operating instructions of
your accessory.
Do not modify the directory of the file that
corresponds to the DCF98 standard. The
modified file will not be read.
If you use the new Memory Stick, be sure
to use it first with this camcorder.
pcp e
pae Bcpeee
c a
197
Copying an image
pae pae,
recorded on a Memory acax a Memory
Stick to tapes
Stick, a acce
You can copy still images or titles recorded on
a Memory Stick to a tape.
M pa ee
pae p, acae a
Memory Stick, a accey.
Before operation
Insert a tape for recording and a Memory
Stick for playback into your camcorder.
epe aa pa
Bcae accey, a py ye
pc ac, Memory Stick, c
p ye cyecc
cpeee, eaepy.

(2) Using the video control buttons, search for
a point where you want to record the
desired still image. Set the tape to playback
pause mode.
simultaneously on your camcorder. The
tape is set to the recording pause mode.
(4) Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the still
image you want to copy.
(5) Press X to start recording and press X
again to stop.
(6) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 4
and 5.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee VCR.
(2) C ep
ae ec, ya ex
aa ac peye e
pae. cae acce
pe ay cpee.
(3) Opee ae y z REC
y cpaa ee a eaepe.
acce ye ycae pe
ay ac.
(4) Hae y MEMORY PLAY
cpee e
pae, pe ex
cpa.
(5) Hae y X, aa
ac. caa ac ca
ae y X.
(6) Ec ex ae cpa
pye pae, pe y
4 5.
POWER
VCR
REC
PLAY
2
5
PAUSE
198
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
Copying an image recorded on

a Memory Stick to tapes
To stop copying in the middle
Press x.
pae pae,
acax a Memory Stick,
a acce
ca pa, e
ac a
Hae y x.
During copying
You cannot operate the following buttons:
MEMORY PLAY, MEMORY INDEX,
MEMORY DELETE, MEMORY +,
MEMORY , and MEMORY MIX.
If you continue copying, do not use
EDITSEARCH to search for the point where
you want to record the desired still image. If
you do, the playback image disappears from
the screen.
Note on the index screen
You cannot record the index screen.
If you press DISPLAY in standby or

recording mode
You can see memory playback and the file
name indicators in addition to the indicators
pertinent to tapes, such as the time code
indicator.
peae ecy pay

ec pa e aca.
pae, eee c
epca epa ce
c py aapayp
B, x e ye cpa c
eaep.
Ec aa y DISPLAY pee
a ac
pe ap, cxc
accea, apep, ap a
pee, ye ap
cpee a e
aa.

You may not be able to copy them with your
camcorder.
B pe pa
He ca ceye :
MEMORY PLAY, MEMORY INDEX,
MEMORY DELETE, MEMORY +
MEMORY , a ae MEMORY MIX.
B pe pa e
ac EDITSEARCH
ca eca, ya ex aa
ac y e
pae. Ec cea ,
cpe paee cee
c paa.
199
Playing back images

continuously SLIDE
SHOW
Hepepe
cpeee
pae SLIDE SHOW
You can automatically play back images in

sequence. This function is useful especially
when checking recorded images or during a
presentation.
M aaec cp
pae epep
ceaec. a y
ce ya p pepe acax
pae pe peea.
Before operation
(unlock) position.
SLIDE SHOW, then press the dial.
(5) Press MEMORY PLAY. Your camcorder
plays back the images recorded on the
Memory Stick in sequence.
epe aa pa
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee MEMORY. eec,
epeae LOCK ycae
pae ee (papa).
(2) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa yca SLIDE SHOW, a ae
ae a c.
(5) Hae y MEMORY PLAY.
Beaepa cp
pae, acae a Memory
Stick, epep
ceaec.
VCR
POWER
MENU
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
[MENU] : END
PLAY
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW READY
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
200
SL I DE SHOW
100-0019
10 / 15
[M PLAY] : START [MENU] : END
Playing back images

continuously SLIDE SHOW
Hepepe cpeee
pae SLIDE SHOW
To stop or end the slide show
ca pepae
ecpa pae
Press MENU.
Hae y MENU.
To pause during a slide show

Press MEMORY PLAY.
ay pe ecpa
pae
To start the slide show from a

particular image
Hae y MEMORY PLAY.
Select the desired image using MEMORY +/

buttons before step 2.
aaa aa pae c
peee pae
To view the recorded images on TV

Connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/V
connecting cable supplied with your
camcorder before operation.
pcpa acax
pae a pae eepa
epe aa peyp cee
eaepy eepy c
cee ae ay/e,
paae eaepe.
Ec ae Memory Stick pe
pa
Be ce ec c aaa.
If you change the Memory Stick during

operation
Be sure to follow the steps again from the
beginning.
epe y 2 epe peyee

paee c MEMORY
+/.
201
Preventing
accidental erasure
Image protection
pepaee
cya cpa
aa pae
To prevent accidental erasure of important

images, you can protect selected images.
pepae cya cpa

ax pae pae
pae a.
Before operation
epe aa pa
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or

VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is
set to the right (unlock) position.
(2) Play back the image you want to protect (p.
193).
PROTECT, then press the dial.
The - mark is displayed beside the data
file name of the protected image.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee MEMORY VCR.
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae pae ee
(papa).
(2) Bcpee paee, pe
y a (cp. 193).
(3) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa yca PROTECT, a ae
ae a c.
pa yca ON, a ae ae
a c.
(7) Hae y MENU yae
a e. P c aae
aa ae pae
c a -.
VCR
POWER
MENU
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
3,7
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
[MENU] : END
5
6
202
10 / 15
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
OFF
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
10 / 15
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
ON
SL I DE SHOW OFF
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
10 / 15
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
ON
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
Preventing accidental erasure

Image protection
pepaee cya
cpa aa pae
To cancel image protection
e a pae

EXEC dial.

ae ae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
Note
Formatting erases all information on the
Memory Stick, including the protected
image data. Check the contents of the
Memory Stick before formatting.
peae
B pe papa yac ce
ae a Memory Stick, a ae
aex pae. epe
papae pepe cepe
Memory Stick.

You cannot carry out image protection.
Ec eec a ac a
LOCK
B ay pae ye
e.
203
Deleting images
aee
pae
You can delete images stored in a Memory

Stick.
M ya pae, acae
a Memory Stick.
Deleting selected images
aee pax
pae
Before operation
epe aa pa

(2) Play back the image you want to delete
(p. 193).
(3) Press MEMORY DELETE. DELETE?
viewfinder.
(4) Press MEMORY DELETE again. The
selected image is deleted.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee MEMORY VCR.
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae pae ee
(papa).
(2) Bcpee paee, pe
ex ya (cp. 193).
(3) Hae y MEMORY DELETE.
ap DELETE? c a
pae caee.
(4) Hae y MEMORY DELETE ee
pa. Bpae paee ye
yae.
VCR
1
1
POWER
DELETE
100-0019
10 / 15
DELETE?
DELETE
[DELETE] : DEL
[ ] : CANCEL
To cancel deleting an image
e yae pae
Press MEMORY in step 4.
Hae y MEMORY ye 4.
To delete an image displayed on

the index screen
yae pae,
paae a ec
pae
Press MEMORY +/ to move the B mark to

the desired image and follow steps 3 and 4.
204
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
3,4
Hae y MEMORY +/
epeee e B yy
pae e ec
y 3 4.
Deleting images
aee pae
Notes
To delete a protected image, first cancel
image protection.
Once you delete an image, you cannot restore
it. Check the images to be deleted carefully
before deleting them.
pea
yae ae pae
caaa ee ay pae.
ce yae pae e
e ye cca. epe
yaee ae pepe
pae.
While DELETING appears

Do not turn the POWER switch or press any
buttons.
You cannot delete any image.
B pe pae a
DELETING
He ee ee epeae
POWER e aae ax .
Ec eec a ac a
LOCK
He ye ya
paee.
205
Deleting images
Deleting all the images
206
aee pae
aee cex pae
You can delete all the unprotected images in a

Memory Stick.
M ya ce eaee
pae a Memory Stick.
Before operation
epe aa pa

(unlock) position.
DELETE ALL, then press the dial.
EXECUTE.
DELETING appears on the LCD screen
or in the viewfinder. When all the
unprotected images are deleted,
COMPLETE is displayed.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee MEMORY. eec,
epeae LOCK ycae
pae ee (papa).
(2) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa yca DELETE ALL, a ae
ae a c.
pa yca OK, a ae ae
a c. a OK ec a
a EXECUTE.
ap DELETING c a
pae caee. a
ce eaee pae yy
yae, a cee c
a COMPLETE.
Deleting images
aee pae
VCR
POWER
MENU
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
[MENU] : END
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL RETURN
FORMAT
OK
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL RETURN
FORMAT
OK
RETURN
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL RETURN
FORMAT
EXECUTE
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL DELET I NG
FORMAT
RETURN
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL COMPLETE
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
To cancel deleting all the images in

the Memory Stick
e yae cex
pae a Memory Stick

SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL READY
FORMAT
RETURN
207
Writing a print mark

Print mark
ac eax
a Print Mark
You can specify the recorded still image to be

printed out. This function is useful for printing
out still images later.
Your camcorder conforms with the DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format) standard for
specifying the still images to print out.
M yaa acae ee
pae pacea. a y
ec e ceye
pacea ex pae.
aa eaepa yepe
pea caapa DPOF (p
pa pa ea) ea
ex pae.
Before operation
(2) Play back the image to be printed out (p.
193).
PRINT MARK, then press the dial.
The
mark is displayed beside the
data file name of an image.
208
epe aa pa
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee MEMORY VCR.
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae pae ee
(papa).
(2) Bcpee paee, pe
ex paceaa (cp. 193).
(3) Hae y MENU
pae e.
pa yca
, a ae ae
a c.
pa yca PRINT MARK, a ae
ae a c.
pa yca ON, a ae ae
a c.
(7) Hae y MENU yae
a e. P c aae
aa pae c a
.
Writing a print mark Print

mark
ac eax a Print
Mark
VCR
POWER
MEMORY
OFF CAMERA
(CHG)
3,7
MENU
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
[MENU] : END
10 / 12
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK ON
PROTECT
OFF
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
10 / 12
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK ON
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
To cancel writing print marks

EXEC dial.
You cannot write print marks on still images.
e ac eax
a
ae ae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
Ec eec a ac a
LOCK
B e cee aca eae a a
ex paex.
10 / 12
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK OFF
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
209
Additional Information
ea pa
Usable cassettes
cyee acce
Selecting cassette types

You can use the
mini DV cassette only*.
You cannot use any other 8 mm,
Hi8,
Digital8,
VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHS,
S-VHSC, Betamax,
DV or
MICROMV cassette.
* There are two types of mini DV cassettes:
with cassette memory and without cassette
memory. Tapes with cassette memory have
(Cassette Memory) mark. Sony
recommends that you use a tape with
mark to enjoy your camcorder fully.
The IC memory is built in the cassette with
cassette memory. Using this IC memory, your
camcorder can read, write, and search data
such as the date of recording or titles. The
functions using the cassette memory require
successive signals recorded on the tape. If the
tape has a blank portion in the beginning or
between the recorded portions, a title may not
be displayed properly or the search functions
may not work correctly.
Not to make any blank portion on the tape,
press END SEARCH to return to the end of the
recorded portion before you begin the next
recording when:
You have ejected the cassette while
recording.
You have played back the tape in VCR mode.
If there is a blank portion or discontinuous
signal on your tape, re-record from the
beginning to the end of the tape concerning
above.
When you record, using a digital video camera
recorder without a cassette memory function,
on a tape recorded by one with the cassette
memory function, the same result may occur.
210
Bp a acce
M ca acce
*. He ca ae
DV
pye acce a
8 mm,
Hi8,
Digital8,
VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHS,
S-VHSC, Betamax,
DV
MICROMV.
* Cyecye a a acce DV: c
acce a e acce
a. e c acce a
e a
(accea a).
ppa Sony peeye
ca ey c a
, a
a aee x
a eaep.
Ha a e acce ycaea a
e epa cxe. Beaepa
e ca aca ae,
ae a a ac p .., a
y epay cxey a.
y, cyx accey a,
peyec ac a ey
ceaex ca. Ec a ee
eec eaca yac aae
ey aca ac, p
e paac c cae,
y ca e paa
epa.
, e yc e
eacax yac a ee, ae
y END SEARCH paa y
aca yaca epe aa
ceye ac, ec:
accea a eea pe ac.
ea cpac pee VCR.
Ec a ee eec eaca
yac pepac ca,
e epeac c aaa a c
ye ecaa.
Ta e peya e yc p
e ac c p
eaep e y acce
a a ey, acay c
y acce a.
Usable cassettes
cyee acce
mark on the cassette

The memory capacity of tapes marked with
is 4 K bits. Your camcorder can
accommodate up to 16 K bits. 16 K bits tape is
marked with
.
a
a accee
Ec a acce c e
paa 4 . Beaepa e paa c
a 16 . acce c a
ec 16 appyc a
.
The maximum number of data recordable

on cassette memory (when using 4 K bits
cassette memory)
Macae ec ax,
pe e aca
accey a (p ca
acce a 4 )
Data
Numbers
INDEX
32 (15 bytes/one item of the

data)
ae
ec
TITLE
25
HEC
32 (15 a/ ee ax)
DATE

data)
HABAHE
25
ATA
6 (10 a/ ee ax)

data)
OTOPA
12 (10 a/ ee ax)
MAPPOBA
PHOTO
CASSETTE LABEL
Copyright signal
When you play back
When you connect your camcorder to any
other video camera recorder to dub a tape that
has recorded copyright control signals for
copyright protection, you may not record the
tape that played back on your camcorder.
When you record
You cannot record software on your
camcorder that contains copyright control
signals for copyright protection of software.
COPY INHIBIT appears on the LCD screen,
in the viewfinder or on the TV screen if you try
to record such software.
Your camcorder does not record copyright
control signals on the tape when it records.
peee e e c
pep.
Ca apc paa
p cpee
p cee eaep a py eaepe c e
epeac e, a p aca
ca apc paa a
apcx pa, e ye
ac c e,
cp a Bae eaepe.
p ac
Ha eaepe e
ac ppa, pa cep
ca apc paa a
apcx pa.
p e ac a ppa a
pae , caee a pae
eepa c a COPY
INHIBIT.
B pe ac a eaepa e
acae ca apc paa a
ey.
Additional Information / ea pa
The numbers above are as a guide.
211
Usable cassettes
cyee acce
Audio mode
Aype
12-bit mode: The original sound can be

recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in
stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo
1 and stereo 2 can be adjusted by selecting
AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during
playback. Both sounds can be played back.
16-bit mode: A new sound cannot be recorded
but the original sound can be recorded in high
quality. Moreover, it can also play back sound
recorded in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When
playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit
mode, 16BIT indicator appears on the LCD
When you play back a dual

sound track tape
When you play back a dual sound track tape
recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi SOUND
to the desired mode in the menu settings
(p. 156).
Sound from speaker
HiFi SOUND
mode
Playing back
a stereo tape
Playing back a dual

sound track tape
STEREO
Stereo
Main sound and

sub sound
Left sound
Main sound
Right sound
Sub sound
You cannot record dual sound programs on

your camcorder.
12- pe: epaa y

e aca a cepeec
aa 1, a y - a
cepeec aa 2 pee
32 . aac ey cepeec
aa 1 cepeec aa 2
peypa ye pa
yca AUDIO MIX ycaax e
pe cpee. M
cp a aaa.
16- pe: He aca
y, a aca
epaa y c aeca.
pe , y cp
peax 32 , 44,1 48 . p
cpee e, aca 16 pee, a pae
caee c ap 16BIT.
p cpee e c
y p
p cpee e c
y p, aca
cepeec ccee, ycae
ay HiFi SOUND y pe
ycaax e (cp. 156).
y epe ppe
Pe
Bcpeee
HiFi SOUND cepeec
e
Bcpeee
e c
y
y
pa
STEREO
Cepe
Oc
cae
y
y e aaa
Oc y
y pa aaa
Bcae
y
Ha Bae eaepe e
aca ppa c y
p.
212
Usable cassettes
cyee acce
Notes on the mini DV cassette

When affixing a label on the mini
DV cassette
Be sure to affix a label only on the locations as
illustrated below [a] so as not to cause
malfunction of your camcorder.
pea accee
DV
p ppee e a
accey DV
After using the mini DV cassette
Oae ppee e
ex ecax, pe aa a
pcye e [a], e pe
pee aep.
Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the

cassette in its case, and store it in an upright
position.
ce ca acce
DV
If the cassette memory function

does not work
epeae ey aay, e
accey yp xpae ee
epa e.
Reinsert a cassette a few times. The gold-plated

connector of mini DV cassettes may be dirty or
dusty.
Ec e paae y
acce a
Cleaning the connector
ca paea
Ec e pae acce DV
ape ae, B e cee
ypa ye c acce
a. ppae e pae
xaya a pep
ce 10 pa ca acce. [b]
Do not affix a label

around this
border./
He ppee
ey
pa.
[a]
[b]
If the gold-plated connector of mini DV

cassettes is dirty or dusty, you may not operate
the function using cassette memory. Clean up
the gold-plated connector with cotton-wool
swab, about every 10 times ejection of a
cassette. [b]
Bcae accey ec pa.

e pae acce DV
e ape ae.
213
About i.LINK
O aee i.LINK
Your camcorder is equipped with the DV

Interface based on i.LINK (IEEE1394) standard.
This section explains the specifications and
features of i.LINK.
Baa aepa pyaa epec

DV, pacca a ae caapa
i.LINK (IEEE1394).
B paee ce xapaepc
y i.LINK.
ae i.LINK?
i.LINK - p ceae
epec, peaae
e pya, ee
pae i.LINK. p e i.LINKycpc py pyy y i.LINK
e ycpca:
epeaa ya x
apaex ae, ae a
pe ay pe e
ca
pa py i.LINK-ycpca
e ac py
ycpca p
ae i.LINK.
Bae i.LINK-ycpc e
cee AV-ycpca
pae epa
pacp ax. B yye apyec
aee pacp c
e pa ppa
y.
ee peyeca
eceac cey y.
p cee ecx i.LINKycpc Bae ycpc ce
peeee epa
eac a e c e
ycpc, py
ecpece e, c
ce ycpca, c p Bae
ycpc ca cpec e.
Ceae, y Bac e e
exc ca p
e ycpc py pyy.
Oa, acc apa y
xapaepc ex ycpc,
paa ex y ye,
, ypac -pay, a
epe epa pacp ax
yy e.
peae
p i.LINK-ae Bay
eaepy y
ycpcy.
p e ycpcy, eey
a ee pae i.LINK, c.
cpy cyaa, paaee
y ycpcy.
What is i.LINK?
i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to
integrate the devices equipped with i.LINK
connector. By connecting i.LINK devices,
i.LINK allows your device to:
Transmit and receive data such as digital
audio and digital video signals in two ways
Control other i.LINK devices
Easily connect with another device using just
an i.LINK cable.
Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting
AV devices and perform various operations
and data transfer. Further availability for
connections with versatile equipment and
operations will be planned in the future.
Other advantages include the following
feature. When connecting multiple i.LINK
devices, your device cannot only perform
operations and data transfer with the directly
connected device but also perform them with
any of the devices that are connected via other
devices. Therefore, you will not need to
concern the order of connecting devices.
However, depending on the features and
specifications of the connected devices, you
may need to operate certain functions
differently or may not be able to perform
certain operations or data transfer.
Note
Your camcorder can be connected to one
device with the i.LINK cable.
When you connect with a device that has two
or more i.LINK connectors, refer to the
operating instructions supplied with the
connected device.
Tips
i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 that Sony
proposed, is a trademark supported by a
majority of companies worldwide.
IEEE 1394 is an international standard
defined by IEEE, The Institute of Electrical
and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
214
Ce
i.LINK - pye aae IEEE
1394, peee ppae SONY,
pa apa, paa
ppa cey py.
IEEE 1394 - eyap caap,
peee cy eep
epexe paepe
(IEEE).
About i.LINK
O aee i.LINK
About data transfer speed of i.LINK

i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed
of approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps* that
are described as S100, S200 and S400
respectively.
For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer
speed that the device supports is identified on
Specifications page of the operating
instructions supplied with the device or near
its i.LINK connector.
With a device that does not identify the data
transfer speed, the maximum data transfer
speed that the device supports is S100.
When connecting with the device that support
different data transfer speed, the actual data
transfer speed may be different from those
described on the i.LINK connectors.
O cpc pacpa ax e i.LINK

i.LINK pecae ceye ae
acax cpce pacpa
ax: 100, 200 400 M/c*
S100, S200 S400 cece.
ycpc i.LINK acaa cpc
pacpa ax, epaea
a ycpc, yaaec paee
apaepc cpy
cyaa, paaex ycpcy,
p c pae i.LINK.
ycpc, cpc pacpa ax
px e yaaa, acae aee
apaepa ccae S100.
p cee ycpc,
epax pae cpc
pacpa ax, ecea
cpc pacpa ax e
ac ae, yaax p c
pae i.LINK.
i. LINK operation with your camcorder

For details on dubbing your camcorder to your
VCR equipped with DV Interface, see page
108, 132.
Your camcorder is available for use with other
devices equipped with Sony i.LINK connector
(DV Interface) connector (eg. VAIO personal
computer series).
Beware that some of the video equipment such
as the Digital Televisions, the DVD recorders/
players or the MICROMV recorders/players
are equipped with the i.LINK connector but
not compatible with the DV equipment. Be
sure to confirm whether the equipment is
compatible with the DV equipment or not
before connecting your camcorder to it.
For details on connection with i.LINK cable
and necessary software, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the connected
device.
Use Sony i.LINK cables
Use Sony i.LINK cables to connect the i.LINK
devices.
4 pins y 4 pins (For dubbing)
i.LINK and
are trademarks.
* ae Mbps (M/c)?
Mea ceyy. Mepa cpc epea
ax ceyy. B cyae 100 Mbps
epea 100 ea ax y ceyy.
Paa i.LINK a Bae eaepe
py pa epeac c
Bae eaep a ea,
pya epec DV, c. a cp.
108, 132.
Baa eaepa e cac
cec c py ycpca ,
pya pae Sony i.LINK
(epec DV) (apep, epca
ep cep VAIO).
Ceye e y, ee
epya, apep, pe
eep, acae ycpca/
ppae DVD acae
ycpca/ppae MICROMV,
cae pae i.LINK, e c
cec c pyae DV. pee
e a eaepy ay-
ycpcy, ae pepe,
ec cec c py
ycpca DV.
ee py pa
e c ae i.LINK
ex ppa ecee c.
cpyx cyaa, paaex
aey ycpcy.
*What is Mbps?
Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at
which data is transmitted per second. In case
of 100 Mbps, 100 Mega bits of data can be
transmitted per second.
cye ae Sony i.LINK

e ycpc i.LINK
cye ae Sony i.LINK.
4 pa y 4 pa ( epeac)
i.LINK
- pe ap.
215
English
Troubleshooting
If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to troubleshoot the
problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and contact your Sony dealer or
local authorized Sony service facility. If C:ss:ss appears on the LCD screen, display window
or in the viewfinder, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 222.
In the recording mode
216
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Actions
START/STOP does not operate.
The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA.

c Set it to CAMERA. (p. 24)
c Rewind the tape or insert a new one. (p. 22, 44)
The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to SAVE.
c Use a new tape or slide the tab. (p. 22)
The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour
to acclimatize. (p. 234)
The power goes off.
While being operated in CAMERA mode, your camcorder has been in

the standby mode for more than five minutes.
c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to CAMERA again.
(p. 26)
The battery pack is dead or nearly dead.
c Install a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)
The image on the viewfinder

screen is not clear.
The viewfinder lens is not adjusted.

c Adjust the viewfinder lens. (p. 30)
The SteadyShot function does not

work.
STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings.

c Set it to ON. (p. 156)
The autofocusing function does

not work.
The camcorder is in manual focus mode.

c Turn to auto focus mode. (p. 83)
Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus.
c Adjust focus manually. (p. 83)
The fader function does not work.
The digital effect function is working.

c Cancel it. (p. 56)
A vertical band appears when you

shoot a subject such as lights or a
candle flame against a dark
background.
The contrast between the subject and background is too high. This is
not a malfunction.
Vertical streaks appear when you

shoot a very bright subject.
This is called the smear phenomenon. This is not a malfunction.
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Some tiny white spots appear on

the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder.
When the shutter speed is too low or the low lux mode is selected.
Diagonal stripes appear on the

screen.
ZEBRA selector is set to 70 or 100.

c Set ZEBRA selector to OFF. (p. 69)
Unknown pictures or messages

are displayed on the LCD screen
or in the viewfinder.
If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or

DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu settings without a cassette
inserted, your camcorder automatically starts the demonstration.
c Insert a cassette. The demonstration stops.
You can also cancel DEMO MODE. (p. 162)
The click of the shutter does not

sound.
BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings.

c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL. (p. 156)
The image is not bright even if

you use the video flash light.
The ND FILTER selector is set to 1 or 2.

c Set it to OFF. (p. 68)
The manual adjustment is not suitable for the situations. (The
indicator flashes.)
c Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK, or cancel the manual
adjustment. (p. 63)
In the playback mode

The tape does not move when a

video control button is pressed.
The POWER switch is not set to VCR.

c Set it to VCR. (p. 40)
The playback button does not

function.

c Rewind the tape. (p. 44)
There are horizontal lines on the

picture or the playback picture is
not clear or does not appear.
The video head may be dirty.

c Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette
(optional). (p. 235)
No sound or only a low sound is

heard when playing back a tape.
The volume is turned to minimum.

c Turn up the volume. (p. 40)
AUDIO MIX is set to the ST2 side in the menu settings.
c Adjust AUDIO MIX. (p. 156)
The title search function does not

work.
The tape has no cassette memory.

c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 97, 210)
CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.
There is no title in the tape.
c Superimpose the titles. (p. 143)
The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 98)
Symptom
217
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Displaying the recorded date, date

search function does not work.

CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.
The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 100)
The new sound now being added,

or that has been added to the
recorded tape is not heard.
AUDIO MIX is set to ST1 side in the menu settings.

c Set it to the side you want to monitor. (p. 156)
The title is not displayed.
TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings.
The sound is muted or images do

not appear when monitoring
images through TV/VCR.

c Pull out the A/V connecting cable from the AUDIO L/R and VIDEO
jacks, then connect it again.
In the recording and playback modes
218
Symptom
The power does not turn on.
The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.

c Install a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)
The AC Adaptor is not connected to the wall socket.
c Connect the AC Adaptor to the wall socket. (p. 18)
The end search function does not

work.
The tape was ejected after recording when using a tape without
cassette memory. (p. 38, 45)
You have not recorded on the new cassette yet. (p. 38, 45)
The end search function does not

work correctly.
The tape has a blank portion in the beginning or middle. (p. 39)
The picture does not appear in the

viewfinder.
The LCD panel is open.

c Close the LCD panel. (p. 27)
The battery pack is quickly

discharged.
The operating temperature is too low.

The battery pack is not fully charged.
c Charge the battery pack fully. (p. 14)
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged.
c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 13)
The battery remaining indicator

does not indicate the correct time.
You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or cold environment for a long time.
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged.
c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 13)
The battery is dead.
c Use a full-charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)
Troubleshooting
Symptom
The cassette cannot be removed

from the holder.
The power source is disconnected.

c Connect it firmly. (p. 13, 18)
The battery is dead.
c Use a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)
The % and Z indicators flash and

no functions except for cassette
ejection work.
Moisture condensation has occurred.

indicator does not appear

when using a tape with cassette
memory.
The gold-plated connector of the tape is dirty or dusty.

c Clean the gold-plated connector. (p. 213)
Remaining tape indicator is not

displayed.
The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings.

c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape indicator. (p. 156)
When operating using the Memory Stick

Operations do not function.
The POWER switch is set to CAMERA or OFF (CHG).

c Set it to MEMORY or VCR.
The Memory Stick is not inserted.
c Insert a Memory Stick. (p. 173)
Recording does not function.
The Memory Stick has already been recorded to its full capacity.
c Erase unnecessary images and record again. (p. 177, 204)
The Memory Stick formatted incorrectly is inserted.
c Format the Memory Stick or use another Memory Stick. (p. 160)
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
c Set the tab to write. (p. 170)
The image cannot be deleted.
The image is protected.

c Cancel image protection. (p. 202)
You cannot format the Memory

Stick.

Deleting all the images cannot be

carried out.

You cannot protect the image.

The image to be protected is not being played back.
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 193)
You cannot write a print mark on

the still image.

The image that you will write a print mark is not being played back.
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 193)
Symptom
219
Troubleshooting
Symptom
The photo save function does not

work.

The battery pack is dead.
c Install a charged battery pack or use the AC Adaptor instead of the
battery pack. (p. 13, 18)
Others
Symptom
The title is not recorded.

c Erase unnecessary title. (p. 147)
The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure.
c Slide the write-protect tab to REC. (p. 22)
Nothing is recorded in that position on the tape.
c Superimpose the title to the recorded position. (p. 143)
The cassette label is not recorded.

c Erase some data. (p. 153)
The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure.
c Slide the write-protect tab to REC. (p. 22)
While editing using the i.LINK

cable, recording picture cannot be
monitored.
Digital program editing does not
function.
c Disconnect the i.LINK cable, and connect it again. (p. 108)
The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly.

c Check the connection and set up the selector position. (p. 107)
The camcorder is not connected to Sony DV equipment (When the
i.LINK cable is connected).
c Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings and set the recording VCR
to be controlled by infrared rays.
Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is attempted.
c Set the program again on a recorded portion. (p. 124)
Your camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized.
c Synchronize them. (p. 119)
220
Troubleshooting
The Remote Commander supplied

with your camcorder does not
work.
COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings.

Something is blocking the infrared rays.
c Remove the obstacle.
The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the + polarities
incorrectly.
c Insert the batteries with the correct polarity. (p. 253)
The batteries are dead.
c Insert new ones. (p. 253)
The input picture does not appear

on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder when your camcorder
is connected to outputs on the TV
or VCR.
DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings.

c Set it to LCD. (p. 156)
The melody or beep sounds for

five seconds.

Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder.
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your
camcorder.
When charging the battery pack,

no indicator appears or the
indicator flashes on the display
window.
The AC Adaptor is disconnected.

c Connect it properly.
The battery pack malfunctions.
c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
You cannot charge the battery

pack.
The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).

c Set it to OFF (CHG).
The camcorder is immediately

turned off even if the amount of
the battery remaining time is
enough to operate.
c Charge the battery pack fully again.

The correct remaining time is displayed.
No function works though the

power is on.
c Disconnect the mains lead of the AC Adaptor or remove the battery,

then reconnect it after about one minute. Turn the power on. If the
functions still do not work, press the RESET button located at the
lower-right of the ZEBRA selector using a sharp-pointed object. (If
you press the RESET button, all the settings including the date and
time return to the default.) (p. 18, 245)
Symptom
221
English
Self-diagnosis display
Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display
function.
This function displays the current condition of
your camcorder as a 5-digit code (a
combination of a letter and figures) on the
LCD screen, display window, or in the
viewfinder. If a 5-digit code is displayed, check
the following code chart. The last two digits
(indicated by ss) will differ depending on
the state of your camcorder.
On the LCD screen or in the

viewfinder, on the display
window
C:21:00
Self-diagnosis display
C:ss:ss
You can service your camcorder
yourself.
E:ss:ss
Contact your Sony dealer or
nearest local authorized Sony
service facility.
Five-digit display
C:04:ss
You are using a battery pack that is not an InfoLITHIUM battery pack.
c Use an InfoLITHIUM battery pack. (p. 14)
C:21:ss

c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize.
(p. 234)
C:22:ss
The video heads are dirty.

c Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (optional). (p. 235)
C:31:ss
C:32:ss
A malfunction other than the above.

c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder.
c Disconnect the mains lead of the AC Adaptor or remove the battery pack. After
reconnecting the power source, operate your camcorder.
E:61:ss
E:62:ss
A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.

c Contact your Sony dealer and inform them of the 5-digit code. (example: E:61:10)
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times, contact your
Sony dealer or nearest local authorized Sony service facility.
222
Pycc
cpaee ecpace
Ec y Bac a aapea p ca eaep,
cyec ceye ae ee ycpae. Ec pea e ycpaec,
ceye ce c a pac cepc ep Sony
ece yee pepe cya e Sony. Ec a pae
, e ce caee ac a C:ss:ss, aae,
cpaaa y ce caac. C. cp. 229.
B pee ac
Bepa pa / e ycpae
He paae a START/
STOP.
epeae POWER e ycae ee CAMERA.

c cae e ee CAMERA. (cp. 24)
aac ea.
c epeae ey aa cae y accey. (cp. 22,
44)
eec a ac a accee ycae ee
SAVE.
c cye y accey epee eec.
(cp. 22)
ea pa apaay (eca a).
c ee accey cae eaepy pe a
ac, a e capc aa. (cp. 234)
paae ae.
p pae pee CAMERA eaepa axc pee

a ee y.
c cae epeae POWER caaa ee OFF
(CHG), a ae ca ee CAMERA. (cp. 26)
aape pape pape.
c cae ape aape . (cp. 13, 14)
He peypa e cae.
c Opeypye e cae. (cp. 30)
paee a pae
cae eee.
He paae y
yc ce.
aa STEADYSHOT ycaea ee OFF

ycaax e.
c cae ee ee ON. (cp. 156)
He paae y
aaec ycp.
Beaepa axc pee py ycp.

c epee pe aaec ycp. (cp. 83)
c ce e x aaec ycp.
c Opeypye yc pyy. (cp. 83)
peea ece y p ea.
c Oee ee. (cp. 56)
C ca pacc ey e .
Oa e ec ecpac.
He paae y eepa.
p cee ax e,
a, apep, aa a
ce a e e,
ec epaa
ca.
p cee e px
e c
epae c.
pea
aaec ee paaa. Oa e
ec ecpac.
(pee a ceye cpae)
223
cpaee ecpace
pea
Bepa pa / e ycpae
Ha pae
caee y c
ee .
a cpc apa c aa, pa pe

ceec.
Ha pae paac
aae c.
epeae ZEBRA ycae a 70 100.

c cae epeae ZEBRA ee OFF (cp. 69).
He ce y,
ae ey e
ye ae a
acay ey.
Cyc 10 y ce yca epeae POWER

ee CAMERA a DEMO MODE ee ON
ycaax e, a accea e caea, eaepa
aaec aae ecpa.
c Bcae accey. ecpa cac.
B ae ee e pe DEMO MODE. (cp. 168)
He ce e apa.
aa BEEP ycaea ee OFF ycaax e.

c cae ee ee MELODY NORMAL. (cp. 156)
paee eca
pe ae p ca
ec.
epeae ND FILTER ycae ee 1 2.

c cae e ee OFF. (cp. 68)
Pya peypa a cya e x. (Mae
ap .)
c cae epeae AUTO LOCK ee AUTO
LOCK ee pyy peypy. (cp. 63)
B pee cpee
224
pea
Bepa pa / e ycpae
p aa
ypae eaep
ea e epeeaec.
epeae POWER e ycae ee VCR.

c cae e ee VCR. (cp. 40)
Bcpe paee
eee e ec a
pae eepa.
aac ea.
c epeae ey aa. (cp. 44)
Ha pae pcycy
pae c,
cpe paee
eee e paaec
a pae.
B, ape e.
c ce c ce acce Sony
DVM12CL (ppeac e). (cp. 235)
p cpee e
e ya, e ce
x y.
cae ae aee pc.

c ee pc. (cp. 40)
aa AUDIO MIX ycaea ee ST2 ycaax
e.
c Opeypye ay AUDIO MIX. (cp. 156)
He paae y ca
p.
ea e ee acce a.
c cye ey c acce a. (cp. 97, 210)
aa CM SEARCH ycaea ee OFF
ycaax e.
Ha ee e p.
c Hae p. (cp. 143)
Ha ee eec eaca yac ey aca
ac. (cp. 98)
cpaee ecpace
pea
Bepa pa / e ycpae
He paae y
pae aca a,
ca a.
ea e ee acce a.
aa CM SEARCH ycaea ee OFF
ycaax e.
Ha ee eec eaca yac ey aca
ac. (cp. 100)
He ce y,
ae ey e
ye ae a
acay ey.
aa AUDIO MIX ycaea ee ST1 ycaax

e.
c cae ee ee, cecyee y,
ex pep. (cp. 156)
He paaec p.
aa TITLE DSPL ycaea ee OFF ycaax

e.
He ce y, e
ec paee p
pepe pae c
eepa/
eaa.
c Be cee ae ay/e e
AUDIO L/R VIDEO, ae cae e ca.
pea
Bepa pa / e ycpae
He aec ae.
He ycae aape , cce

papc.
c cae ape aape . (cp. 13, 14)
Aaep epee a e cee eppee.
c cee aaep epee a eppee
(cp.18).
He paae y ca
a a ee.
accea a ya ce ac p ca e e
acce a. (cp. 38, 45)
ac a y accey ee e ac. (cp. 38, 45)
Hepa paae y
ca a.
Ha ee ec pyc aae cepee. (cp. 39)
B caee e ec
paee.
Opa ae .
c ape ae . (cp. 27)
aape cp
papaec.
C a eepaypa pyae cpe.

aape ape e c.
c c ape aape . (cp. 14)
aape c pape e e
epeape.
c aee e a aape . (cp. 13)
ap caec
pee pa aape
paae epae
pe.
aape ee pe cac p e
c eepaype pyae cpe.
aape c pape e e
epeape.
c aee e a aape . (cp. 13)
aape c pape.
c cye c ape aape . (cp. 13,
14)
B peax ac cpee
(pee a ceye cpae)
225
cpaee ecpace
pea
Bepa pa / e ycpae
accea e aec
epae.
Ocee c a.
c cee e . (cp. 13, 18)
aape c pape.
c cye ape aape . (cp. 13, 14)
Ma ap % Z,
paae y
ee acce.
pa eca a.
He paaec ap
p ca e c
acce a.
ape ae e pae acce.

c ppe e pae. (cp. 213)
He paaec ap
caec e.
ap q REMAIN ycae ee AUTO

ycaax e.
c cae e ee ON, cea paac
ap caec e. (cp. 156)
p ca Memory Stick
pea
Bepa pa / e ycpae
y e paa.
epeae POWER ycae ee CAMERA

OFF (CHG).
c cae e ee MEMORY VCR.
He caea Memory Stick.
c Bcae Memory Stick. (cp. 173)
He ec ac.
Memory Stick c aea.

c Cpe eye pae ae ca. (cp. 177, 204)
Bcaea Memory Stick epa papaa.
c Opapye y Memory Stick cye pyy
Memory Stick. (cp. 166)
eec a ac a Memory Stick ycae
ee LOCK.
c cae eec ee ac. (cp. 170)
He yaec paee.
paee ae.
c Oee ay pae. (cp. 202)
ee LOCK.
He papa
Memory Stick.

ee LOCK.
He yaec
yaee cex pae.

ee LOCK.
ee LOCK.
paee, pe y a, e cpc.
c Hae y MEMORY PLAY cpee
pae. (cp. 193)
B e ee a
paee.
B e ee aca
ea a a e
pae.
226

ee LOCK.
paee, a p ye aca ea a, e
cpc.
c Hae y MEMORY PLAY cpee
pae. (cp. 193)
cpaee ecpace
pea
Bepa pa / e ycpae
He paae y
cxpae a
c.

ee LOCK.
aape c pape.
c cae ape aape cye
ec e aaep epee a (cp. 13, 18).
pee
Bepa pa / e ycpae
He acac p.
ea e ee acce a.
accea a epeea.
c ae eye p. (cp. 147)
Ha accee ea ycaa pepae
cya cpa.
c epee eec a ac ee REC
(cp. 22).
H e aca a yace e.
c Hae p a aca yac. (cp. 143)
He ec appa
acce.
ea e ee acce a.
accea a epeea.
c Cpe epe ae. (cp. 153)
Ha accee ea ycaa pepae
cya cpa.
c epee eec a ac ee REC
(cp. 22).
B pe aa c
cae ae i.LINK
acaee paee e
ppyec.
He paae y
p aa ppa.
c Ocee ae i.LINK ca cee e. (cp. 108)
Ceep x caa a eae ycae

epa.
c pepe ceee ycae ceep ye
ee. (cp. 107)
Beaepa e ceea aapaype DV pca
ppa Sony. (a e ae i.LINK.)
c cae epeae CONTROL ee IR
ycaax e aae ypaee ea
c papacx ye.
a yca ppa a eacay ac e.
c cae ppay ee pa a acay ac e.
(cp. 124)
Baa eaepa ea e cxppa.
c Cxppye x. (cp. 119)
pea
(pee a ceye cpae)
227
cpaee ecpace
228
pea
Bepa pa / e ycpae
He paae paae
Bae eaepe y
ca ypae.
aa COMMANDER ycaea ee OFF

ycaax e.
- pecye pxe papacx ye.
c cpae pece.
aape cae epae e ce pc +
.
c Bcae aape, ca aeay pc.
(cp. 253)
aape papc.
c Bcae e aape. (cp. 253)
paee paee e
ec a pae
caee, a
eaepa ceea
xa eepa
eaa.
aa DISPLAY ycaea ee V-OUT/LCD

ycaax e.
c cae ee ee LCD. (cp. 156)
B ee cey y
e yep
ca.
pa eca a.
- cyc c eaep.
c Be accey cae ee ca, a ae e Bay
eaepy.
B pe ap aape
a ap
e ec e ae
e ce.
Ocee aaep epee a.

c cee e pa.
Hecpae aape .
c Opaec cepc ep Sony ece
yee pepe cya e Sony.
aape e
ap.
epeae POWER e ycae ee OFF (CHG).

c cae e ee OFF (CHG).
aepa cpay aec,

ae ec caeec pe
pa aape ca
ee pa
ypa.
c Ca c ape aape .
c e caeec pe pa aape.
p e a e
paae a y.
c Ocee p aaepa epee a ce

aape , ae, cyc pe y yy,
cee ca. Be ae. Ec y ce ee
e paa, ae y RESET, pacey y
cpaa ceepa ZEBRA, cy p acpe
pee. (Ec B aa y RESET, ce yca,
a ay pe, epyc epaa.) (cp. 18,
245)
Pycc
a caac
B Bae eaepe eec y
caac.
a y paae eyee
cce Bae eaep e 5a a (a y
p) a pae , e ce
caee. B cyae pae
5-a a ceye
pepy cec c ceye
ae . cee e p
(aee a ss) yy ac
acc cc eaep.
Ha pae , caee
e ce
C:21:00
a caac
C:ss:ss
B ee cyae
Bae eaep cace.
E:ss:ss
Opaec cepc ep Sony
aee ece
yee pepe
cya e Sony.
Bepa pa / e ycpae
C:04:ss
B cyee aape , p e ec aape

InfoLITHIUM.
c cye aape InfoLITHIUM (cp. 14)
C:21:ss
pa eca a.
C:22:ss
ape e.
c ce c ce acce Sony DVM12CL
(ppeac e). (cp. 235)
C:31:ss
C:32:ss
Heaa, a peex e.
c Be accey cae ee ca, a ae e Bay
eaepy.
c Ocee p epa aaepa epee a
ce aape . ce p cee ca
a e Bay eaepy.
E:61:ss
E:62:ss
pa eaa, py B e cee ycpa

cace.
c Opaec cepc ep Sony ce 5-a .
(apep: E:61:10)
Ec Ba e yaec cace ycpa eay ae ce pa

cecyx e ycpae ec pa, paec cepc ep Sony
ece yee pepe cya e Sony.
aa a
229
Warning indicators
and messages
peypeae
ap ce
If indicators and messages appear on the LCD

screen or in the viewfinder, check the
following:
See the page in parentheses ( ) for more
information.
Ec a pae caee
c ap ce,
pepe ceyee:
ee py pa c. a
cpae pyx cax ( ).
Warning indicators
peypeae ap
E The battery is dead or nearly dead

Slow flashing:
The battery is nearly dead.
Depending on conditions, the E indicator
may flash, even if there are five to 10 minutes
remaining. If this flashes, we recommend
that you charge the battery or install the
charged battery.
Fast flashing:
The battery is dead (p. 14).
The battery is completely dead.
E aape c
c papea
Meee ae:
aape pape.
B acc yc, ap E
e a, ae ec ee cac
apa a 10 y. Ec ae,
peeyec ap y aape
yca apey aape.
cpe ae:
aape pape (cp. 14).
aape c pape.
Warning indicator as to tape

Slow flashing:
The tape is near the end.
No tape is inserted (p. 22).*
The write-protect tab on the cassette is out
(p. 22).*
Fast flashing:
The tape has run out.*
Z You need to eject the cassette
Slow flashing:
The write-protect tab on the cassette is out
(p. 22).*
Fast flashing:
Moisture condensation has occurred
(p. 234).*
The tape has run out.*
The self-diagnosis display function is
activated (p. 222).*
% Moisture condensation has occurred*
Fast flashing:
Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder,
and leave it for about one hour with the
cassette compartment open (p. 234).
230
peypea ap
ce e
Meee ae:
ea ca a.
accea e caea (cp. 22).*
Ha accee cycye eec a
ac (cp. 22).*
cpe ae:
ea aac.*
Z Hex e accey
Meee ae:
Ha accee cycye
eec a ac (cp. 22).*
cpe ae:
pa eca a (cp. 234).*
ea aac.*
Cpaaa y caac
(cp. 229).*
% pa eca a*
cpe ae:
ee accey, e
eaepy cae ee pep a
ac c p ce
acce (cp. 234).
Warning indicators and

messages
peypeae ap
ce
Warning indicator as to cassette

memory
Slow flashing:
No tape with cassette memory is inserted
(p. 210).*
peypea ap
acce c a
Meee ae:
He ycaea ea c acce
a (cp. 210).*
Self-diagnosis display (p. 222)
a caac (cp. 229)
- The still image is protected

Slow flashing:
The still image is protected (p. 202).*
- paee ae
Meee ae:
paee ae (cp. 202).*
Warning indicator as to Memory Stick*

Slow flashing:
No Memory Stick is inserted (p. 173).
Fast flashing:
Unreadable Memory Stick is inserted.
peypea ap
Memory Stick*
Meee ae:
He caea Memory Stick (cp. 173).
cpe ae:
Bcaea eaea Memory Stick.
Memory Stick format error*

Fast flashing:
There are two directories or more.
Data is broken.
Memory Stick is not formatted correctly
(p. 160).
Warning messages
CLOCK SET
Set the date and time (p. 20).
FOR InfoLITHIUM BATTERY ONLY
Use an InfoLITHIUM battery pack
(p. 14).
MEMORY FULL
The Memory Stick is full in photo save
function (p. 192).
CLEANING CASSETTE
The video heads are dirty (p. 235).**

FULL
The tape cassette memory is full

(p. 146).*
100-0001 (peypeae
ap) a e a a
Memory Stick*
Meee ae:
a pee.
a ecec.
Oa papa Memory
Stick*
cpe ae:
eec a ee aa.
ae pee.
Memory Stick papaa
epa (cp. 166).
peypeae ce
CLOCK SET
cae ay pe (cp. 20).
FOR InfoLITHIUM BATTERY ONLY
cye aape
InfoLITHIUM (cp. 14).
MEMORY FULL
Memory Stick epeea p
e y cxpae
c (cp. 192).
CLEANING CASSETTE
apc e
(cp. 235).**
FULL
accea a e
epeea (cp. 146).*
100-0001 (Warning indicators) Memory

Stick file error*
Slow flashing:
File is broken.
File has no compatibility.
231
Warning indicators and

messages
peypeae ap
ce
16BIT
AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT.* You
cannot dub new sound (p. 161).
REC MODE
REC MODE is set to LP.* You cannot
dub new sound (p. 161).
TAPE
There is no recorded portion on the
tape.* You cannot dub new sound (p.
142).
i.LINK CABLE
i.LINK cable is connected (p. 141).* You
cannot dub new sound.
FULL
The Memory Stick is full (p. 180).*
The write-protect tab on the Memory

Stick is set to LOCK (p. 170).*
NO FILE
No still image is recorded on the
Memory Stick.*
NO MEMORY STICK
No Memory Stick is inserted (p. 173).*
MEMORY STICK ERROR
The Memory Stick data is corrupted
or the Memory Stick that you are
using is not compatible with your
camcorder (p. 174).*
FORMAT ERROR (p. 160)*
- DIRECTORY ERROR (p. 195)*

COPY INHIBIT
The tape contains copyright control
signals for copyright protection of
software (p. 211).*
Q Z TAPE END
The tape has reached the end of the tape
(p. 44).*
Q NO TAPE
Insert a cassette tape (p. 22).*
* You hear the melody or beep sound.
**x and the message appear alternately.
16BIT
AUDIO MODE ycae
ee 16BIT.* H y
e epeaca (cp. 167).
REC MODE
REC MODE ycae ee
LP.* H y e
epeaca (cp. 167).
TAPE
Ha ee e aca yaca.*
H y
e
epeaca (cp. 142).
i.LINK CABLE
e ae i.LINK (cp. 141).*
H y e
epeaca.
FULL
Memory Stick epeea
(cp. 180).*
eec a ac a
Memory Stick ycae
ee LOCK (cp. 170).*
NO FILE
Ha Memory Stick e acax

ex pae.*
NO MEMORY STICK
He caea Memory Stick
(cp. 173).*
MEMORY STICK ERROR
ae a Memory Stick
pee, cyea
Memory Stick ececa c
eaep (cp.174).*
FORMAT ERROR (cp. 166)*
- DIRECTORY ERROR (cp. 195)*

COPY INHIBIT
Ha ee cepac ypae
ca apcx pa a
apcx pa a ppae
eceee (cp. 211).*
Q Z TAPE END
cy e e (cp. 44).*
Q NO TAPE
Bcae accey (cp. 22).*
* B yce e yep ca.
**x cee paac epe.
232
Using your
camcorder abroad
Using your camcorder abroad
You can use your camcorder in any country or
region with the AC Adaptor supplied with
your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/
60 Hz.
Your camcorder is a PAL system based
camcorder. If you want to view the playback
picture on a TV, it must be a PAL system based
TV with the AUDIO/VIDEO input jack.
The following shows TV colour systems used
overseas.
PAL system
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great
Britain, Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait,
Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal,
Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden,
Switzerland, Thailand, etc.
PAL-N system
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
cae Bae
eaep a pae
Beaepy ca
cpae pee aap
paaey e aaepy epee
a, p ca
aae 100 240 B epee
a c ac 50/60 .
Baa eaepa paae ccee
PAL. Ec ex pcpe
cpe paee a pae
eepa, e eep,
paa ccee PAL c x
ea AUDIO/VIDEO.
He pee cce e
eee, cyee a pye.
Ccea PAL
Acpa, Acp, e, a,
eca Pecya, a, ,
epa, Bepa, a,
, a, ye, Maa, Ha
ea, Hpe, pya, Cayp,
Caca Pecya, ca, e,
eap, Taa ..
NTSC system
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central
America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica,
Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan,
the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc.
Ccea PAL-M
pa
SECAM system
Bulgaria, France, Guyana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq,
Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc.
Ccea NTSC
aace cpa, , aaa,
epaa Aepa, , y,
ap, aa, , pe, Meca,
epy, Cypa, Taa, , CA,
Beecya ..
Simple setting of clock by

time difference
You can easily set the clock to the local time by
setting a time difference. Select WORLD TIME
in the menu settings. See page 156 for more
information.
Ccea PAL-N
Apea, apaa, pya
Ccea SECAM
ap, pa, aaa, Bep, pa,
pa, Ma, a, Pcc, paa
..
PAL-M system
Brazil
cae Bae
eaep a pae
pca ycaa pa
pee a acax
B ee e yca ac a
ece pe ye yca pa
pee. Bepe ay WORLD TIME
ycaax e. ee eay
pa c. a cp. 156.
233
Maintenance
information and
precautions
Moisture condensation
If your camcorder is brought directly from a
cold place to a warm place, moisture may
condense inside your camcorder, on the
surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this
condition, the tape may stick to the head drum
and be damaged or your camcorder may not
operate correctly. If there is moisture inside
your camcorder, the beep sounds and the %
indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes
at the same time, the cassette is inserted in
your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the
lens, the indicator will not appear.
If moisture condensation occurred

None of the functions except cassette ejection
will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your
camcorder, and leave it for about one hour
with the cassette compartment open. Your
camcorder can be used again if the % indicator
does not appear when the power is turned on
again.
Note on moisture condensation
Moisture may condense when you bring your
camcorder from a cold place into a warm place
(or vice versa) or when you use your
camcorder in a hot place as follows:
You bring your camcorder from a ski slope
into a place warmed up by a heating device.
You bring your camcorder from an airconditioned car or room into a hot place
outside.
You use your camcorder after a squall or a
shower.
You use your camcorder in a high
temperature and humidity place.
How to prevent moisture condensation
When you bring your camcorder from a cold
place into a warm place, put your camcorder
in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the
bag when the air temperature inside the plastic
bag has reached the surrounding temperature
(after about one hour).
234
pa yxy
a aapa ep
pecpc
eca a
Ec eaepa pecea x
eca ee eee, yp
eaep, a epxc e a
ee e p eca
a. B a cc ea e
py apaay ye
peea, e eaepa e
ce paa aea pa.
Ec yp eaep pa
eca a, py y
ca aae ap %. Ec
pee ae ap Z,
a, accea caea
eaepy. Ec aa
cecpaac a ee,
ap c e ye.
Ec pa eca a
H a y, pe ee
acce, e ye paa. ee
accey, e eaepy
cae ee pep a ac c
p ce acce.
Beaepy ca ca,
ec ap % e ec p
p e a.
peae eca a
Baa e paac, ec epeec
eaepy x eca ee
( ap) p ca
eaep ap ece ceyx
cyax:
Ec eaepa pecea c ce
ca eee, e paae
peae.
Ec eaepa pecea
a ee, px
paae ep, ape ec.
Ec eaepa cyec ce
p .
Ec eaepa cyec
ap ece ece c e
ac.
a pepa eca a
Ec eaepa pecea x
eca ee, e eaepy
e ae aee
e. Be eaepy
e aea, a
eepaypa yxa yp aea
ce eepayp pyae
yxa (pe epe ac).
Maintenance information and

precautions
Removing Dust from Inside
the Viewfinder
(1) While holding down the hook 1, slide the
viewfinder in the direction of the arrow and
remove it out 2.
(2) Clean the surface with a commercially
available blower.
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
aee ape c
ypee cp
cae
(1) Haa a p 1, ce yp
apae cpe ce e
2.
(2) pe cy epxc c
eec pae
yxy pcce.
ca ca yp
Do step 1 above sliding the viewfinder in the

reverse direction of the arrow.
pe a 1, ca e, ca
yp apae, pa cpee.
Maintenance information
Cleaning the video head
To ensure normal recording and clear pictures,
clean the video heads. The video head may be
dirty when:
mosaic-pattern noise appears on the
playback picture.
playback pictures do not move.
playback pictures do not appear.
the x indicator and
CLEANING
CASSETTE message appear one after
another on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder.
pa yxy a
aapa
ca e
ecee pa ac
e pae ceye
epec c e.
Be, , ape,
ec:
a cp pae
c ex a a.
cpe paee e
ec.
cpe paee e
ec a pae.
a pae caee
c a py ap x
cee
CLEANING CASSETTE.
To reattach the viewfinder
235

precautions
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
If the above problem, [a] or [b] occurs, clean

the video heads for 10 seconds with the Sony
DVM12CL cleaning cassette (optional). Check
the picture and if the above problem persists,
repeat cleaning.
p e pe a [a]
[b], ce e c
ce acce Sony DVM12CL
(ppeac e) eee
10 cey. pepe paee , ec
cae e pe e ycpae,
pe cy.
[a]
[b]
or/
Cleaning the LCD screen

If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen
dirty, we recommend using a LCD Cleaning
Cloth (optional) to clean the LCD screen.
Charging the built-in

rechargeable battery
Your camcorder has a built-in rechargeable
battery so that the date, time and other settings
are retained even when the POWER switch is
set to OFF (CHG). The built-in rechargeable
battery is always charged as long as you are
using your camcorder. The battery, however,
will get discharged gradually if you do not use
your camcorder. It will be completely
discharged in about four months if you do
not use your camcorder at all. Even if the builtin rechargeable battery is not charged, it will
not affect your camcorder operation. To retain
the date and time, etc., charge the battery if the
battery is discharged.
Charging the built-in rechargeable battery
Connect your camcorder to the wall socket
using the AC Adaptor supplied with your
camcorder, and leave your camcorder with
the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) for
more than 24 hours.
Or install the fully charged rechargeable
battery pack on your camcorder, and leave
your camcorder with the POWER switch set
to OFF (CHG) for more than 24 hours.
236
ca paa
Ec a pae c ea
ae , c paa
peeyec ca
ceay a (ppeac
e).
apa cpe
ayyp aape
Beaepa caea cpe
ayyp aape,
eceae cxpaee a,
pee pyx yca ae p
ycae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG). Bcpea
ayypa aapea cea
apaec p ca
eaep. Oa aapea
cee papc, ec eaepa
e ye cac. Ec
eaepa cepe e cyec,
aapea c papc
pe epe epex eca.
ae ec cpea ayypa
aapea papc, e e a
pay eaep. cxpae
a a pee ceye ap
aapey, ec a papea.
apa cpe ayyp
aape
cee eaepy epce
c paae e aaepa
epee a, , yca
epeae POWER ee OFF
(CHG), cae ee ee e a 24 aca.
ycae c ape
epeapae aape a
eaepy cae ee, yca
epeae POWER ee OFF
(CHG), ee e a 24 aca.

precautions
Precautions
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
Mep pecpc
cyaa eaep
Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery

pack) or 8.4 V (AC Adaptor).
For DC or AC operation, use the accessories
recommended in this operating instructions.
If any solid object or liquid get inside the
casing, unplug your camcorder and have it
checked by a Sony dealer before operating it
any further.
Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock.
Be particularly careful of the lens.
Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG)
when you are not using your camcorder.
Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel,
for example, and operate it. Doing so might
cause heat to build up inside.
Keep your camcorder away from strong
magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.
Noise may appear on the image.
Do not touch the LCD screen with a sharppointed object.
If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a
residual image may appear on the LCD
screen. This is not a malfunction.
While using your camcorder, the back of the
LCD screen may heat up. This is not a
malfunction.
cyapye eaepy 7,2 B

(aape ) 8,4 B (Aaep
epee a)
acaec cyaa eaep
c epee a,
cye paec,
peeyee a cpy
cyaa.
Ec yp pyca a a-y
ep pee c,
e eaepy epe
aee ee cyaae pepe
ee y epa Sony.
He ycae py pae c
eaep exaecx yap.
ye ce cp c
e.
a eaepa e cyec,
ycae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG).
He apaae eaepy,
apep ee, e
cyapye ee a cc.
e pec e
eepayp yp eaep.
epe Bay eaepy ae
cx ax e e
epae ee exaec pa.
Ha pae y y
ex.
He pacaec pay cp
peea.
p cyaa Bae eaep
x ece, a pae e
c cae paee.
Oa e ec ecpac.
p cyaa Bae eaep,
a cpa paa e
apeac. Oa e ec
ecpac.
On handling tapes
Do not insert anything into the small holes
on the rear of the cassette. These holes are
used to sense the type and thickness of the
tape and if the recording tab is in or out.
Do not open the tape protect cover or touch
the tape.
Avoid touching or damaging the terminals.
To remove dust, clean the terminals with a
soft cloth.
Camcorder operation
Oce pae c ea
He cae ax pee
aee epc a ae cpe
acce. epc cyc
peee a e,
a ae peee a
cyc eeca a ac a
ee.
He pae pexpaey
py e e pacaec ee.
He pacaec ca e
ycae x pee.
yae ce ca c
a.
237

precautions
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
Camcorder care
x a eaep
Remove the tape, and periodically turn on

the power, operate the CAMERA and VCR
sections and play back a tape for about three
minutes when your camcorder is not to be
used for a long time.
Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove
dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens,
remove them with a soft cloth.
Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft
cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a
mild detergent solution. Do not use any type
of solvent which may damage the finish.
Do not let sand get into your camcorder.
When you use your camcorder on a sandy
beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the
sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause your
camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes
this malfunction cannot be repaired.
a eaepa eee
e pee e cyec,
ae accey epec
ae ae, ae aepe
paa pee CAMERA VCR,
a cpeee acce
pep a p y.
ce e c
c yae . Ec
ec ea ae a
ee, yae x c
a.
ce pyc eaep c
cyx a a,
cea ce ca pacp
e cpeca. He cye
ae pacpe, pe y
pe pe.
He ycae aa eca
eaepy. Ec B cyee
eaepy a eca e
a- ece,
pexpae aapa eca
. ec y pec
ecpac aapaa, pa a
e eycpa.
AC Adaptor
Unplug the unit from the wall socket when
you are not using the unit for a long time. To
disconnect the mains lead, pull it out by the
plug. Never pull the mains lead itself.
Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord
or if the unit has been dropped or damaged.
Do not bend the mains lead forcibly, or place
a heavy object on it. This will damage the
lead and may cause fire or electrical shock.
Prevent metallic objects from coming into
contact with the metal parts of the connecting
section. If this happens, a short may occur
and the unit may be damaged.
Always keep metal contacts clean.
Do not disassemble the unit.
Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the
unit.
238
Aaep epee a
Ocee aapa epec
ce, ec e cyec ee
pe. cee cee ypa
e e a pae. Ha e
e a ca yp.
He cyapye aapa c
pee yp, ec aapa
ya pee.
C e epeae cee p
e cae a e ee pee.
e pec pee
pa a ap paee
epec .
Hae eaece pee e
cpacac c eaec
aa cee ac.
Ec cyc, e p
pe aae, aapa e
pee.
Bcea epae eaece
a ce.
He papae aapa.
He epae aapa exaec
pa e pe e.

precautions
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
While the unit is in use, particularly during

charging, keep it away from AM receivers
and video equipment. AM receivers and
video equipment disturb AM reception and
video operation.
The unit becomes warm during use. This is
not a malfunction.
Do not place the unit in locations that are:
Extremely hot or cold
Dusty or dirty
Very humid
Vibrating
p ca aapaa, ce
pe ap, epe e ae
pe AM-paea
eaapayp. pe AMpaea eaapaypa
apya AM-pape pay
eaapayp.
B pecce cyaa aapa
apeaec. Oa e ec
ecpac.
He paeae aapa ecax:
peep apx xx
x px
Oe ax
epex pa
Rechargeable battery pack
epeapae aape
cye peeyee
ape ycpc
eaapaypy c ye ap.
pepae ecac cya
-a p aa e ycae
cpce eaecx
pee c ca aape a.
He epe epeapae aape
.
Ha e epae epeapae
aape ec
eepayp ce 60C, apep, e
cae e ae,
papa ce ece,
p ce ce.
epeapae aape
cea e cyx.
He epae epeapae
aape ec ax exaecx yap.
He papae epeapae
aape e ee e
cpy.
Hae ppee epeapae
aape eaapaype.
apa aape a cyae
caec ec e paaec a
e cx ec.
epeapae aape e
ec epae. He
epae epeapae
aape ec a.
Ec epeapae aape
ee pe e cyec,
c ape e xpae
e. epeapae aape
ex c papa
pa .
pae epeapae aape
cyx pxa ece.
Use only the specified charger or video

equipment with the charging function.
To prevent accident from a short circuit, do
not allow metal objects to come into contact
with the battery terminals.
Keep the rechargeable battery pack away
from fire.
Never expose the rechargeable battery pack
to temperatures above 60 C (140 F), such as
in a car parked in the sun or under direct
sunlight.
Keep the rechargeable battery pack dry.
Do not expose the rechargeable battery pack
to any mechanical shock.
Do not disassemble nor modify the
rechargeable battery pack.
Attach the rechargeable battery pack to video
equipment securely.
Charging while some capacity remains does
not affect the original battery capacity.
The rechargeable battery pack is not resistant
to water. Do not wet the rechargeable battery
pack.
Unless you use the rechargeable battery pack
for a long period, store the battery pack after
you charge it fully and use it completely once
a year.
Store the rechargeable battery pack in a cool,
dry place.
239

precautions
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
Notes on dry batteries
Cyxe aape
To avoid possible damage from battery

leakage or corrosion, observe the following:
Be sure to insert the batteries with the +
polarities matched to the + marks.
Dry batteries are not rechargeable.
Do not use a combination of new and old
batteries.
Do not use different types of batteries.
Current flows from batteries when you are
not using them for a long time.
Do not use leaking batteries.
B eae pee
eaep cece ye
ypee eeca aapee
pp cae ceyee:
p ycae aapee cae
pay pc +
cec c ea + .
Cyxe aape e epeapa.
He cye e aape ece
c cap.
He cye aape pa a.
Ec aape e cyc
ee pe, cee
papac.
He cye aape, pe
e.
If batteries are leaking

Wipe off the liquid in the battery
compartment carefully before replacing the
batteries.
If you touch the liquid, wash it off with
water.
If the liquid get into your eyes, wash your
eyes with a lot of water and then consult a
doctor.
If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder
and contact your nearest Sony dealer.
Ec pa yea ypee
eeca aapee
epe e, a ae aape,
ae ppe ca c
cee aapee.
B cyae aa c a y,
ce ee .
B cyae aa c aa,
pe aa ec
, ce e paec pay.
B cyae e ax-
pe, e eaepy
ca a paec
a cepc ep Sony.
240
English
Specifications
Video camera
recorder
Input/Output connectors
S video input/output
Input/output auto switch
4-pin mini DIN
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p,
75 ohms, unbalanced
Chrominance signal: 0.3 Vp-p,
75 ohms, unbalanced
Video input/output
RCA pin-jack, 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
LCD screen
Picture
6.2 cm (2.5 type)
Total dot number
211 000 (960 220)
General
Power requirements
7.2 V (battery pack)
8.4 V (AC Adaptor)
Average power consumption
(when using the battery pack)
During camera recording using
LCD
4.7 W
Viewfinder
4.1 W
Operating temperature
0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F)
Storage temperature
20 C to +60 C (4 F to +140 F)
Dimensions (approx.)
120 159 393 mm (4 3/4 6 3/8
15 1/2 in) (w/h/d)
Mass (approx.)
1.5 kg (3 lb 6 oz) including the
hood with a lens cap
1.6 kg (3 lb 9 oz)
including the rechargeable battery
pack, NP-F570 and cassette
DVM60
Supplied accessories
See page 5.
AC Adaptor
AC-L15A/L15B
Power requirements
100 V - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Current consumption
0.35 - 0.18 A
Power consumption
18 W
Output voltage
DC OUT: 8.4 V*
Operating temperature
0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F)
Storage temperature
20 C to +60 C (4 F to +140 F)
56 31 100 mm
(2 1/4 1 1/4 4 in) (w/h/d)
excluding projecting parts
Mass (approx.)
190 g (6.7 oz)
excluding the mains lead
* See the label on the AC Adaptor
for other specifications.
Rechargeable
battery pack
NP-F570
Output voltage
DC 7.2 V
Capacity
15.8 Wh
38.4 20.6 70.8 mm (1 9/16
13/16 2 7/8 in) (w/h/d)
Mass (approx.)
100 g (3.5 oz)
Type
Lithium ion
Design and specifications are

subject to change without notice.
System
Video recording system
2 rotary heads
Helical scanning system
Audio recording system
Rotary heads, PCM system
Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz,
stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits
(Fs48 kHz, stereo)
Video signal
PAL colour, CCIR standards
Usable cassette
Mini DV cassette with the
mark printed
Tape speed
SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/s
LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/s
Recording/playback time (using
cassette DVM60)
SP: 1 h
LP: 1.5 h
Fast-forward/rewind time (using
cassette DVM60)
Approx. 2 min and 30 s
Viewfinder
Electric viewfinder (colour)
Image device
1/3 type CCD (3 Charge Coupled
Device)
Approx. 450 000 pixels
(Effective: Approx. 400 000 pixels)
Lens
Combined power zoom lens
Filter diameter 58 mm (2 3/8 in)
12 (Optical), 48 (Digital)
F1.6 - 2.4
Focal length
6 - 72 mm (1/4 - 2 7/8 in)
When converted to a 35 mm still
camera
43.2 - 518.4 mm (1 3/4 - 20 1/2 in)
Colour temperature
Auto, nIndoor (3 200 K),
Outdoor (5 800 K),
Minimum illumination
1 lux (F1.6)
unbalanced
Audio input/output
RCA pin-jack, 327 mV, (at output
impedance more than 47 kilohms)
Output impedance with less than
2.2 kilohms
Input impedance more than
47 kilohms
Headphones jack
Stereo minijack ( 3.5 mm)
LANC control jack
Stereo mini-minijack ( 2.5 mm)
MIC jack
Minijack, 0.388 mV low impedance with 2.5 to 3.0 V DC, output
impedance 6.8 kilohms ( 3.5 mm)
Stereo type
DV Interface
4-pin connector
Speaker
Dynamic speaker ( 20 mm)
241
Pycc
Texece xapaepc
Beaepa
Ccea
Ccea eac
2 paaec
Ccea a
exaec paep
Ccea ayac
Bpaaec , ccea
M
cpea: 12 (c
ac 32 , cepe 1, cepe
2), 16
(C ac 48 , cepe)
Beca
e ca PAL, caap
MP
cyee acce
acce DV c ea
a
Cpc e
SP: p. 18,81 /c
LP: p. 12,56 /c
Bpe ac/
cpee (p
ca acce
DVM60)
SP: 1
LP: 1,5
Bpe ycpe epe
epe/aa (p
ca acce
DVM60)
p. 2 . 30 ce.
Bcae
epec cae
(e)
ppae pae
C a 1/3 (3 ppa c
ap c)
p. 450 000 e
(Pae: p. 400 000 e)
Oe
epca e c
epp
pacapa
aep pa 58
12 (ec), 48
(p)
F1.6 - 2.4
yce pacce
6 - 72
p pepaa 35-
aepy
43,2 - 518,4
ea eepaypa
Apeypae, n
ee (3 200 K),
a ye (5 800 K),
Maa ceec
1 c (F1.6)
Pae xx/
xx ca
Bex/ex S
Aaec epeae
xa/xa
4-pe -e DIN
Ca pc: 1 B a y,
75 O, ecep
242
Ca ec: 0,3 B a
y, 75 O, ecep
Be x/x
Aaec epeae
xa/xa
Pae RCA, paax caa 1
B a y, 75 O,
ecep
Ay x/x
Aaec epeae
xa/xa
Pae RCA, 327 B (p
x cpe ee
47 O)
e xe
cpee - eee 2,2 O
e xe cpee ee
47 O
e x
ee
Cepeece -e
( 3,5 )
e ypae LANC
Cepeece -e
( 2,5 )
e MIC
M-e, 0,388 B, e
e cpee 2,5
3,0 B c a,
xe e cpee
6,8 O ( 3,5 )
Cepeec
epec DV
4-p pae
ppe
a ppe
( 20 )
pa
paee
6,2 c ( 2,5)
Oee ec ee
pae
211 000 (960 220)
Oe xapaepc
Tpea a
7,2 B (aape )
8,4 B (Aaep epee
a)
Cpe peea
c
(p ca aape
a)
B pe ac eaep
c
4,7 B
Bcae
4,1 B
Paa eepaypa
O 0 C 40 C
Teepaypa xpae
O 20 C +60 C
Paep (p.)
120 159 393 (//)
Bec (p.)
1,5
a ey c p
ea
1,6
aape NP-F570
accey DVM60
paaee paec
C. cp. 5.
Aaep epee a
AC-L15A/L15B
Tpea a
100 B - 240 B epee a,
50/60
Pacx a
0,35 0,18 A
peea c
18 B
Bxe apee
DC OUT: 8,4 B*
Paa eepaypa
O 0 C 40 C
Teepaypa xpae
O 20 C +60 C
Paep (p.)
56 31 100
(//), e a
cyae ac
Bec (p.)
190
e cee ypa
* ee exece
xapaepc c. a
ee aaepa
epee a.
epeapae
aape
NP-F570
Bxe apee
7,2 B c. a
Mc
15,8 B-.
Paep (p.)
38.4 20.6 70.8 (//)
Bec (p.)
100
T
e-
cpy exece
xapaepc y
ec e
peape yee.
Quick Reference
Oepa cpa
Identifying the parts

and controls
Oaee ace
peyp
Camcorder
Beaepa
qa
qs
qd
qf
qg
8
1 a INDEX MARK (cp. 91)
2 Zoom ring (p. 32)
2 pacapa (cp. 32)
3 Focus ring (p. 83)
3 ycp (cp. 83)
4 ND FILTER selector (p. 68)
4 Ceep ND FILTER (cp. 68)
5 FOCUS selector (p. 83)
5 Ceep FOCUS (cp. 83)
6 PUSH AUTO button (p. 83)
6 a PUSH AUTO (cp. 83)
7 FADER button (p. 57)
7 a FADER (cp. 57)
8 BACK LIGHT button (p. 34)
8 a BACK LIGHT (cp. 34)
9 END SEARCH button (p. 38)
9 a END SEARCH (cp. 38)
0 EDITSEARCH buttons (p. 38)
0 EDITSEARCH (cp. 38)
qa EXPOSURE dial (p. 65)
qa c EXPOSURE (cp. 65)
qs EXPOSURE button (p. 65)

qd Display window (p. 253)
qf OPEN button (p. 24, 40)
qg SPOT LIGHT button (p. 35)
Quick Reference / Oepa cpa
1 INDEX MARK button (p. 91)
qs a EXPOSURE (cp. 65)

qd O ce (cp. 253)
qf a OPEN (cp. 24, 40)
qg a SPOT LIGHT (cp. 35)
243
Identifying the parts and

controls
Oaee ace
peyp
These are trademarks.
pe ap.
Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe

The intelligent accessory shoe supplies
power to optional accessories such as a video
light or microphone.
The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the
POWER switch, allowing you to turn the
power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer
to the operating instructions of the accessory
for further information.
The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety
device for fixing the installed accessory
securely. To connect an accessory, press
down and push it to the end, and then
tighten the screw.
To remove an accessory, loosen the screw,
and then press down and pull out the
accessory.
244
pea epae
caex paece
epae caex
paece ae ae a
caee paec, ae
a ecea p.
epae caex
paece cee c
epeaee POWER, e
a a aaee a
epae ae. pe cee
pc cpy cyaa
caex paece.
B epaee caex
paece eec
pexpaee ycpc
ae ca ycae
paec. cee
paec ae ee
ypa, a ae ae .
c paec cae
, a ae ae paec
e ee.

controls
Oaee ace
peyp
qh
qj
wh
qk
wj
ql
wk
wl
w;
wa
DISPLAY
ws
DATA CODE
wd
TITLE
PLAY
DIGITAL
EFFECT
MEMORY
INDEX
DELETE
e;
MEMORY MIX
ea
PICTURE
EFFECT
es
wf
ed
wg
ef
qh ppe
qj LCD screen (p. 27)
qj pa (cp. 27)
qk LCD BRIGHT buttons (p. 28)
qk LCD BRIGHT (cp. 28)
ql VOLUME buttons (p. 40)
ql VOLUME (cp. 40)
w; MEMORY PLAY button (p. 193)
w; a MEMORY PLAY (cp. 193)
wa DISPLAY button (p. 41)
wa a DISPLAY (cp. 41)
ws MEMORY button (p. 184, 193)
ws a MEMORY (cp. 184, 193)
wd DATA CODE button (p. 41)
wd a DATA CODE (cp. 41)
wf TITLE button (p. 144)
wf a TITLE (cp. 144)
wg
(self-timer) button (p. 36, 50, 181)
wh Battery pack (p. 13)

wj ZEBRA selector (p. 69)
wk RESET button (p. 221)
wl MEMORY INDEX button (p. 195)
e; MEMORY DELETE button (p. 204)
ea MEMORY + button (p. 184, 193)
es MEMORY MIX button (p. 184)
ed PICTURE EFFECT button (p. 58)
ef DIGITAL EFFECT button (p. 61)
(Taep caayca)
wg a
(cp. 36, 50, 181)
qh Speaker
wh aape (cp. 13)

wj epeae ZEBRA (cp. 69)
wk a RESET (cp. 228)
wl a MEMORY INDEX (cp. 195)
e; a MEMORY DELETE (cp. 204)
ea a MEMORY + (cp. 184, 193)
es a MEMORY MIX (cp. 184)
ed a PICTURE EFFECT (cp. 58)
ef a DIGITAL EFFECT (cp. 61)
245

controls
Oaee ace
peyp
eg
ek
eh
el
ej
r;
SLOW
STOP
REC
REW
ra
AUDIO DUB
PLAY
FF
rs
PAUSE
rd
rf
eg Handle zoom lever (p. 31)
eh Handle zoom switch (p. 31)
ej Video control buttons (p. 40, 44, 123)
C SLOW (slow playback)
AUDIO DUB (dubbing)
x STOP (stop)
m REW (rewind)
N PLAY (playback)
M FF (Fast-forward)
X PAUSE (pause)
z REC (recording)
The control buttons light up when you set
the POWER switch to VCR.
ek Handle REC START/STOP button (p. 29)
el Remote sensor/infrared ray emitter
r; Camera recording lamp (p. 24)
ra REC START/STOP button (p. 29)
rs Lens
rd Hood with a lens cap (p. 247)
rf Lens hood fixing screw
eg Pa paca a pye
(cp. 31)
eh B ca e
ea (cp. 31)
ej ep (cp. 40, 44,
123)
C SLOW (aeee
cpeee)
AUDIO DUB (epeac)
x STOP (caa)
m REW (ycpea epea aa)
N PLAY (cpeee)
M FF (ycpea epea epe)
X PAUSE (aya)
z REC (ac)
ypae ceac,
ec epeae POWER
ycae ee VCR.
ek a REC START/STOP a pye
(cp. 29)
el ca cecp/
papac yae
r; aa ac eaep
(cp. 24)
ra a REC START/STOP (aa/
caa ac) (cp. 29)
rs Oe
rd ea ea c p (cp.
247)
rf B ca e
ea
246

controls
Oaee ace
peyp
Attaching/removing the eyecup

When removing the eyecup, pull lightly the
upper edge of it with your fingers [a], insert a
finger into the gap that appears between the
eyecup and viewfinder [b], then remove it.
When attaching the eyecup, fit it onto the
camcorder slide it all the way along grooves
until it stops.
Do not pull the eyecup inward or with
excessive force [c]. Doing so may damage the
eyecup.
ppeee/ce ypa
p c ypa cea e
aa a e epx pa [a],
cae ae c ap
ey yp caee [b],
ae ce e.
ppe yp, aee e
a aepy ce ypa
apax.
He cpaae e yp e
paae x yc [c].
e pec pee ypa.
[a]
[b]
[c]
OP
EN
CL
When using additional filters

We recommend that you use Sony made
filters.
OS
ppeee/ce e ea
c p

,

,

.
,

.
Attaching/removing the hood with a lens

cap
To attach the hood with a lens cap, fit the line
on the hood to the corresponding line on the
lens frame, then screw the hood clockwise and
tighten the lower hood fixing screw.
To remove the hood with a lens cap, loosen the
lower hood fixing screw, and unscrew the
hood with a lens cap counterclockwise.
To open/close the shutter of the

hood with a lens cap, slide the
knob to your desired direction
according to the arrow./
p/ap py
e c p ea,
epee pa y
apae cec c
cpe.
p ca
ex p
Peeyec ca p
pca Sony.
247

controls
Oaee ace
peyp
rg
th
rh
rj
rk
rl
tj
t;
tk
ta
tl
ts
y;
td
ya
tf
ys
tg
yd
rg Hooks for shoulder strap
rg p ee pe
rh Power zoom lever (p. 31)
rh Pa pa pacapa
(cp. 31)
rj PHOTO button (p. 48, 177)

rk BATT (battery) RELEASE lever (p. 13)
rl PROGRAM AE button (p. 79)
t; AUTO LOCK selector (p. 63)
ta WHT BAL button (p. 72)
ts AUDIO LEVEL button (p. 75)
td MENU button (p. 156)
tf SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 156)
tg Memory Stick slot (p. 173)
th Cassette lid (p. 22)
tj PUSH button (p. 22)
rj a PHOTO (cp. 48, 177)

rk Pa BATT RELEASE (cp. 13)
rl a PROGRAM AE (cp. 79)
t; epeae AUTO LOCK (cp. 63)
ta a WHT BAL (cp. 72)
ts a AUDIO LEVEL (cp. 75)
td a MENU (cp. 156)
tf c SEL/PUSH EXEC (cp. 156)
tg e Memory Stick (cp. 173)
th pa acce cea (cp. 22)
tj a PUSH (cp. 22)
248

controls
Oaee ace
peyp
tk Grip strap
tk Pee axaa
tl LOCK switch (p. 24)
tl epeae LOCK (cp. 24)
y; POWER switch (p. 24)
y; epeae POWER (cp. 24)
ya START/STOP button (p. 24)
ya a START/STOP (cp. 24)

ys a SHUTTER SPEED (cp. 66)
yd Access lamp (p. 173)
yd aa pae (cp. 173)
Fastening the grip strap
ppeee pe axaa
Fasten the grip strap firmly.
Hae ppee pee axaa.
Attaching the shoulder strap

Attach the shoulder strap supplied with your
camcorder to the hooks for the shoulder strap.
ppeee ee pe
ppee ee pee, paae
Bae eaepe, pa
ee pe.
ys SHUTTER SPEED button (p. 66)
249

controls
Oaee ace
peyp
yf
ud
yg
uf
yh
ug
yj
uh
yk
uj
yl
uk
u;
ul
ua
i;
us
ia
is
yf Carrying handle
yf Pya epec
yg Remote sensor
yg a ca ypae
yh Camera recording lamp (p. 24)
yh aa ac eaep
(cp. 24)
yj CUSTOM PRESET button (p. 77)

yk Viewfinder adjustment lever (p. 30)
yl Hook for removing the viewfinder
(p. 235)
yj a CUSTOM PRESET (cp. 77)

yk Pa peyp cae
(cp. 30)
u; EJECT switch (p. 22)
yl p c cae
(cp. 235)
ua DC IN jack (p. 14)
u; epeae EJECT (cp. 22)
us Tripod receptacle
Make sure that the length of the tripod
screw is less than 6.5 mm (9/32 inch).
Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod
securely and the screw may damage your
camcorder.
ua e DC IN (cp. 14)
ud Intelligent accessory shoe

uf MIC/LINE switch (p. 137)
us e aa
eec, a a aa e
peae 6,5 . B p cyae
B e cee ae ppe
a, a e pe
eaepy.
ud epae caex
paece
uf epeae MIC/LINE (cp. 137)
250

controls
Oaee ace
peyp
ug MIC jack (PLUG IN POWER) (p. 137)

The MIC jack is used to supply the power
to the plug-in-power microphone
connected, and is used as an audio input
jack for an external microphone or audio
equipment. When connecting an external
microphone, set the MIC/LINE switch to
MIC, and when connecting audio
equipment, set it to LINE.
uj S VIDEO jack (p. 46, 107, 130, 189)
ug e MIC (PLUG IN POWER)

(cp. 137)
e MIC cyec a
a a e p c
aee a, a ae
aece x ea ee
pa y aapayp.
p e ee pa
ycae epeae MIC/LINE
ee MIC, a p e
y aapayp ycae e
ee LINE.
uk VIDEO jack (p. 46, 107, 130, 189)
uh Mp (cp. 139)
ul AUDIO L/R jack (p. 46, 107, 130, 139)
uj e S VIDEO (cp. 46, 107, 130, 189)
uh Microphone (p. 139)
i;
DV Interface (p. 109, 132, 190)

This i.LINK mark is a trademark of Sony
Corporation and indicates that this
product is in agreement with IEEE 13941995 specifications and their revisions.
The
DV Interface is i.LINK compatible.
LANC jack
LANC stands for Local Application
Control Bus System. The LANC control
jack is used for controlling the tape
transport of video equipment and
peripherals connected to it. This jack has
the same function as the jack indicated as
CONTROL L or REMOTE.
is i (headphones) jack
When you use headphones, the speaker on
your camcorder is silent.
ul e AUDIO L/R (cp. 46, 107, 130,

139)
i; epec DV (cp. 109, 132, 190)
a i.LINK ec p ap
ppa Sony yaae a ,
py cecye exec
yc caap IEEE 1394-1995
x e.
epec DV ec i.LINKcec.
ia e LANC
LANC aae ccey aaa
ec ypae. e
ypae LANC cyec
p a epeeee e
eaapayp ex
e epepx ycpc. ae
e ee ay e y, a
pae, aee CONTROL L
REMOTE.
ia
uk e VIDEO (cp. 46, 107, 130, 189)
is e i (e ee)
Ec cyc e
ee, ppe a
eaepe aec.
251

controls
Remote Commander
The buttons that have the same name on the
Remote Commander as on your camcorder
function identically to the buttons on your
camcorder.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Oaee ace
peyp
y ca
ypae
ya ca ypae,
pe e ae aea
c a a eaepe,
ypy e.
9
0
qa
qs
7
8
qd
1 Transmitter
Point toward the remote sensor to control
your camcorder after turning on your
camcorder.
1 epea
ypae eaep
apae y a a ce ee
e.
2 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 93)
2 a ZERO SET MEMORY (cp. 93)
3 PHOTO button (p. 48, 177)
3 a PHOTO (cp. 48, 177)
4 DISPLAY button (p. 41)
4 a DISPLAY (cp. 41)
5 Memory control buttons (p. 184, 193)
5 ypae a
(cp. 184, 193)
6 SEARCH MODE button (p. 95, 97, 99, 101)

7 Video control buttons (p. 44)
6 a SEARCH MODE (cp. 95, 97, 99,

101)
8 REC button (p. 130)/MARK button

(p. 124)
7 ep (cp. 44)
9 DATA CODE button (p. 41)
8 a REC (cp. 130)/a MARK

(cp. 124)
0 START/STOP button (p. 24)
9 a DATA CODE (cp. 41)
qa Power zoom button (p. 31)
0 a START/STOP (cp. 24)
qs ./> buttons (p. 95, 97, 99, 101)

qd AUDIO DUB button (p. 140)
qa a pa pacapa
(cp. 31)
qs ./> (cp. 95, 97, 99, 101)
qd a AUDIO DUB (cp. 140)
252

controls
Oaee ace
peyp
To prepare the Remote Commander
ya
ca ypae
Insert two R6 (size AA) batteries by matching

the + and polarities on the batteries to
the + marks inside the battery compartment.
Display window
pea yy ca
ypae
epe ca a a
pacc cx c cea,
apep px cex ye
a pepa. B p cyae
cae ypaee e e
eca.
aa eaepa paae pee
ya ca ypae VTR
2. Pe ya ca
ypae 1, 2 3 cyc
a eaep pyx
ea p Sony
eae epa pa ya
ca ypae. Ec
cyec py ea
p Sony, paa pee VTR
2, peeyec e pe ya
ca ypae ap
a ca ypae
eaa ep ya.
O ce
Notes on the Remote Commander

Point the remote sensor away from strong
light sources such as direct sunlight or
overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote
Commander may not function properly.
mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3
misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR
in the commander mode VTR 2, we
recommend changing the commander mode
or covering the sensor of the VCR with black
paper.
Bcae e aape R6 (paepa AA),

ca pc +
c aa + yp cea aapee.
2
1
1 Remaining battery time(p. 14)/

Tape counter (p. 93)/
Memory counter (p. 194)/
Time code (p. 33)/
Self-diagnosis (p. 222)
1 Ocaeec pe pa
aape a (cp. 14)/Ce
e (cp. 93)/Ce a
(cp. 194)/ pee (cp. 33)/
Caaca (cp. 229)
2 FULL charge (p. 14)
2 a apa - FULL (cp. 14)
3 Remianing battery (p. 14)
3 Ocac ap (cp. 14)
253
Oaee ace
peyp

controls
Operation indicators
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
qa
qs
qd
qf
qg
Pae ap
1 2 0 min
W
T
ST I L L
1 6 : 9 W I DE
NEG . AR T
AU TO
5 0 AWB
F11
0 dB
4
7 2003
STBY
ND1
0:1 2:3 4
1 2 0 min
Z E RO S E T
M E MO R Y
E ND
S E A RCH
DV I N
1 6B I T
1000019
1 2:0 5:5 6
1 Cassette memory (p. 210)
1 accea a (cp. 210)
2 Remaining battery time (p. 33)
2 Ocaeec pe pa
aape a (cp. 33)
3 Zoom (p. 31)/Exposure (p. 65)/Data file

name (p. 170)
4 Digital effect (p. 60)/FADER (p. 56)/
MEMORY MIX (p. 184)
5 16:9WIDE (p. 54)/PROG. SCAN (p. 51)
3 Tpaca (cp. 31)/c

(cp. 65)/ aa ax (cp. 170)
4 p e (cp. 60)/FADER
(cp. 56)/MEMORY MIX (cp. 184)
6 Picture effect (p. 58)
5 16:9WIDE (cp. 54)/PROG. SCAN

(cp. 51)
7 ND filter (p. 68)
6 e pae (cp. 58)
8 Custom preset (p. 77)
7 p ND (cp. 68)
9 Data code (p. 42)
8 yaa acpa (cp. 77)

9 ax (cp. 42)
254
qh
qj
qk
ql
w;
wa
ws
wd
wf
wg
wh
wj
wk
wl

controls
Oaee ace
peyp
0 LCD bright(p. 28)/Volume (p. 40)
0 pc (cp. 28)/pc
(cp. 40)
qa Date
qs PROGRAM AE (p. 79)
qd Backlight (p. 34)/Spot light (p. 35)
qf SteadyShot OFF (p. 158)
qa aa
qs PROGRAM AE (cp. 79)
qd a cea (cp. 34)/
pep (cp. 35)
qg Manual focus/Infinity (p. 83, 84)
qf aee OFF y
SteadyShot (cp. 164)
qh Recording mode (p. 161)
qg Pya ycpa/caa a
ecec (cp. 83, 84)
qj Standby/Recording (p. 24)/Video control

mode (p. 44)/Image quality mode
(p. 174)
qk Warning (p. 230)
ql Tape counter (p. 93)/Time code (p. 33)/
Self-diagnosis (p. 222)/Photo mode
(p. 48)/Image number (p. 194)
w; Remaining tape (p. 33)/Memory
playback (p. 194)
ws END SEARCH (p. 38)

wd DV IN (p. 133)/A/VtDV OUT
wf Audio mode (p. 161)
wg Data file name
This indicator appears when the MEMORY
MIX functions work.
qj Oae/ac (cp. 24)/Pe

ep (cp. 44)/Pe
aeca pae (cp. 174)
qk peypeee (cp. 230)
ql Ce e (cp. 93)/ pee
(cp. 33)/Caaca
(cp. 229)/pe (cp. 48)/Hep
pae (cp. 194)
w; Ocaac ea (cp. 33)/
Bcpeee a (cp. 194)
wa ERO SET MEMORY (cp. 93)/FRAME
REC (cp. 89)/ac c epaa
(cp. 86)
ws END SEARCH (cp. 38)
wd DV IN (cp. 133)/A/VtDV OUT
wf Aype (cp. 167)
wh Audio input level/Time
wg aa ax
ap ec pe
pa y MEMORY MIX.
wj Continuous mode (p. 179)
wh pe aycaa a xe/
Bpe
wk Video flash ready

This indicator appears when you use the
video flash light (optional).
wl Self-timer (p. 36)
wj Hepep pe (cp. 179)

wk c ec
ap ec p
ca ec
(ppeac e).
wa ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 93)/FRAME REC

(p. 89)/Interval recording (p. 86)
qh Pe ac (cp. 167)
wl Taep caayca (cp. 36)
255
English
Quick Function Guide

Functions to adjust exposure (in the recording mode)
In insufficient light
In dark environments such as sunset, fireworks, or
general night views
In spotlight, such as at the theater or a formal event
Low lux mode (p. 79)

Sunset & moon mode (p. 79)
BACK LIGHT (p. 34)
SPOT LIGHT (p. 35)
Functions to give images more impact (in the recording mode)

Smooth transition between scenes
Taking a still picture
Digital processing of images
FADER (p. 56)

PHOTO (p. 48, 177)
PICTURE EFFECT (p. 58)/DIGITAL
EFFECT (p. 60)
TITLE (p. 143)
Functions to give a natural appearance to your recordings

(in the recording mode)
Preventing deterioration of picture quality in digital
zoom
Focusing manually
Recording fast-moving subjects
D ZOOM [MENU] (p. 156)

Manual focus (p. 83)
Sports lesson mode (p. 79)
Functions to be used in editing (in the recording mode)

Watching the picture on a wide-screen TV
Viewing images using a personal computer
Wide mode (p. 54)

Memory Stick (p. 170)
Functions to be used after recording (in the playback mode)

Digital processing of recorded images
PICTURE EFFECT (p. 104)/DIGITAL

EFFECT (p. 105)
Displaying the date/time or various settings when you Data code (p. 42)
recorded
Quickly locating a desired scene
Zero set memory (p. 93)
Searching for scenes having a title
Title search (p. 97)
Searching for scenes recorded in the photo mode
Photo search (p. 101)
Scanning scenes recorded in the photo mode
Photo scan (p. 103)
Playing back monaural sound or sub sound
HiFi SOUND [MENU] (p. 156)
256
Pycc
pae pyc y
y peyp c ( pee ac)
p eca cee
B ex pyax ycx, apep
aa ca, eepep e e
Cea e c ae ce
p pep cee, apep
eape a a epe
Pe ceec (cp. 79)

Pe aaa ca y
cee (cp. 79)
BACK LIGHT (cp. 34)
SPOT LIGHT (cp. 35)
y pa e aca pae ( pee

ac)
a epex ey aca
a
Cea e pae
pa paa pae
Haee pa
y FADER (cp. 56)

PHOTO (cp. 48, 177)
PICTURE EFFECT (cp. 58)/DIGITAL
EFFECT (cp. 60)
TITLE (cp. 143)
y pa ac ecece a
( pee ac)
D ZOOM [MENU] (cp. 156)
Pya ycpa (cp. 83)
Pe cpx cca
(cp. 79)
y, cyee p ae ( pee ac)

pcp pae a ppa
eepe
pcp pae c
epca epa
ppa pe (cp. 54)

Memory Stick (cp. 170)
y, cyee ce ac ( pee cpee)

pa paa acax pae
Opaee pe ac a/pee
pax yca
cp c yx
c a c p
c , acax pee
Capae , acax
pee
Bcpeee ec
cae ya
PICTURE EFFECT (cp. 104)/DIGITAL

EFFECT (cp. 105)
ax (cp. 42)
a ye e (cp. 93)
c pa (cp. 97)
c (cp. 101)
capae (cp. 103)
pepaee yxye aeca

pae p p paca
Pya ycpa
ac cp yxc e
HiFi SOUND [MENU] (cp. 156)
257
English
Index
A, B
A/V connecting cable
........................... 46, 107, 130
AC Adaptor .......................... 14
Adjusting shutter speed ..... 66
Adjusting viewfinder .......... 30
AE SHIFT .............................. 79
Audio dubbing ................... 137
AUDIO LEVEL .................... 75
AUDIO MIX ....................... 159
AUDIO MODE ................... 161
AUTO SHTR ....................... 158
BACK LIGHT ....................... 34
Battery pack .......................... 13
BEEP .................................... 163
C, D
Camera chromakey ........... 182
Cassette memory ........ 10, 210
Charging battery .................. 14
Charging the built-in
rechargeable battery ....... 236
Clock set ................................ 20
COLOUR BAR ................... 163
Connection
(dubbing a tape) ........... 107
(viewing on TV) ............. 46
Continuous ......................... 178
Custom preset ...................... 77
Cut recording ....................... 89
Data code .............................. 42
Date search ........................... 99
Date/time indicator ............ 43
DEMO .................................. 162
DIGITAL EFFECT ................ 60
Digital program editing ..... 110
DISPLAY ............................... 41
DOT ....................................... 56
Dual sound track tape ....... 212
Dubbing a tape ................... 107
E
EDITSEARCH ...................... 38
END SEARCH ............... 38, 45
Exposure ............................... 64
External microphone
(optional) .......................... 251
F, G, H
Fade in/out ........................... 56
FADER ................................... 56
FLASH MOTION ................. 60
FOCUS ................................... 83
Format ................................. 160
Full charge ............................ 14
258
Grip strap ............................ 249

Guide frame .......................... 53
Headphones jack ............... 251
Heads ................................... 235
HiFi SOUND ...................... 159
I, J, K, L
i.LINK .................................. 214
Image protection ................ 202
Image quality mode .......... 174
INDEX MARK ...................... 91
INDEX (Multiple) display 195
Index search .......................... 95
InfoLITHIUM battery ..... 14
Intelligent accessory shoe . 138
Interval recording ................ 85
JPEG ..................................... 170
Labeling a cassette ............. 151
LANC .................................. 251
LCD screen ........................... 27
LUMINANCEKEY .............. 60
M, N
Main sound ......................... 159
Manual adjustment ............. 63
Manual focus ........................ 83
Memory chromakey .......... 182
Memory luminancekey ..... 182
Memory mix ....................... 182
Memory overlap ................ 182
Memory photo recording . 177
Memory Stick ................. 170
Menu settings ..................... 156
MIC (PLUG IN POWER) .. 137
Mirror mode ......................... 27
Moisture condensation ..... 234
MONOTONE ....................... 56
ND filter ................................ 67
Normal charge ..................... 14
O, P, Q
OLD MOVIE ......................... 60
Operation indicators ......... 254
OVERLAP ............................. 56
PAL system ......................... 233
Photo scan ........................... 103
Photo search ....................... 101
PICTURE EFFECT ............... 58
Picture search ....................... 44
Playback pause ..................... 44
Power sources
(battery pack) ................. 13
(car battery) .................... 19
(wall socket) ................... 18
Power zoom .......................... 31
Print mark ........................... 208
PROGRAM AE ..................... 79
Progressive recording ......... 51
R, S
Rec Review ........................... 39
Recording level .................... 75
Recording time ..................... 16
Remaining battery time
indicator ............................. 33
Remaining tape indicator ... 33
Remote Commander ......... 252
Remote control jack (LANC)
........................................... 251
Remote sensor .................... 246
RESET .................................. 221
S VIDEO jack ...... 47, 107, 130
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial ...... 156
Self-diagnosis display ....... 222
Self-timer ............... 36, 50, 181
Skip scan ............................... 44
Slide show ........................... 200
Slow playback ...................... 44
Spotlight mode ..................... 35
STEADYSHOT ................... 158
Stereo tape .......................... 212
STILL ..................................... 60
Sub sound ........................... 159
T, U, V
Tape counter ......................... 93
Tape photo recording .......... 48
Telephoto .............................. 31
Time code .............................. 33
Title ...................................... 143
Title search ............................ 97
TRAIL .................................... 60
Transition .............................. 26
TV colour system ............... 233
W, X, Y, Z
Warning indicators ............ 230
White balance ....................... 72
Wide mode ............................ 54
Wide-angle ............................ 31
WIPE ...................................... 56
WORLD TIME .................... 162
Write-protect tab .......... 23, 170
Zebra pattern ........................ 69
Zero set memory function .. 93
Zoom ..................................... 31
Pycc
Aa yaae
A, , B,
Aaep epee
a ................................. 14
Ayepeac ........... 137
aac e .................. 72
aape
InfoLITHIUM .................... 14
aape ............. 13
Be ................. 235
Be p
(ppeaec
e) ........... 251
Bpe ac .................... 16
Bcae y .. 169
e S VIDEO ... 47, 107, 130
e ca
ypae (LANC) ..... 251
e x
ee ................... 251
, , , M
eca
(apa) .......... 195
yaa acpa ... 77
ap WIPE .............. 56
ap a/pee ... 43
ap caec
pee pa
aape a ........ 33
ap caec e ... 33
a caac ... 229
c a
(a
ayyp) ............ 19
(aape ) ...... 13
(epeca ce) ... 18
accea a .... 10, 210
a ae
ec ..................... 182
a ae
pc ......................... 182
a ec
eaep ............... 182
pee ..................... 33
ax ....................... 42
eca a ........ 234
H, O
Haee c
a .......................... 182
Hacpa cpc
apa ........................... 64
Hepep pe ..... 178
Hpaa apa ....... 14
Oepa e/
cee ................. 56
Oc y ................ 165
, P
aya cpee .. 44
epeac acce ...... 107
epex ............................. 26
ea a ............... 208
c a ....................... 99
c pae ......... 44
c e pa ... 44
c ecy ............. 95
c pa ...................... 97
a apa ............... 14
ca a ........... 69
peypeae
ap .................. 230
ppecca ac ..... 51
pcp ac .............. 39
y ca
ypae .................. 252
Pae ap ..... 254
Peypa cae .. 30
Pe aeca
pae ................ 174
Pe pep
cee ...................... 35
Pee axaa ....... 249
Pya peypa ......... 63
Pya ycpa ....... 83
C, T
Ccea PAL ................... 233
Ccea e
eee ................ 233
Ceee
(epeac acce) .. 107
(pcp a pae
eepa) .............. 46
Cee ae
ay/e .... 46, 107, 130
Cepeeca ea .. 212
Ce e ................. 93
Taep
caayca .. 36, 50, 181
Tee ........................... 31
Tp ................................. 143
Tpacap .................. 31
Tpaca .................. 31
, , , ,
pe ac ................ 75
caa ac .............. 20
ca e ............. 156
p ND ........................ 67
pa ............................ 166
ac c cxpaee
a ....................... 177
c ....................... 101
capae ......... 103
y FADER ............... 56
y Memory mix ...... 182
y WORLD TIME ... 168
y a ye
e .......................... 93
p a
ppa ..................... 110
Cea e
py ......... 31
ppa
pe ............................. 54
pa ....................... 27
c ....................... 64
A, B, C, D, E
AE SHIFT ........................... 79
AUDIO LEVEL .................... 75
AUDIO MIX ...................... 165
apa cpe
ayyp
aape ..................... 167
AUTO SHTR ..................... 164
BACK LIGHT ...................... 34
BEEP ............................... 169
COLOUR BAR ................. 169
DEMO .............................. 168
DIGITAL EFFECT .............. 60
DISPLAY ............................ 41
DOT .................................... 56
EDITSEARCH .................... 38
END SEARCH ............. 38, 45
F, H
FLASH MOTION ................ 60
FOCUS .............................. 83
HiFi SOUND ..................... 165
I, J, L
i.LINK ............................... 214
INDEX MARK ..................... 91
JPEG ................................ 170
LANC ............................... 251
LUMINANCEKEY ............... 60
a ca
ypae .................. 246
ecpa ca .. 200
epae
caex
paece ........ 138
c SEL/PUSH EXEC ... 156
aeee
cpeee ........... 44
ac c epaa ..... 85
ac c a
apa .......................... 89
ac pa a ey .... 48
apa aape .............. 14
apa cpe
ayyp
aape ..................... 236
aa pae ..... 202
epa pe .......... 27
pa paa .......... 52
ea c y
p ...................... 212
eec a ac ... 23
Mappa acce ..... 170
M, O, P
Memory Stick ................ 170
MIC (PLUG IN POWER) .. 137
MONOTONE ...................... 56
OLD MOVIE ....................... 60
OVERLAP .......................... 56
PICTURE EFFECT ............ 58
PROGRAM AE ................... 79
R, S, T
RESET ............................. 228
STEADYSHOT ................. 164
STILL ................................. 60
TRAIL ................................. 60
259
aa e e.
B ee ya ay e
e, y a aee
P/D:, pe axc a ee c
px ap p.
a, yaae a ee c px
ap p.
P/D:XX XXXX
1
1. Mec e
2. e
A-0, B-1, C-2, D-3, E-4, F-5, G-6, H-7, I-8, J-9
Printed on 70% or more recycled paper using VOC

(Volatile Organic Compound)-free vegetable oil based ink.
, 70%
, pac

( ).
Printed in Japan

Dcrvx2100e Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dcrvx2100e Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

3-087-415-16 (1)

Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony

pae Bac c ppeee

NOTICE ON THE SUPPLIED AC

For the customers in Europe

Make sure that the following accessories are

1 Wireless Remote Commander (1) (p. 252)

Getting Started / a cyaa

6 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 46, 107)

4 aapea R6 (paepa AA) ya

7 Shoulder strap (1) (p. 249)

5 Memory Stick (1) (cp. 170)

8 Hood with a lens cap (1) (p. 247)

5 Memory Stick (1) (p. 170)

9 21-pin adaptor* (1) (p. 47)

mark printed on their bottom

7 ee pee (1) (cp. 249)

Quick Start Guide

This guide introduces you to the basic way of recording/

Connecting the mains lead

Quick Start Guide

Open the DC IN jack

While pressing the

Push the middle

Close the cassette

Close the cassette lid

Open the shutter of the

Set the POWER switch to

If the ND1 or ND2 indicator

Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD

Set the POWER

Quick Start Guide

Press m to rewind the

Pyc cpy aycy

ceee pa epa (cp. 18)

Pyc cpy aycy

p ca eaep e ee yec aape

caa acce (cp. 22)

ac pae (cp. 24)

Pyc cpy aycy

Using this manual

e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.

Note on cassette memory

Using this manual

Getting Started / a cyaa

TV colour systems differ by country or region.

Using this manual

Contents of the recording cannot be

Cepe aca aepaa

Step 1 Preparing the

To remove the battery pack

Lift up the viewfinder.

Getting Started / a cyaa

(1) Lift up the viewfinder.

Step 1 Preparing the power

Charging the battery pack

Use the battery pack after charging it.

After charging the battery pack

Note on the remaining battery time

Getting Started / a cyaa

Step 1 Preparing the power

Step 1 Preparing the power

Full charge (Normal charge)/

Approximate minutes to charge an empty